TOOLS
Rule Radar
Perps Prop Firm Rule Changes. Tracked Daily.
Your morning update on perps prop firm rule changes, refreshed overnight.
We track the published rules and policies of every perps prop firm on PickAPropFirm.com and keep every version, so when a firm edits a rule we have the before and after in writing. Most of what changes is really nothing: a fixed typo, a clarified sentence, a word added here and there. But real changes stand out fast, and you can literally watch rules and policies tighten line by line. Payout terms creep, consistency thresholds drop, and prices quietly climb. It works the other way too: sometimes payouts improve and rules loosen, and when that happens it’s usually one of our Premier firms.
Perps prop firms are new, and their rules move faster than the CME shops: leverage caps, funding and swap fees, payout rails and drawdown terms can all change between one week and the next. That is exactly why they are on this radar. If a plan looks too good to be true, it almost always is.
Starred changes are the ones we think deserve your attention; the full feed below is everything we caught, right down to the typo fixes.
Treat this page like your morning paper. It updates overnight, so grab your coffee and see what changed. – Jmu (@jmutrades)
See how these firms compare on Top Perp Props ›
Starred changes
PremierMyFundedPerps · Elite AccountsAdded NAS100 and SP500 to the list of instruments with boosted leverage on Elite accounts.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
− rule, and boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
Elite tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000
One-time price, 3% DLL | \$49 | \$95 | \$249 | \$495
One-time price, No DLL | \$89 | \$175 | \$449 | \$889
With 90/10 upgrade, 3% DLL | \$59 | \$114 | \$299 | \$594
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
− Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
is a multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure
NAS100, SP500 | 40x | \$200,000 | \$400,000 | \$1,000,000 | \$2,000,000
US30 | 25x | \$125,000 | \$250,000 | \$625,000 | \$1,250,000
Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000
Oil (CL, BRENTOIL) | 10x | \$50,000 | \$100,000 | \$250,000 | \$500,000
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, US30 has its own cap, and CL
and BRENTOIL share the oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD
market count toward the gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
After
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
+ rule, and boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
Elite tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000
One-time price, 3% DLL | \$49 | \$95 | \$249 | \$495
One-time price, No DLL | \$89 | \$175 | \$449 | \$889
With 90/10 upgrade, 3% DLL | \$59 | \$114 | \$299 | \$594
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
+ Elite accounts use boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
is a multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure
NAS100, SP500 | 40x | \$200,000 | \$400,000 | \$1,000,000 | \$2,000,000
US30 | 25x | \$125,000 | \$250,000 | \$625,000 | \$1,250,000
Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000
Oil (CL, BRENTOIL) | 10x | \$50,000 | \$100,000 | \$250,000 | \$500,000
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, US30 has its own cap, and CL
and BRENTOIL share the oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD
market count toward the gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
− rule, and boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
+ rule, and boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
Elite tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000
One-time price, 3% DLL | \$49 | \$95 | \$249 | \$495
One-time price, No DLL | \$89 | \$175 | \$449 | \$889
With 90/10 upgrade, 3% DLL | \$59 | \$114 | \$299 | \$594
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
− Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
+ Elite accounts use boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
is a multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure
NAS100, SP500 | 40x | \$200,000 | \$400,000 | \$1,000,000 | \$2,000,000
US30 | 25x | \$125,000 | \$250,000 | \$625,000 | \$1,250,000
Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000
Oil (CL, BRENTOIL) | 10x | \$50,000 | \$100,000 | \$250,000 | \$500,000
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, US30 has its own cap, and CL
and BRENTOIL share the oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD
market count toward the gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
PremierE8 Markets Perps · E8 Signature | E8 Markets Help Center5 is now 4.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Minimum profitable days between each payout: 5 (does not apply for first payout)
- A profitable day is considered as a day where the realized closed PnL equals to 0.3% or more.
- You have to achieve profitable days between each payout cycle. After requesting a payout, your previously achieved profitable days will reset to 0.
$75 - $25,000 account
$150 - $50,000 account
$300 - $100,000 account
$450 - $150,000 account
Payout buffer - Before you can start requesting payout, you need to leave a buffer in your account in the same size as your EOD Dynamic Drawdown. The buffer can not be requested. The reason for this is to protect trades from violating EOD by requesting full profit from the account.
If your EOD is 3% and your initial balance $100,000, the buffer is $3000.
Payout caps - Payout caps determine the maximum you can request in a single payout.
A full explanation can be seen in this article.
Maximum amount of payouts per account: 4 (only for the Futures market)
Section: Criteria for the payout:
− This determines how many payouts you can request in total from one account. After you request 5 payouts, no matter the remaining buffer or how much you requested in total payouts, the cycle is closed, the account is deactivated, and you move on with the free Challenge of the same size. (Accounts purchased before October 1st, 2026 17:00 UTC + 0 have a max amount set to 5).
Payout Mechanism:
On E8 Signature (futures market), for your current payout, only profit earned during the current cycle is eligible. Meaning Unused profits from previous cycles don't carry over.
Trading Hours And instruments
Please note that on E8 Signature accounts, all positions are closed by 23:00 Server time, and trading re-opens at 00:15 Server time.
Trading hours or available instruments can differ based on the Market you choose - Click here for more details.
News trading
You can trade news on E8 Signature without any restrictions (This includes SimFi™ challenge account (phase-1) and SimFI™ performance Account)
E8 Markets offers a simulated environment that is designed to replicate real-market data and trading conditions; just as slippage is a factor in a real market, it is also present within our simulated environment. Therefore, we recommend that users avoid trading during high-impact news releases.
More information can be accessed in the article here.
Copy trading rules
E8 Markets allows copy trading across all accounts, including SimFi™ challenge and SimFI™ Performance accounts or personal accounts, as long as these accounts belong to you.
What is the available leverage? (Classic Markets)
After
Minimum profitable days between each payout: 5 (does not apply for first payout)
- A profitable day is considered as a day where the realized closed PnL equals to 0.3% or more.
- You have to achieve profitable days between each payout cycle. After requesting a payout, your previously achieved profitable days will reset to 0.
$75 - $25,000 account
$150 - $50,000 account
$300 - $100,000 account
$450 - $150,000 account
Payout buffer - Before you can start requesting payout, you need to leave a buffer in your account in the same size as your EOD Dynamic Drawdown. The buffer can not be requested. The reason for this is to protect trades from violating EOD by requesting full profit from the account.
If your EOD is 3% and your initial balance $100,000, the buffer is $3000.
Payout caps - Payout caps determine the maximum you can request in a single payout.
A full explanation can be seen in this article.
Maximum amount of payouts per account: 4 (only for the Futures market)
Section: Criteria for the payout:
+ This determines how many payouts you can request in total from one account. After you request 4 payouts, no matter the remaining buffer or how much you requested in total payouts, the cycle is closed, the account is deactivated, and you move on with the free Challenge of the same size. (Accounts purchased before October 1st, 2026 17:00 UTC + 0 have a max amount set to 5).
Payout Mechanism:
On E8 Signature (futures market), for your current payout, only profit earned during the current cycle is eligible. Meaning Unused profits from previous cycles don't carry over.
Trading Hours And instruments
Please note that on E8 Signature accounts, all positions are closed by 23:00 Server time, and trading re-opens at 00:15 Server time.
Trading hours or available instruments can differ based on the Market you choose - Click here for more details.
News trading
You can trade news on E8 Signature without any restrictions (This includes SimFi™ challenge account (phase-1) and SimFI™ performance Account)
E8 Markets offers a simulated environment that is designed to replicate real-market data and trading conditions; just as slippage is a factor in a real market, it is also present within our simulated environment. Therefore, we recommend that users avoid trading during high-impact news releases.
More information can be accessed in the article here.
Copy trading rules
E8 Markets allows copy trading across all accounts, including SimFi™ challenge and SimFI™ Performance accounts or personal accounts, as long as these accounts belong to you.
What is the available leverage? (Classic Markets)
Minimum profitable days between each payout: 5 (does not apply for first payout)
- A profitable day is considered as a day where the realized closed PnL equals to 0.3% or more.
- You have to achieve profitable days between each payout cycle. After requesting a payout, your previously achieved profitable days will reset to 0.
$75 - $25,000 account
$150 - $50,000 account
$300 - $100,000 account
$450 - $150,000 account
Payout buffer - Before you can start requesting payout, you need to leave a buffer in your account in the same size as your EOD Dynamic Drawdown. The buffer can not be requested. The reason for this is to protect trades from violating EOD by requesting full profit from the account.
If your EOD is 3% and your initial balance $100,000, the buffer is $3000.
Payout caps - Payout caps determine the maximum you can request in a single payout.
A full explanation can be seen in this article.
Maximum amount of payouts per account: 4 (only for the Futures market)
Section: Criteria for the payout:
− This determines how many payouts you can request in total from one account. After you request 5 payouts, no matter the remaining buffer or how much you requested in total payouts, the cycle is closed, the account is deactivated, and you move on with the free Challenge of the same size. (Accounts purchased before October 1st, 2026 17:00 UTC + 0 have a max amount set to 5).
+ This determines how many payouts you can request in total from one account. After you request 4 payouts, no matter the remaining buffer or how much you requested in total payouts, the cycle is closed, the account is deactivated, and you move on with the free Challenge of the same size. (Accounts purchased before October 1st, 2026 17:00 UTC + 0 have a max amount set to 5).
Payout Mechanism:
On E8 Signature (futures market), for your current payout, only profit earned during the current cycle is eligible. Meaning Unused profits from previous cycles don't carry over.
Trading Hours And instruments
Please note that on E8 Signature accounts, all positions are closed by 23:00 Server time, and trading re-opens at 00:15 Server time.
Trading hours or available instruments can differ based on the Market you choose - Click here for more details.
News trading
You can trade news on E8 Signature without any restrictions (This includes SimFi™ challenge account (phase-1) and SimFI™ performance Account)
E8 Markets offers a simulated environment that is designed to replicate real-market data and trading conditions; just as slippage is a factor in a real market, it is also present within our simulated environment. Therefore, we recommend that users avoid trading during high-impact news releases.
More information can be accessed in the article here.
Copy trading rules
E8 Markets allows copy trading across all accounts, including SimFi™ challenge and SimFI™ Performance accounts or personal accounts, as long as these accounts belong to you.
What is the available leverage? (Classic Markets)
PremierMyFundedPerps · Streamer Mode SettingsNew page published.Oct 14
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading with the APIElite accounts now have separate market exposure caps; copy trading behavior, evaluation tracking, and account streaming capabilities were added or clarified.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Trading with the API
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/trading-with-api
Place and manage every order type available in the trading terminal.
The REST API uses the same order books, trading rules, fees, margin checks, and
paper execution engine as the trading terminal. Every create request requires
an Idempotency-Key header. Standard orders and position closes may also carry
a caller-assigned client_order_id for durable reconciliation.
Exposure caps
API orders share the same per-user market exposure allowance as orders placed
in the terminal. Your own accounts of the same product and size share one cap
− for each market; other users have separate allowances. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
as a market order for compatibility with existing clients.
type | Required price fields | Important options
market | expected_price | slippage_tolerance_bps, attached TP/SL
limit | limit_price | attached TP/SL, IOC, FOK, or GTD time in force
chase | chase_offset | optional chase_cap_price
stop_market | trigger_price | optional reduce-only protection
of pending and resting orders. This view is safer for reconciliation than
searching recent history.
At an hourly swap boundary, ready charges are applied before order settlement
and its balance and margin checks, without waiting for the scheduled hourly
processing window. Incomplete charge data can keep the order pending while it
is recovered. This also applies to reduce-only closes: closing after a boundary
does not remove the charge for exposure held at that boundary. See
Commissions and Fees.
For an enabled copy group, copied market orders stay pending until the lead
market order fills. If the lead rejects or expires without filling, its pending
market copies are canceled without opening follower positions or charging
trading fees. Resting limit and trigger copies, including attached TP/SL,
− execute independently on each account. See
Copy Trading.
Use GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to resolve your caller-assigned order
identity when the placement response or server id is unavailable. This lookup
survives API key rotation and returns the normal order-page shape with zero or
one result.
If the server cannot prove the snapshot is complete inside the active-order
bound, it returns 503 with Retry-After instead of returning truncated data.
- PATCH /v1/orders/{order_id} changes price and optionally size.
- PUT /v1/orders/{order_id}/attached-exits sets or removes TP/SL attached to
a resting limit entry. Send null to remove a leg.
- DELETE /v1/orders/{order_id} cancels a working order or queues cancellation
when execution already owns the row.
fill and trading rules.
GET /v1/scaled-orders/{id} returns every rung's price, size, child order ID,
and placement rejection when applicable. DELETE fences unplaced rungs and
cancels every working child.
Reconcile fills and closed positions
GET /v1/fills?account_id=... returns filled orders in settlement order with
fees, realized P\&L, notional, liquidity role, and partial-fill lineage. Use
GET /v1/positions?account_id=...&status=closed for cursor-paginated closed
position records.
Treat all cursors as opaque. Order and strategy state can continue changing
after a response, so reconcile by resource ID until it reaches a terminal
status.
Copy groups and scheduled execution
Before submitting a lead order through the API, ensure the credential covers
the lead and every follower. The same boundary applies to modifications,
cancellations, and protective exits. A scope failure rejects the complete
native order operation, preserving the copy group's behavior rather than
silently dropping a follower. See Authentication.
Accepted TWAP/VWAP and scaled orders retain the environment and account scope
that authorized them. Revoking the key blocks new requests but does not revoke
that accepted schedule. Each later slice or rung checks the current copy group
against its retained scope. If the group now includes an inaccessible account,
TWAP/VWAP stops with completion_reason: "api_account_scope_changed"; scaled
orders reject the remaining unplaced rungs with that reject_reason. Previously
parent_order_id.
A canceled order carries cancel_reason:
cancel_reason | Meaning
user | You canceled it, including a cancel requested while it was executing.
oco | Its paired TP or SL filled and retired the remaining size.
reduce_only | The position it protected closed, reversed, or became too small for it.
replaced | A new attached TP or SL took over the size it covered.
liquidation | A liquidation closed the position it protected.
expired | Its GTD time passed while it was executing.
account_closed | The account passed, failed, or closed.
trading_restricted | A trading restriction on your profile canceled opening orders.
venue_policy | The market stopped accepting new positions on this venue.
− copy | A copy-trading lead order changed or ended, or the copy stopped applying.
Treat unknown values as a generic cancellation: new reasons may be added.
Orders canceled before this field existed omit it. A closed position carries
close_reason: user, take_profit, stop_loss, liquidation, reversal,
or system.
Every fill also records position_side_after (long, short, or flat) and
position_size_after, the account's position in that market immediately
after the fill. Fills from before these fields existed omit them.
GET /v1/twap-orders?account_id=... continues to return active TWAP and VWAP
parents. To discover terminal parents without retaining their IDs, request
status=completed or status=canceled. History is ordered by creation time,
newest first, within the selected status, and accepts limit (1 to 100,
default 50) and cursor. Follow next_cursor while has_more is true, keeping
account_id and status unchanged. Query both terminal statuses for a complete
history. The strategy field distinguishes TWAP from VWAP; completion_reason
explains why a completed schedule stopped. Pagination is not accepted for the
active listing.
Live market data
Use market data streaming for live prices, books, trades,
− and candles. It is public and uses a dedicated WebSocket endpoint. Continue
− using REST for account balances, positions, order state, and fills; private
− account streaming is not available.
After
Trading with the API
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/trading-with-api
Place and manage every order type available in the trading terminal.
The REST API uses the same order books, trading rules, fees, margin checks, and
paper execution engine as the trading terminal. Every create request requires
an Idempotency-Key header. Standard orders and position closes may also carry
a caller-assigned client_order_id for durable reconciliation.
Exposure caps
API orders share the same per-user market exposure allowance as orders placed
in the terminal. Your own accounts of the same product and size share one cap
+ for each market; other users have separate allowances. Elite accounts are the
+ exception: each Elite account has its own cap for each market, counting only
+ that account's position. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
as a market order for compatibility with existing clients.
type | Required price fields | Important options
market | expected_price | slippage_tolerance_bps, attached TP/SL
limit | limit_price | attached TP/SL, IOC, FOK, or GTD time in force
chase | chase_offset | optional chase_cap_price
stop_market | trigger_price | optional reduce-only protection
of pending and resting orders. This view is safer for reconciliation than
searching recent history.
At an hourly swap boundary, ready charges are applied before order settlement
and its balance and margin checks, without waiting for the scheduled hourly
processing window. Incomplete charge data can keep the order pending while it
is recovered. This also applies to reduce-only closes: closing after a boundary
does not remove the charge for exposure held at that boundary. See
Commissions and Fees.
For an enabled copy group, copied market orders stay pending until the lead
market order fills. If the lead rejects or expires without filling, its pending
market copies are canceled without opening follower positions or charging
trading fees. Resting limit and trigger copies, including attached TP/SL,
+ execute independently on each account. Copies open on the same venue as the
+ lead order, including an alternate venue you chose for the market, and a
+ trading halt blocks new follower exposure even while a copy is in flight. A
+ copy uses the leverage you send, lowered to the follower's own maximum for
+ that market when needed, and keeps the margin mode of any position the
+ follower already holds in that market. See
Copy Trading.
Use GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to resolve your caller-assigned order
identity when the placement response or server id is unavailable. This lookup
survives API key rotation and returns the normal order-page shape with zero or
one result.
If the server cannot prove the snapshot is complete inside the active-order
bound, it returns 503 with Retry-After instead of returning truncated data.
- PATCH /v1/orders/{order_id} changes price and optionally size.
- PUT /v1/orders/{order_id}/attached-exits sets or removes TP/SL attached to
a resting limit entry. Send null to remove a leg.
- DELETE /v1/orders/{order_id} cancels a working order or queues cancellation
when execution already owns the row.
fill and trading rules.
GET /v1/scaled-orders/{id} returns every rung's price, size, child order ID,
and placement rejection when applicable. DELETE fences unplaced rungs and
cancels every working child.
Reconcile fills and closed positions
GET /v1/fills?account_id=... returns filled orders in settlement order with
fees, realized P\&L, notional, liquidity role, and partial-fill lineage. Use
GET /v1/positions?account_id=...&status=closed for cursor-paginated closed
position records.
Treat all cursors as opaque. Order and strategy state can continue changing
after a response, so reconcile by resource ID until it reaches a terminal
status.
+ Track evaluation progress
+ GET /v1/accounts/{account_id} returns a risk snapshot with equity, loss-limit room,
+ and the profit still needed to pass. An evaluation passes when equity,
+ including unrealized P\&L, reaches the profit target, so track
+ risk.remaining_profit_equity. When it reaches zero, the evaluation passes and
+ open positions are closed. risk.remaining_profit counts realized profit only
+ and can stay above zero while open profit already covers the target. Both are
+ null when the account has no profit target, and remaining_profit_equity is
+ also null when marks are incomplete.
Copy groups and scheduled execution
Before submitting a lead order through the API, ensure the credential covers
the lead and every follower. The same boundary applies to modifications,
cancellations, and protective exits. A scope failure rejects the complete
native order operation, preserving the copy group's behavior rather than
silently dropping a follower. See Authentication.
Accepted TWAP/VWAP and scaled orders retain the environment and account scope
that authorized them. Revoking the key blocks new requests but does not revoke
that accepted schedule. Each later slice or rung checks the current copy group
against its retained scope. If the group now includes an inaccessible account,
TWAP/VWAP stops with completion_reason: "api_account_scope_changed"; scaled
orders reject the remaining unplaced rungs with that reject_reason. Previously
parent_order_id.
A canceled order carries cancel_reason:
cancel_reason | Meaning
user | You canceled it, including a cancel requested while it was executing.
oco | Its paired TP or SL filled and retired the remaining size.
reduce_only | The position it protected closed, reversed, or became too small for it.
replaced | A new attached TP or SL took over the size it covered.
liquidation | A liquidation closed the position it protected.
expired | Its GTD time passed while it was executing.
account_closed | The account passed, failed, or closed.
trading_restricted | A trading restriction on your profile canceled opening orders.
venue_policy | The market stopped accepting new positions on this venue.
+ copy | A copy-trading lead order changed or ended, the copy stopped applying, or the account started following a lead.
Treat unknown values as a generic cancellation: new reasons may be added.
Orders canceled before this field existed omit it. A closed position carries
close_reason: user, take_profit, stop_loss, liquidation, reversal,
or system.
+ A copied follower order that was still executing when its group stopped
+ because the lead account passed, failed, or closed is rejected with
+ reject_reason copy_lead_stopped; the follower's positions are then closed
+ by the copy-trading stop.
Every fill also records position_side_after (long, short, or flat) and
position_size_after, the account's position in that market immediately
after the fill. Fills from before these fields existed omit them.
GET /v1/twap-orders?account_id=... continues to return active TWAP and VWAP
parents. To discover terminal parents without retaining their IDs, request
status=completed or status=canceled. History is ordered by creation time,
newest first, within the selected status, and accepts limit (1 to 100,
default 50) and cursor. Follow next_cursor while has_more is true, keeping
account_id and status unchanged. Query both terminal statuses for a complete
history. The strategy field distinguishes TWAP from VWAP; completion_reason
explains why a completed schedule stopped. Pagination is not accepted for the
active listing.
Live market data
Use market data streaming for live prices, books, trades,
+ and candles. It is public and uses a dedicated WebSocket endpoint. For order,
+ fill, position, and balance changes on your own accounts, use
+ account streaming, an authenticated WebSocket that pushes
+ each change as it happens. REST remains available for snapshots and lookups.
Trading with the API
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/trading-with-api
Place and manage every order type available in the trading terminal.
The REST API uses the same order books, trading rules, fees, margin checks, and
paper execution engine as the trading terminal. Every create request requires
an Idempotency-Key header. Standard orders and position closes may also carry
a caller-assigned client_order_id for durable reconciliation.
Exposure caps
API orders share the same per-user market exposure allowance as orders placed
in the terminal. Your own accounts of the same product and size share one cap
− for each market; other users have separate allowances. Long and short notional
+ for each market; other users have separate allowances. Elite accounts are the
+ exception: each Elite account has its own cap for each market, counting only
+ that account's position. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
as a market order for compatibility with existing clients.
type | Required price fields | Important options
market | expected_price | slippage_tolerance_bps, attached TP/SL
limit | limit_price | attached TP/SL, IOC, FOK, or GTD time in force
chase | chase_offset | optional chase_cap_price
stop_market | trigger_price | optional reduce-only protection
of pending and resting orders. This view is safer for reconciliation than
searching recent history.
At an hourly swap boundary, ready charges are applied before order settlement
and its balance and margin checks, without waiting for the scheduled hourly
processing window. Incomplete charge data can keep the order pending while it
is recovered. This also applies to reduce-only closes: closing after a boundary
does not remove the charge for exposure held at that boundary. See
Commissions and Fees.
For an enabled copy group, copied market orders stay pending until the lead
market order fills. If the lead rejects or expires without filling, its pending
market copies are canceled without opening follower positions or charging
trading fees. Resting limit and trigger copies, including attached TP/SL,
− execute independently on each account. See
+ execute independently on each account. Copies open on the same venue as the
+ lead order, including an alternate venue you chose for the market, and a
+ trading halt blocks new follower exposure even while a copy is in flight. A
+ copy uses the leverage you send, lowered to the follower's own maximum for
+ that market when needed, and keeps the margin mode of any position the
+ follower already holds in that market. See
Copy Trading.
Use GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to resolve your caller-assigned order
identity when the placement response or server id is unavailable. This lookup
survives API key rotation and returns the normal order-page shape with zero or
one result.
If the server cannot prove the snapshot is complete inside the active-order
bound, it returns 503 with Retry-After instead of returning truncated data.
- PATCH /v1/orders/{order_id} changes price and optionally size.
- PUT /v1/orders/{order_id}/attached-exits sets or removes TP/SL attached to
a resting limit entry. Send null to remove a leg.
- DELETE /v1/orders/{order_id} cancels a working order or queues cancellation
when execution already owns the row.
fill and trading rules.
GET /v1/scaled-orders/{id} returns every rung's price, size, child order ID,
and placement rejection when applicable. DELETE fences unplaced rungs and
cancels every working child.
Reconcile fills and closed positions
GET /v1/fills?account_id=... returns filled orders in settlement order with
fees, realized P\&L, notional, liquidity role, and partial-fill lineage. Use
GET /v1/positions?account_id=...&status=closed for cursor-paginated closed
position records.
Treat all cursors as opaque. Order and strategy state can continue changing
after a response, so reconcile by resource ID until it reaches a terminal
status.
+ Track evaluation progress
+ GET /v1/accounts/{account_id} returns a risk snapshot with equity, loss-limit room,
+ and the profit still needed to pass. An evaluation passes when equity,
+ including unrealized P\&L, reaches the profit target, so track
+ risk.remaining_profit_equity. When it reaches zero, the evaluation passes and
+ open positions are closed. risk.remaining_profit counts realized profit only
+ and can stay above zero while open profit already covers the target. Both are
+ null when the account has no profit target, and remaining_profit_equity is
+ also null when marks are incomplete.
Copy groups and scheduled execution
Before submitting a lead order through the API, ensure the credential covers
the lead and every follower. The same boundary applies to modifications,
cancellations, and protective exits. A scope failure rejects the complete
native order operation, preserving the copy group's behavior rather than
silently dropping a follower. See Authentication.
Accepted TWAP/VWAP and scaled orders retain the environment and account scope
that authorized them. Revoking the key blocks new requests but does not revoke
that accepted schedule. Each later slice or rung checks the current copy group
against its retained scope. If the group now includes an inaccessible account,
TWAP/VWAP stops with completion_reason: "api_account_scope_changed"; scaled
orders reject the remaining unplaced rungs with that reject_reason. Previously
parent_order_id.
A canceled order carries cancel_reason:
cancel_reason | Meaning
user | You canceled it, including a cancel requested while it was executing.
oco | Its paired TP or SL filled and retired the remaining size.
reduce_only | The position it protected closed, reversed, or became too small for it.
replaced | A new attached TP or SL took over the size it covered.
liquidation | A liquidation closed the position it protected.
expired | Its GTD time passed while it was executing.
account_closed | The account passed, failed, or closed.
trading_restricted | A trading restriction on your profile canceled opening orders.
venue_policy | The market stopped accepting new positions on this venue.
− copy | A copy-trading lead order changed or ended, or the copy stopped applying.
+ copy | A copy-trading lead order changed or ended, the copy stopped applying, or the account started following a lead.
Treat unknown values as a generic cancellation: new reasons may be added.
Orders canceled before this field existed omit it. A closed position carries
close_reason: user, take_profit, stop_loss, liquidation, reversal,
or system.
+ A copied follower order that was still executing when its group stopped
+ because the lead account passed, failed, or closed is rejected with
+ reject_reason copy_lead_stopped; the follower's positions are then closed
+ by the copy-trading stop.
Every fill also records position_side_after (long, short, or flat) and
position_size_after, the account's position in that market immediately
after the fill. Fills from before these fields existed omit them.
GET /v1/twap-orders?account_id=... continues to return active TWAP and VWAP
parents. To discover terminal parents without retaining their IDs, request
status=completed or status=canceled. History is ordered by creation time,
newest first, within the selected status, and accepts limit (1 to 100,
default 50) and cursor. Follow next_cursor while has_more is true, keeping
account_id and status unchanged. Query both terminal statuses for a complete
history. The strategy field distinguishes TWAP from VWAP; completion_reason
explains why a completed schedule stopped. Pagination is not accepted for the
active listing.
Live market data
Use market data streaming for live prices, books, trades,
− and candles. It is public and uses a dedicated WebSocket endpoint. Continue
− using REST for account balances, positions, order state, and fills; private
− account streaming is not available.
+ and candles. It is public and uses a dedicated WebSocket endpoint. For order,
+ fill, position, and balance changes on your own accounts, use
+ account streaming, an authenticated WebSocket that pushes
+ each change as it happens. REST remains available for snapshots and lookups.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Account trading policyElite account leverage changed for indices: NAS100 and SP500 now up to 40x, US30 up to 25x; added trading hours policy for Forex and index markets; 2 other changes.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
products and cannot be changed by plan or account.
Market exposure caps
Competition accounts use a separate per-user allowance from other accounts.
Matching competition accounts share their own cap for each market, product,
and size. Both allowances use the configured cap independently, and competition
orders remain subject to exposure rejection. This applies equally to API and
website orders.
An October Competition account on the Blitz or Whale path has its market leverage
ceilings and exposure caps scaled by 4x or 0.5x. Scaled leverage rounds down
and never drops below 1x. Orders above the scaled limits are rejected the same
way as orders above the standard limits; see
October competition.
− An Elite account trades indices at up to 40x, gold at up to 20x, and oil at up
− to 10x, and caps each group's combined open notional at that multiple of its
− starting balance. Market listings still report each market's standard
maxLeverage. API and website orders above an Elite limit are rejected with
invalid_leverage or max_total_notional; see
Elite Accounts.
Gold trades on XAU, which counts as gold for these Elite limits. The previous
GOLD market is retiring: it is reduce-only, so its market reports
trading_enabled: false and an order that would open, add to, or flip a
position is rejected with market_unavailable. Reduce-only orders, closes,
and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing GOLD positions keep working;
see Retiring markets.
A market's exposure cap limits combined open notional (long plus short) across
accounts of the same challenge model and account size. Each Elite account
instead has its own cap for each market, counting only that account's
position. The server includes existing exposure and rejects a fill that would
exceed the configured cap. Closing or reducing positions remains allowed.
An existing position keeps its enrolled exposure group through additions,
reductions, and reversals, even if challenge offerings change. A new position
after fully closing uses the current product grouping. This applies equally to
API and website orders; see Asset Exposure Limits.
Exposure-cap enforcement defaults to enabled for newly added markets. A
numerical cap must still be configured; enabling the switch alone does not set
a dollar limit. Check the current market caps
− for the applicable limits.
Treat preflight as advisory
Fetch policy when selecting an account and refresh after a relevant rejection or
configuration change. Do not poll this endpoint once per second: it consumes the
shared REST read budget.
A true copy_scope_blocked means the credential cannot cover the configured
copy group as a whole. Use a credential authorized for every member in the same
environment, or change the group through the website. A false value does not
cover stale working copied orders left by earlier configurations: modification
and cancellation check those affected accounts again at execution.
The snapshot does not reserve margin, position slots, order slots, trade-window
allowances, or market liquidity. It does not evaluate a proposed order or fetch
fresh prices. Check market metadata and an appropriate quote for market-specific
After
products and cannot be changed by plan or account.
Market exposure caps
Competition accounts use a separate per-user allowance from other accounts.
Matching competition accounts share their own cap for each market, product,
and size. Both allowances use the configured cap independently, and competition
orders remain subject to exposure rejection. This applies equally to API and
website orders.
An October Competition account on the Blitz or Whale path has its market leverage
ceilings and exposure caps scaled by 4x or 0.5x. Scaled leverage rounds down
and never drops below 1x. Orders above the scaled limits are rejected the same
way as orders above the standard limits; see
October competition.
+ An Elite account trades NAS100 and SP500 at up to 40x, US30 at up to 25x, gold
+ at up to 20x, and oil at up to 10x, and caps each group's combined open
+ notional at that multiple of its starting balance. Market listings still report each market's standard
maxLeverage. API and website orders above an Elite limit are rejected with
invalid_leverage or max_total_notional; see
Elite Accounts.
Gold trades on XAU, which counts as gold for these Elite limits. The previous
GOLD market is retiring: it is reduce-only, so its market reports
trading_enabled: false and an order that would open, add to, or flip a
position is rejected with market_unavailable. Reduce-only orders, closes,
and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing GOLD positions keep working;
see Retiring markets.
+ Forex and index markets on the Veranta and Ostium venues follow their venue's
+ trading sessions. While a market is closed, a market order or close
+ is rejected with market_closed. Limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss orders can
+ still be placed, edited, and canceled; they stay open and can fill at the
+ reopening price. See
+ Trading hours.
A market's exposure cap limits combined open notional (long plus short) across
accounts of the same challenge model and account size. Each Elite account
instead has its own cap for each market, counting only that account's
position. The server includes existing exposure and rejects a fill that would
exceed the configured cap. Closing or reducing positions remains allowed.
An existing position keeps its enrolled exposure group through additions,
reductions, and reversals, even if challenge offerings change. A new position
after fully closing uses the current product grouping. This applies equally to
API and website orders; see Asset Exposure Limits.
Exposure-cap enforcement defaults to enabled for newly added markets. A
numerical cap must still be configured; enabling the switch alone does not set
a dollar limit. Check the current market caps
+ for the applicable limits, and choose your product and account size there to
+ see the exact cap and maximum leverage that apply to your account.
Treat preflight as advisory
Fetch policy when selecting an account and refresh after a relevant rejection or
configuration change. Do not poll this endpoint once per second: it consumes the
shared REST read budget.
A true copy_scope_blocked means the credential cannot cover the configured
copy group as a whole. Use a credential authorized for every member in the same
environment, or change the group through the website. A false value does not
cover stale working copied orders left by earlier configurations: modification
and cancellation check those affected accounts again at execution.
The snapshot does not reserve margin, position slots, order slots, trade-window
allowances, or market liquidity. It does not evaluate a proposed order or fetch
fresh prices. Check market metadata and an appropriate quote for market-specific
products and cannot be changed by plan or account.
Market exposure caps
Competition accounts use a separate per-user allowance from other accounts.
Matching competition accounts share their own cap for each market, product,
and size. Both allowances use the configured cap independently, and competition
orders remain subject to exposure rejection. This applies equally to API and
website orders.
An October Competition account on the Blitz or Whale path has its market leverage
ceilings and exposure caps scaled by 4x or 0.5x. Scaled leverage rounds down
and never drops below 1x. Orders above the scaled limits are rejected the same
way as orders above the standard limits; see
October competition.
− An Elite account trades indices at up to 40x, gold at up to 20x, and oil at up
− to 10x, and caps each group's combined open notional at that multiple of its
− starting balance. Market listings still report each market's standard
+ An Elite account trades NAS100 and SP500 at up to 40x, US30 at up to 25x, gold
+ at up to 20x, and oil at up to 10x, and caps each group's combined open
+ notional at that multiple of its starting balance. Market listings still report each market's standard
maxLeverage. API and website orders above an Elite limit are rejected with
invalid_leverage or max_total_notional; see
Elite Accounts.
Gold trades on XAU, which counts as gold for these Elite limits. The previous
GOLD market is retiring: it is reduce-only, so its market reports
trading_enabled: false and an order that would open, add to, or flip a
position is rejected with market_unavailable. Reduce-only orders, closes,
and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing GOLD positions keep working;
see Retiring markets.
+ Forex and index markets on the Veranta and Ostium venues follow their venue's
+ trading sessions. While a market is closed, a market order or close
+ is rejected with market_closed. Limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss orders can
+ still be placed, edited, and canceled; they stay open and can fill at the
+ reopening price. See
+ Trading hours.
A market's exposure cap limits combined open notional (long plus short) across
accounts of the same challenge model and account size. Each Elite account
instead has its own cap for each market, counting only that account's
position. The server includes existing exposure and rejects a fill that would
exceed the configured cap. Closing or reducing positions remains allowed.
An existing position keeps its enrolled exposure group through additions,
reductions, and reversals, even if challenge offerings change. A new position
after fully closing uses the current product grouping. This applies equally to
API and website orders; see Asset Exposure Limits.
Exposure-cap enforcement defaults to enabled for newly added markets. A
numerical cap must still be configured; enabling the switch alone does not set
a dollar limit. Check the current market caps
− for the applicable limits.
+ for the applicable limits, and choose your product and account size there to
+ see the exact cap and maximum leverage that apply to your account.
Treat preflight as advisory
Fetch policy when selecting an account and refresh after a relevant rejection or
configuration change. Do not poll this endpoint once per second: it consumes the
shared REST read budget.
A true copy_scope_blocked means the credential cannot cover the configured
copy group as a whole. Use a credential authorized for every member in the same
environment, or change the group through the website. A false value does not
cover stale working copied orders left by earlier configurations: modification
and cancellation check those affected accounts again at execution.
The snapshot does not reserve margin, position slots, order slots, trade-window
allowances, or market liquidity. It does not evaluate a proposed order or fetch
fresh prices. Check market metadata and an appropriate quote for market-specific
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading SettingsAdded Profit Target Line definition, expanded Loss Limit and Profit Target Line behavior details, and added Reverse Position settings controls.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
challenge rules, close-order previews, and closed trade history are unchanged.
Chart Lines
Choose which trading lines and markers appear on the trade chart. Every group
except Trade Arrows and Bid/Ask Lines is shown by default. Turn a
switch off to hide that group; your choice is saved to your user settings and
synced across devices when signed in.
Setting | What it shows
Position Line | Your open position's entry price with its live Net PnL.
TP/SL Lines | Resting Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Open Order Lines | Resting limit, stop, take, and conditional orders.
Liquidation Lines | The estimated liquidation price of your position.
Loss Limit Line | The price where your position would bring the account to its loss limit.
Trade Markers | Buy and sell markers where your orders filled.
Order Previews | The lines the order ticket draws before you place an order.
Trade Arrows | Arrow markers under buys and over sells, joined entry to exit.
Bid/Ask Lines | The current best bid and ask prices.
Hiding a line changes the chart only. The order, position, or risk level behind
it still exists and still executes, liquidates, or enforces your account rules
as normal. Hidden lines cannot be dragged, so manage those orders from the
Positions and Open Orders tabs instead. Hiding Position Line or **TP/SL
Lines** also removes the chart handles that add a new Take Profit or Stop Loss
− from the position line.
Trade Arrows is off by default. Turn it on to change how Trade Markers
look: each fill becomes a small arrow on the candle it filled in, pointing up
from under the candle for a buy and down from over the candle for a sell,
instead of a lettered badge. Several fills on one side of a candle stack
outward. Liquidations and account close-outs use an amber arrow. A dashed line
joins each entry's arrow to the arrow of the exit that closed it, green when
the price moved in the trade's favor and red when it moved against it. Entries
of a position that is still open have no line until they close. Hover an arrow
to see the fill's side, size, and price; its trade stays highlighted while the
other trades dim. Arrows and lines cover your most recent 100 orders and appear
once the chart has loaded the candles they belong to. Turning off **Trade
Markers** hides them too.
after you add 0.5 BTC. Sizes round down to the market's size step, so the exits
never cover more than you hold.
If the order that adds to the position carries its own Take Profit or Stop
Loss, that exit already covers the full result, so your existing exits of that
kind are not resized. An exit that is executing at that moment is not resized.
Turn this off to keep existing TP/SL sizes unchanged when you add to a position.
Trade Confirmations
Confirm New Orders has three options:
Option | Behavior
Never | Submit without an additional review dialog.
Market Orders | Review orders that execute at market before submitting, including immediate market, scheduled, stop/take-market, and conditional orders.
All Orders | Review every supported new order beforehand.
Confirm TP/SL Chart Drags asks before a chart drag places or moves a Take
Profit or Stop Loss order. It is off by default, so releasing a drag applies the
change immediately. Turn it on if you want to review each change before it is
submitted. This update resets previous confirmation choices to off for everyone.
You can turn confirmation back on, and that new choice is saved.
When you release a chart drag, the order line stays at the new price. A small
loading icon shows while the update is being confirmed. If chart confirmations
are enabled, the icon appears after you confirm. It disappears when the update
is applied; queued moves keep it until processing finishes. If the update fails,
the chart restores the confirmed price or removes an unsuccessful new TP/SL.
This confirms the order update, not a trade fill. Fills appear separately on the
chart when the order executes.
One-Click Chart Close changes the X next to the PnL on the chart's position
line. It is off by default, so clicking the X opens the close dialog where you
choose the size and order type. Turn it on to close the whole position with a
market order as soon as you click the X. The close uses your saved
Max Market Slippage and skips the close dialog
and the Confirm New Orders review. If a current price is not available at
that moment, the close dialog opens instead so nothing is sent without a price.
The close button in the Positions tab still opens the close dialog.
Trade Notifications
Choose whether the app shows notifications for market-order fills, resting
limit/stop fills, Take Profit fills, Stop Loss fills, order changes, and TP/SL
changes. These are visual notifications. Configure audio separately under
Notifications settings.
Fills that settle while your notification preferences are still loading are
announced as soon as loading finishes, even when newer fills have arrived in
the meantime. Notifications are a convenience, not an execution record: confirm
fill history on the trade page when precision matters.
For workflow examples, read the Trading Guide.
Trader Lockout
Use Trader Lockout in Trading settings to take a voluntary break. Choose
After
challenge rules, close-order previews, and closed trade history are unchanged.
Chart Lines
Choose which trading lines and markers appear on the trade chart. Every group
except Trade Arrows and Bid/Ask Lines is shown by default. Turn a
switch off to hide that group; your choice is saved to your user settings and
synced across devices when signed in.
Setting | What it shows
Position Line | Your open position's entry price with its live Net PnL.
TP/SL Lines | Resting Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Open Order Lines | Resting limit, stop, take, and conditional orders.
Liquidation Lines | The estimated liquidation price of your position.
Loss Limit Line | The price where your position would bring the account to its loss limit.
+ Profit Target Line | The price where your position would bring an evaluation account to its profit target.
Trade Markers | Buy and sell markers where your orders filled.
Order Previews | The lines the order ticket draws before you place an order.
Trade Arrows | Arrow markers under buys and over sells, joined entry to exit.
Bid/Ask Lines | The current best bid and ask prices.
Hiding a line changes the chart only. The order, position, or risk level behind
it still exists and still executes, liquidates, or enforces your account rules
as normal. Hidden lines cannot be dragged, so manage those orders from the
Positions and Open Orders tabs instead. Hiding Position Line or **TP/SL
Lines** also removes the chart handles that add a new Take Profit or Stop Loss
+ from the position line. Hiding Order Previews or TP/SL Lines removes
+ the same handles from a draft limit order's line.
+ Loss Limit Line and Profit Target Line appear only while you hold a
+ position in the market you are viewing. Each assumes your other open positions
+ stay at their current prices, so the level moves as those prices change. The
+ profit target line shows only on evaluation accounts that have a profit target.
+ Reaching it does not pass the account on its own: every other challenge rule
+ still applies.
Trade Arrows is off by default. Turn it on to change how Trade Markers
look: each fill becomes a small arrow on the candle it filled in, pointing up
from under the candle for a buy and down from over the candle for a sell,
instead of a lettered badge. Several fills on one side of a candle stack
outward. Liquidations and account close-outs use an amber arrow. A dashed line
joins each entry's arrow to the arrow of the exit that closed it, green when
the price moved in the trade's favor and red when it moved against it. Entries
of a position that is still open have no line until they close. Hover an arrow
to see the fill's side, size, and price; its trade stays highlighted while the
other trades dim. Arrows and lines cover your most recent 100 orders and appear
once the chart has loaded the candles they belong to. Turning off **Trade
Markers** hides them too.
after you add 0.5 BTC. Sizes round down to the market's size step, so the exits
never cover more than you hold.
If the order that adds to the position carries its own Take Profit or Stop
Loss, that exit already covers the full result, so your existing exits of that
kind are not resized. An exit that is executing at that moment is not resized.
Turn this off to keep existing TP/SL sizes unchanged when you add to a position.
Trade Confirmations
Confirm New Orders has three options:
Option | Behavior
Never | Submit without an additional review dialog.
Market Orders | Review orders that execute at market before submitting, including immediate market, scheduled, stop/take-market, and conditional orders.
All Orders | Review every supported new order beforehand.
+ The same choice applies to
+ Reverse Position: with Never,
+ clicking it reverses the position right away; with Market Orders or **All
+ Orders**, it opens a short review first.
Confirm TP/SL Chart Drags asks before a chart drag places or moves a Take
Profit or Stop Loss order. It is off by default, so releasing a drag applies the
change immediately. Turn it on if you want to review each change before it is
submitted. This update resets previous confirmation choices to off for everyone.
You can turn confirmation back on, and that new choice is saved.
When you release a chart drag, the order line stays at the new price. A small
loading icon shows while the update is being confirmed. If chart confirmations
are enabled, the icon appears after you confirm. It disappears when the update
is applied; queued moves keep it until processing finishes. If the update fails,
the chart restores the confirmed price or removes an unsuccessful new TP/SL.
This confirms the order update, not a trade fill. Fills appear separately on the
chart when the order executes.
One-Click Chart Close changes the X next to the PnL on the chart's position
line. It is off by default, so clicking the X opens the close dialog where you
choose the size and order type. Turn it on to close the whole position with a
market order as soon as you click the X. The close uses your saved
Max Market Slippage and skips the close dialog
and the Confirm New Orders review. If a current price is not available at
that moment, the close dialog opens instead so nothing is sent without a price.
The close button in the Positions tab still opens the close dialog.
+ Show Reverse Position controls whether the
+ Reverse Position button appears. It
+ is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
+ line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
+ reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
+ you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
Trade Notifications
Choose whether the app shows notifications for market-order fills, resting
limit/stop fills, Take Profit fills, Stop Loss fills, order changes, and TP/SL
changes. These are visual notifications. Configure audio separately under
Notifications settings.
Fills that settle while your notification preferences are still loading are
announced as soon as loading finishes, even when newer fills have arrived in
the meantime. Notifications are a convenience, not an execution record: confirm
fill history on the trade page when precision matters.
For workflow examples, read the Trading Guide.
Trader Lockout
Use Trader Lockout in Trading settings to take a voluntary break. Choose
challenge rules, close-order previews, and closed trade history are unchanged.
Chart Lines
Choose which trading lines and markers appear on the trade chart. Every group
except Trade Arrows and Bid/Ask Lines is shown by default. Turn a
switch off to hide that group; your choice is saved to your user settings and
synced across devices when signed in.
Setting | What it shows
Position Line | Your open position's entry price with its live Net PnL.
TP/SL Lines | Resting Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Open Order Lines | Resting limit, stop, take, and conditional orders.
Liquidation Lines | The estimated liquidation price of your position.
Loss Limit Line | The price where your position would bring the account to its loss limit.
+ Profit Target Line | The price where your position would bring an evaluation account to its profit target.
Trade Markers | Buy and sell markers where your orders filled.
Order Previews | The lines the order ticket draws before you place an order.
Trade Arrows | Arrow markers under buys and over sells, joined entry to exit.
Bid/Ask Lines | The current best bid and ask prices.
Hiding a line changes the chart only. The order, position, or risk level behind
it still exists and still executes, liquidates, or enforces your account rules
as normal. Hidden lines cannot be dragged, so manage those orders from the
Positions and Open Orders tabs instead. Hiding Position Line or **TP/SL
Lines** also removes the chart handles that add a new Take Profit or Stop Loss
− from the position line.
+ from the position line. Hiding Order Previews or TP/SL Lines removes
+ the same handles from a draft limit order's line.
+ Loss Limit Line and Profit Target Line appear only while you hold a
+ position in the market you are viewing. Each assumes your other open positions
+ stay at their current prices, so the level moves as those prices change. The
+ profit target line shows only on evaluation accounts that have a profit target.
+ Reaching it does not pass the account on its own: every other challenge rule
+ still applies.
Trade Arrows is off by default. Turn it on to change how Trade Markers
look: each fill becomes a small arrow on the candle it filled in, pointing up
from under the candle for a buy and down from over the candle for a sell,
instead of a lettered badge. Several fills on one side of a candle stack
outward. Liquidations and account close-outs use an amber arrow. A dashed line
joins each entry's arrow to the arrow of the exit that closed it, green when
the price moved in the trade's favor and red when it moved against it. Entries
of a position that is still open have no line until they close. Hover an arrow
to see the fill's side, size, and price; its trade stays highlighted while the
other trades dim. Arrows and lines cover your most recent 100 orders and appear
once the chart has loaded the candles they belong to. Turning off **Trade
Markers** hides them too.
after you add 0.5 BTC. Sizes round down to the market's size step, so the exits
never cover more than you hold.
If the order that adds to the position carries its own Take Profit or Stop
Loss, that exit already covers the full result, so your existing exits of that
kind are not resized. An exit that is executing at that moment is not resized.
Turn this off to keep existing TP/SL sizes unchanged when you add to a position.
Trade Confirmations
Confirm New Orders has three options:
Option | Behavior
Never | Submit without an additional review dialog.
Market Orders | Review orders that execute at market before submitting, including immediate market, scheduled, stop/take-market, and conditional orders.
All Orders | Review every supported new order beforehand.
+ The same choice applies to
+ Reverse Position: with Never,
+ clicking it reverses the position right away; with Market Orders or **All
+ Orders**, it opens a short review first.
Confirm TP/SL Chart Drags asks before a chart drag places or moves a Take
Profit or Stop Loss order. It is off by default, so releasing a drag applies the
change immediately. Turn it on if you want to review each change before it is
submitted. This update resets previous confirmation choices to off for everyone.
You can turn confirmation back on, and that new choice is saved.
When you release a chart drag, the order line stays at the new price. A small
loading icon shows while the update is being confirmed. If chart confirmations
are enabled, the icon appears after you confirm. It disappears when the update
is applied; queued moves keep it until processing finishes. If the update fails,
the chart restores the confirmed price or removes an unsuccessful new TP/SL.
This confirms the order update, not a trade fill. Fills appear separately on the
chart when the order executes.
One-Click Chart Close changes the X next to the PnL on the chart's position
line. It is off by default, so clicking the X opens the close dialog where you
choose the size and order type. Turn it on to close the whole position with a
market order as soon as you click the X. The close uses your saved
Max Market Slippage and skips the close dialog
and the Confirm New Orders review. If a current price is not available at
that moment, the close dialog opens instead so nothing is sent without a price.
The close button in the Positions tab still opens the close dialog.
+ Show Reverse Position controls whether the
+ Reverse Position button appears. It
+ is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
+ line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
+ reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
+ you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
Trade Notifications
Choose whether the app shows notifications for market-order fills, resting
limit/stop fills, Take Profit fills, Stop Loss fills, order changes, and TP/SL
changes. These are visual notifications. Configure audio separately under
Notifications settings.
Fills that settle while your notification preferences are still loading are
announced as soon as loading finishes, even when newer fills have arrived in
the meantime. Notifications are a convenience, not an execution record: confirm
fill history on the trade page when precision matters.
For workflow examples, read the Trading Guide.
Trader Lockout
Use Trader Lockout in Trading settings to take a voluntary break. Choose
PremierMyFundedPerps · Notification SettingsAdded affiliate purchase email notification settings and controls for affiliate users.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Notification Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/notifications
− Choose sounds for trading events, control volume and event toggles, and upload, preview, rename, or delete custom audio.
Open Notification settings
− The Notifications tab controls trading audio. Visual fill and order-change
− notifications are configured under Trading settings.
Trade Sounds
For each supported event, choose a built-in or custom sound and turn that event
on or off. Use the preview control to hear the current selection before relying
on it during trading.
The master Trade Sound Volume applies across enabled event sounds. Browser tab
audio permissions and device volume still affect what you hear.
Sound is a convenience, not an execution guarantee. Confirm fills, rejected
orders, and position state in the trading interface even when no sound plays.
Sound Library
Upload an accepted audio file to add a custom sound. Give it a recognizable
name, then select it for any event under Trade Sounds.
The library lets you:
After
Notification Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/notifications
+ Choose affiliate purchase emails and sounds for trading events, control volume and event toggles, and upload, preview, rename, or delete custom audio.
Open Notification settings
+ The Notifications tab controls trading audio and, for affiliates, purchase
+ emails. Visual fill and order-change notifications are configured under
+ Trading settings.
+ Affiliate Emails
+ This card appears only when you are an affiliate. **Affiliate Purchase Email
+ Notifications** is on by default: each time a purchase made with one of your
+ codes is credited to you, you receive an email with the commission amount.
+ Turn it off to stop these emails, and turn it back on to receive them for
+ later purchases. Emails are not sent for purchases credited while the setting
+ is off. Historical purchases do not generate emails when their commission
+ is corrected or approved. The Manage notification settings link in each email opens this
+ card. See Affiliate Program for when commission
+ is credited.
Trade Sounds
For each supported event, choose a built-in or custom sound and turn that event
on or off. Use the preview control to hear the current selection before relying
on it during trading.
The master Trade Sound Volume applies across enabled event sounds. Browser tab
audio permissions and device volume still affect what you hear.
Sound is a convenience, not an execution guarantee. Confirm fills, rejected
orders, and position state in the trading interface even when no sound plays.
Sound Library
Upload an accepted audio file to add a custom sound. Give it a recognizable
name, then select it for any event under Trade Sounds.
The library lets you:
Notification Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/notifications
− Choose sounds for trading events, control volume and event toggles, and upload, preview, rename, or delete custom audio.
+ Choose affiliate purchase emails and sounds for trading events, control volume and event toggles, and upload, preview, rename, or delete custom audio.
Open Notification settings
− The Notifications tab controls trading audio. Visual fill and order-change
− notifications are configured under Trading settings.
+ The Notifications tab controls trading audio and, for affiliates, purchase
+ emails. Visual fill and order-change notifications are configured under
+ Trading settings.
+ Affiliate Emails
+ This card appears only when you are an affiliate. **Affiliate Purchase Email
+ Notifications** is on by default: each time a purchase made with one of your
+ codes is credited to you, you receive an email with the commission amount.
+ Turn it off to stop these emails, and turn it back on to receive them for
+ later purchases. Emails are not sent for purchases credited while the setting
+ is off. Historical purchases do not generate emails when their commission
+ is corrected or approved. The Manage notification settings link in each email opens this
+ card. See Affiliate Program for when commission
+ is credited.
Trade Sounds
For each supported event, choose a built-in or custom sound and turn that event
on or off. Use the preview control to hear the current selection before relying
on it during trading.
The master Trade Sound Volume applies across enabled event sounds. Browser tab
audio permissions and device volume still affect what you hear.
Sound is a convenience, not an execution guarantee. Confirm fills, rejected
orders, and position state in the trading interface even when no sound plays.
Sound Library
Upload an accepted audio file to add a custom sound. Give it a recognizable
name, then select it for any event under Trade Sounds.
The library lets you:
PremierMyFundedPerps · SettingsPasskey management description expanded to include authenticator app option for two-factor authentication.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
device-specific controls say so in their description.
On desktop, use Search above Profile to find pages and individual
settings, such as "App Installation", "Background Effects", or "Max Market
Slippage". Results are grouped into Pages and Settings, with the parent
page shown above each nested result. Matching words are highlighted. Search
ignores capitalization, accents, and punctuation, and accepts words in any order.
Select a setting to open its page and focus the matching card or control.
If nothing matches, the message shows your search text. Clear the search or
press Escape to show all sections again.
Account
Manage your photo, username, connected accounts, and legal identity, or
delete your account.
− Add and remove passkeys used for two-factor authentication.
Choose what other people and search engines can see.
Change the language used throughout the app.
Control background effects and install the web app.
Trading
Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, and alerts.
Configure lead and follower challenge accounts.
Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio.
Create and revoke credentials for programmatic trading.
Achievements and billing
Find and share your pass, funded, payout, and leaderboard certificates.
Search challenge orders, review totals and statuses, and open invoices.
Use the app links at the top of each reference page to jump directly to the
After
device-specific controls say so in their description.
On desktop, use Search above Profile to find pages and individual
settings, such as "App Installation", "Background Effects", or "Max Market
Slippage". Results are grouped into Pages and Settings, with the parent
page shown above each nested result. Matching words are highlighted. Search
ignores capitalization, accents, and punctuation, and accepts words in any order.
Select a setting to open its page and focus the matching card or control.
If nothing matches, the message shows your search text. Clear the search or
press Escape to show all sections again.
Account
Manage your photo, username, connected accounts, and legal identity, or
delete your account.
+ Manage sign-in passkeys and two-factor authentication with an authenticator
+ app.
Choose what other people and search engines can see.
Change the language used throughout the app.
Control background effects and install the web app.
Trading
Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, and alerts.
Configure lead and follower challenge accounts.
Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio.
Create and revoke credentials for programmatic trading.
Achievements and billing
Find and share your pass, funded, payout, and leaderboard certificates.
Search challenge orders, review totals and statuses, and open invoices.
Use the app links at the top of each reference page to jump directly to the
device-specific controls say so in their description.
On desktop, use Search above Profile to find pages and individual
settings, such as "App Installation", "Background Effects", or "Max Market
Slippage". Results are grouped into Pages and Settings, with the parent
page shown above each nested result. Matching words are highlighted. Search
ignores capitalization, accents, and punctuation, and accepts words in any order.
Select a setting to open its page and focus the matching card or control.
If nothing matches, the message shows your search text. Clear the search or
press Escape to show all sections again.
Account
Manage your photo, username, connected accounts, and legal identity, or
delete your account.
− Add and remove passkeys used for two-factor authentication.
+ Manage sign-in passkeys and two-factor authentication with an authenticator
+ app.
Choose what other people and search engines can see.
Change the language used throughout the app.
Control background effects and install the web app.
Trading
Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, and alerts.
Configure lead and follower challenge accounts.
Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio.
Create and revoke credentials for programmatic trading.
Achievements and billing
Find and share your pass, funded, payout, and leaderboard certificates.
Search challenge orders, review totals and statuses, and open invoices.
Use the app links at the top of each reference page to jump directly to the
PremierMyFundedPerps · Copy Trading SettingsMultiple clarifications added about order handling during group saves, trading halts, and group stops, plus venue and position protection details.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Add active accounts you own. A funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
The multiplier adjusts the follower's balance-normalized opening quantity:
- below 1× uses less relative size;
- 1× uses the same relative size after starting-balance normalization;
- above 1× uses more relative size, subject to the follower's own limits.
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Every follower keeps independent collateral, challenge-rule, position, and
market checks. One follower can reject an instruction without blocking the lead.
API credentials must cover the lead and every follower in the same live or
sandbox environment. If a group includes an account outside that boundary,
the API rejects the native lead operation before copying any orders. Use a
credential covering the complete group or manage the instruction on the
website. See Authentication for copied-order changes and
scheduled execution boundaries.
Disable and remove
Disable the group before removing it or selecting another lead. During stop
cleanup, follower orders are canceled and positions are closed. The affected
followers remain locked against manual trading until cleanup finishes.
If the lead passes, fails, or is closed, the group stops automatically. The
− stopped record identifies why and can be removed after cleanup completes.
Read the Copy Trading Guide for sizing examples,
stage compatibility, and the full lifecycle.
Manage copy groups through the API
API keys with read scope can inspect GET /v1/copy-trading. A group is
returned only when the credential can access its lead and every follower in
the same live or sandbox environment. A restricted key can therefore see
fewer groups than the website. Accessible groups with archived members remain
listed so they can be disabled or deleted.
Keys with trade scope can use these operations:
Operation | Endpoint
Create or update groups and explicitly delete disabled groups | POST /v1/copy-trading
Disable copying, including a group with inactive or archived accounts | POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable
After
Add active accounts you own. A funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
The multiplier adjusts the follower's balance-normalized opening quantity:
- below 1× uses less relative size;
- 1× uses the same relative size after starting-balance normalization;
- above 1× uses more relative size, subject to the follower's own limits.
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Every follower keeps independent collateral, challenge-rule, position, and
market checks. One follower can reject an instruction without blocking the lead.
+ Copies use the lead's chosen venue. A trading halt prevents new follower
+ exposure, including an order placed before the halt that is still executing.
+ When you save a group, every account that starts following has its open orders
+ canceled, including stop loss and take profit orders, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. A follower trades only
+ through its lead, so a manual order left on it could not execute. Positions
+ stay open, and the save confirmation reports how many orders were canceled.
+ Protect follower positions from the lead account.
API credentials must cover the lead and every follower in the same live or
sandbox environment. If a group includes an account outside that boundary,
the API rejects the native lead operation before copying any orders. Use a
credential covering the complete group or manage the instruction on the
website. See Authentication for copied-order changes and
scheduled execution boundaries.
Disable and remove
Disable the group before removing it or selecting another lead. During stop
cleanup, follower orders are canceled and positions are closed. The affected
followers remain locked against manual trading until cleanup finishes.
If the lead passes, fails, or is closed, the group stops automatically. The
+ stopped record identifies why and can be removed after cleanup completes. A
+ copied order that was still executing when the group stopped is not filled, and
+ its rejection says the lead account ended.
Read the Copy Trading Guide for sizing examples,
stage compatibility, and the full lifecycle.
Manage copy groups through the API
API keys with read scope can inspect GET /v1/copy-trading. A group is
returned only when the credential can access its lead and every follower in
the same live or sandbox environment. A restricted key can therefore see
fewer groups than the website. Accessible groups with archived members remain
listed so they can be disabled or deleted.
Keys with trade scope can use these operations:
Operation | Endpoint
Create or update groups and explicitly delete disabled groups | POST /v1/copy-trading
Disable copying, including a group with inactive or archived accounts | POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable
Add active accounts you own. A funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
The multiplier adjusts the follower's balance-normalized opening quantity:
- below 1× uses less relative size;
- 1× uses the same relative size after starting-balance normalization;
- above 1× uses more relative size, subject to the follower's own limits.
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Every follower keeps independent collateral, challenge-rule, position, and
market checks. One follower can reject an instruction without blocking the lead.
+ Copies use the lead's chosen venue. A trading halt prevents new follower
+ exposure, including an order placed before the halt that is still executing.
+ When you save a group, every account that starts following has its open orders
+ canceled, including stop loss and take profit orders, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. A follower trades only
+ through its lead, so a manual order left on it could not execute. Positions
+ stay open, and the save confirmation reports how many orders were canceled.
+ Protect follower positions from the lead account.
API credentials must cover the lead and every follower in the same live or
sandbox environment. If a group includes an account outside that boundary,
the API rejects the native lead operation before copying any orders. Use a
credential covering the complete group or manage the instruction on the
website. See Authentication for copied-order changes and
scheduled execution boundaries.
Disable and remove
Disable the group before removing it or selecting another lead. During stop
cleanup, follower orders are canceled and positions are closed. The affected
followers remain locked against manual trading until cleanup finishes.
If the lead passes, fails, or is closed, the group stops automatically. The
− stopped record identifies why and can be removed after cleanup completes.
+ stopped record identifies why and can be removed after cleanup completes. A
+ copied order that was still executing when the group stopped is not filled, and
+ its rejection says the lead account ended.
Read the Copy Trading Guide for sizing examples,
stage compatibility, and the full lifecycle.
Manage copy groups through the API
API keys with read scope can inspect GET /v1/copy-trading. A group is
returned only when the credential can access its lead and every follower in
the same live or sandbox environment. A restricted key can therefore see
fewer groups than the website. Accessible groups with archived members remain
listed so they can be disabled or deleted.
Keys with trade scope can use these operations:
Operation | Endpoint
Create or update groups and explicitly delete disabled groups | POST /v1/copy-trading
Disable copying, including a group with inactive or archived accounts | POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable
PremierMyFundedPerps · QuickstartAccount updates moved from REST-only to account streaming with REST available for snapshots and lookups.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
"margin_mode": "cross"
}'
An accepted order begins as pending. Read the order endpoint until it becomes
filled or rejected; use a sensible backoff and observe the documented rate
limits. If the placement response is lost, use
GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=quickstart-entry-1 to recover the server order.
5. Place advanced orders
The same /v1/orders endpoint also accepts limit, chase, stop, take, and
external conditional orders. TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders use their own
parent resources. Continue with Trading with the API for
request shapes and lifecycle operations.
For continuous market updates, connect to market data streaming
− instead of polling prices. Account and order updates remain available through REST.
After
"margin_mode": "cross"
}'
An accepted order begins as pending. Read the order endpoint until it becomes
filled or rejected; use a sensible backoff and observe the documented rate
limits. If the placement response is lost, use
GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=quickstart-entry-1 to recover the server order.
5. Place advanced orders
The same /v1/orders endpoint also accepts limit, chase, stop, take, and
external conditional orders. TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders use their own
parent resources. Continue with Trading with the API for
request shapes and lifecycle operations.
For continuous market updates, connect to market data streaming
+ instead of polling prices. For order, fill, position, and balance changes on
+ your accounts, connect to account streaming; REST
+ remains available for snapshots and lookups.
"margin_mode": "cross"
}'
An accepted order begins as pending. Read the order endpoint until it becomes
filled or rejected; use a sensible backoff and observe the documented rate
limits. If the placement response is lost, use
GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=quickstart-entry-1 to recover the server order.
5. Place advanced orders
The same /v1/orders endpoint also accepts limit, chase, stop, take, and
external conditional orders. TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders use their own
parent resources. Continue with Trading with the API for
request shapes and lifecycle operations.
For continuous market updates, connect to market data streaming
− instead of polling prices. Account and order updates remain available through REST.
+ instead of polling prices. For order, fill, position, and balance changes on
+ your accounts, connect to account streaming; REST
+ remains available for snapshots and lookups.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Troubleshooting and FAQFP Points expiration time changed from midnight Eastern to 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, and purchase limit policy was substantially revised.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
paid. That credit cannot be withdrawn as cash and expires 45 days after it is
added. Read
Split Cash and Store Credit.
Does store credit expire?
Yes. Store credit expires 45 days after it is issued, and credit issued before
September 11, 2026 expires at midnight Eastern time on October 26, 2026. Checkout uses the credit that
expires soonest first. Select Expiry Schedule under your balance on
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
Store Credit Expiry.
Do FP Points expire?
Yes. FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned, and points earned before
− September 11, 2026 expire at midnight Eastern time on December 10, 2026. Opening a case spends the points that expire soonest first.
Select Expiry Schedule on the FP Points tab of
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
FP Points Expiry.
A tool or footer is unavailable
If the market picker, calculator, chart panel, layout switcher, footer, or
bottom toolbar cannot load, the rest of the page stays available. Select
Refresh beside the unavailable item to reload the page and try again.
You can also close a failed market picker to continue viewing the current
market. The footer's legal, support, and cookie-preference links remain
available in its fallback view.
After an app update, the next page you open loads the new version. A page you
manual options remain available when storage is blocked. This message is
separate from a permissions rejection.
Sounds or notifications are missing
Check both the event toggle and the selected sound under
Notifications settings. Confirm the master volume,
browser tab audio permission, and device volume. Custom uploads must be audio
files within the size accepted by the uploader.
App installation is unavailable
Install support depends on the browser and device. On iPhone or iPad, use the
in-app instructions to add MyFundedPerps to the Home Screen. Other browsers
may show a native install prompt or an install action in their own menu.
Checkout says I reached a purchase limit
− Purchases are limited to 30 in any rolling 24 hours, 75 in any rolling 7 days,
− and 200 in any rolling 30 days across all plans and payment methods. The notice
− on the checkout page names the window you reached and the time you can
− purchase again; no payment was taken. Wait until that time, then try again.
− Read Buying a Challenge for
− how the rolling windows work.
A purchase or invoice is missing
Open Purchase History,
clear search and status filters, and load older rows if needed. Invoices appear
only on purchases for which the invoice action is available. Pending, failed,
and refunded orders remain visible with their current status.
Still need help?
Open Support. Before You Contact Us
shows the published FAQ first. Search the questions and answers, filter by topic,
and expand answers in place. You can also browse the full
FAQ.
If you still need help, use Message Support below the FAQ to contact our
team. Select View Conversations to return to your Intercom conversations.
After
paid. That credit cannot be withdrawn as cash and expires 45 days after it is
added. Read
Split Cash and Store Credit.
Does store credit expire?
Yes. Store credit expires 45 days after it is issued, and credit issued before
September 11, 2026 expires at midnight Eastern time on October 26, 2026. Checkout uses the credit that
expires soonest first. Select Expiry Schedule under your balance on
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
Store Credit Expiry.
Do FP Points expire?
Yes. FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned, and points earned before
+ September 11, 2026 expire at 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, 2026 (04:00 UTC on
+ December 10). Opening a case spends the points that expire soonest first.
Select Expiry Schedule on the FP Points tab of
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
FP Points Expiry.
A tool or footer is unavailable
If the market picker, calculator, chart panel, layout switcher, footer, or
bottom toolbar cannot load, the rest of the page stays available. Select
Refresh beside the unavailable item to reload the page and try again.
You can also close a failed market picker to continue viewing the current
market. The footer's legal, support, and cookie-preference links remain
available in its fallback view.
After an app update, the next page you open loads the new version. A page you
manual options remain available when storage is blocked. This message is
separate from a permissions rejection.
Sounds or notifications are missing
Check both the event toggle and the selected sound under
Notifications settings. Confirm the master volume,
browser tab audio permission, and device volume. Custom uploads must be audio
files within the size accepted by the uploader.
App installation is unavailable
Install support depends on the browser and device. On iPhone or iPad, use the
in-app instructions to add MyFundedPerps to the Home Screen. Other browsers
may show a native install prompt or an install action in their own menu.
Checkout says I reached a purchase limit
+ Challenge purchases have no general limit. This notice appears only when an
+ individual purchase limit applies to your account. It names the limit and, when
+ waiting helps, the time you can purchase again; no payment was taken. Contact
+ support if you have questions about the limit on your account. Read
+ Purchase limits
+ for details.
A purchase or invoice is missing
Open Purchase History,
clear search and status filters, and load older rows if needed. Invoices appear
only on purchases for which the invoice action is available. Pending, failed,
and refunded orders remain visible with their current status.
Still need help?
Open Support. Before You Contact Us
shows the published FAQ first. Search the questions and answers, filter by topic,
and expand answers in place. You can also browse the full
FAQ.
If you still need help, use Message Support below the FAQ to contact our
team. Select View Conversations to return to your Intercom conversations.
paid. That credit cannot be withdrawn as cash and expires 45 days after it is
added. Read
Split Cash and Store Credit.
Does store credit expire?
Yes. Store credit expires 45 days after it is issued, and credit issued before
September 11, 2026 expires at midnight Eastern time on October 26, 2026. Checkout uses the credit that
expires soonest first. Select Expiry Schedule under your balance on
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
Store Credit Expiry.
Do FP Points expire?
Yes. FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned, and points earned before
− September 11, 2026 expire at midnight Eastern time on December 10, 2026. Opening a case spends the points that expire soonest first.
+ September 11, 2026 expire at 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, 2026 (04:00 UTC on
+ December 10). Opening a case spends the points that expire soonest first.
Select Expiry Schedule on the FP Points tab of
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
FP Points Expiry.
A tool or footer is unavailable
If the market picker, calculator, chart panel, layout switcher, footer, or
bottom toolbar cannot load, the rest of the page stays available. Select
Refresh beside the unavailable item to reload the page and try again.
You can also close a failed market picker to continue viewing the current
market. The footer's legal, support, and cookie-preference links remain
available in its fallback view.
After an app update, the next page you open loads the new version. A page you
manual options remain available when storage is blocked. This message is
separate from a permissions rejection.
Sounds or notifications are missing
Check both the event toggle and the selected sound under
Notifications settings. Confirm the master volume,
browser tab audio permission, and device volume. Custom uploads must be audio
files within the size accepted by the uploader.
App installation is unavailable
Install support depends on the browser and device. On iPhone or iPad, use the
in-app instructions to add MyFundedPerps to the Home Screen. Other browsers
may show a native install prompt or an install action in their own menu.
Checkout says I reached a purchase limit
− Purchases are limited to 30 in any rolling 24 hours, 75 in any rolling 7 days,
− and 200 in any rolling 30 days across all plans and payment methods. The notice
− on the checkout page names the window you reached and the time you can
− purchase again; no payment was taken. Wait until that time, then try again.
− Read Buying a Challenge for
− how the rolling windows work.
+ Challenge purchases have no general limit. This notice appears only when an
+ individual purchase limit applies to your account. It names the limit and, when
+ waiting helps, the time you can purchase again; no payment was taken. Contact
+ support if you have questions about the limit on your account. Read
+ Purchase limits
+ for details.
A purchase or invoice is missing
Open Purchase History,
clear search and status filters, and load older rows if needed. Invoices appear
only on purchases for which the invoice action is available. Pending, failed,
and refunded orders remain visible with their current status.
Still need help?
Open Support. Before You Contact Us
shows the published FAQ first. Search the questions and answers, filter by topic,
and expand answers in place. You can also browse the full
FAQ.
If you still need help, use Message Support below the FAQ to contact our
team. Select View Conversations to return to your Intercom conversations.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading JournalSession tag field removed from trading journal; automatic session categorization by UTC windows no longer available.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Trading Journal
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-journal
− Review auto-logged closed trades, R multiples, session and hold-time tags, and add notes, setups, tags, mistakes, and ratings.
Open the journal
The journal lives on the dashboard at
myfundedperpetuals.com/dashboard/journal.
Every trade you close on the selected challenge account appears there
automatically: entry and exit prices, size, leverage, fees, funding, and close
reason all come from your trading history. There is no manual trade entry and
nothing to sync.
What is logged for each trade
A journal trade is one complete position lifecycle (open to fully closed).
Each row shows:
- Close time, market, side, and leverage.
- Entry size and lifecycle entry/exit prices (volume-weighted when the
position filled in parts).
- Hold time, with an automatic bucket: Scalp (under 15 minutes), Intraday
(under 24 hours), or Swing (24 hours or longer).
− - A session tag derived from the entry time using fixed UTC windows: London
− 07:00 to 13:00, New York 13:00 to 21:00, and Asia otherwise.
- Net P\&L (realized P\&L minus fees, plus funding).
- R multiple, when the trade has one (see below).
R multiple
The R multiple expresses net P\&L as a multiple of the risk you defined at
entry: the distance from your entry price to the stop loss attached when the
order was placed, times the entry size.
A trade only has an R multiple when a stop loss was attached to the entry
order. Trades without an attached stop, and trades opened before this feature
shipped, show no value instead of an estimated one. Moving the stop after
entry does not change the recorded initial risk.
Reviewing a trade
Select any row to open its dedicated trade review page. The page opens with a
time to revoke access immediately. A trade is private by default, and clearing
its journal review does not change the visibility choice.
Working through the queue
The review page includes Previous and Next controls that step through your
recent trades in close order, and Save & Review Next stores the current entry
and jumps straight to the next trade without a journal entry. Each trade in the
table shows Not Journaled until you save an entry for it, then
Journaled. These labels track your own notes only; they are not a review by
MyFundedPerps and do not affect your account. The journal table shows how many
trades are not journaled yet, and the Journal filter narrows the table to just
those.
Filters and history depth
− Filter the table by session or journal status, or search it. The table loads
your most recent trades first and pages backward on demand, up to the most
recent 200 trades. The performance tiles and P\&L calendar above the table use
the same analytics ranges as the
Performance page.
The P\&L calendar places each trade on the New York trading day it closed in,
the same day your daily loss limit uses. That day starts at midnight New York
time, so a trade closed in the evening in the Americas counts toward that same
date.
Select Download CSV to export the account's complete journal history. The
file includes every closed trade, not only the rows currently loaded in the
table, together with trade facts, calculated results, journal status, setup,
tags, mistakes, execution rating, and notes.
After
Trading Journal
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-journal
+ Review auto-logged closed trades, R multiples, hold-time tags, and add notes, setups, tags, mistakes, and ratings.
Open the journal
The journal lives on the dashboard at
myfundedperpetuals.com/dashboard/journal.
Every trade you close on the selected challenge account appears there
automatically: entry and exit prices, size, leverage, fees, funding, and close
reason all come from your trading history. There is no manual trade entry and
nothing to sync.
What is logged for each trade
A journal trade is one complete position lifecycle (open to fully closed).
Each row shows:
- Close time, market, side, and leverage.
- Entry size and lifecycle entry/exit prices (volume-weighted when the
position filled in parts).
- Hold time, with an automatic bucket: Scalp (under 15 minutes), Intraday
(under 24 hours), or Swing (24 hours or longer).
- Net P\&L (realized P\&L minus fees, plus funding).
- R multiple, when the trade has one (see below).
R multiple
The R multiple expresses net P\&L as a multiple of the risk you defined at
entry: the distance from your entry price to the stop loss attached when the
order was placed, times the entry size.
A trade only has an R multiple when a stop loss was attached to the entry
order. Trades without an attached stop, and trades opened before this feature
shipped, show no value instead of an estimated one. Moving the stop after
entry does not change the recorded initial risk.
Reviewing a trade
Select any row to open its dedicated trade review page. The page opens with a
time to revoke access immediately. A trade is private by default, and clearing
its journal review does not change the visibility choice.
Working through the queue
The review page includes Previous and Next controls that step through your
recent trades in close order, and Save & Review Next stores the current entry
and jumps straight to the next trade without a journal entry. Each trade in the
table shows Not Journaled until you save an entry for it, then
Journaled. These labels track your own notes only; they are not a review by
MyFundedPerps and do not affect your account. The journal table shows how many
trades are not journaled yet, and the Journal filter narrows the table to just
those.
Filters and history depth
+ Filter the table by journal status, or search it. The table loads
your most recent trades first and pages backward on demand, up to the most
recent 200 trades. The performance tiles and P\&L calendar above the table use
the same analytics ranges as the
Performance page.
The P\&L calendar places each trade on the New York trading day it closed in,
the same day your daily loss limit uses. That day starts at midnight New York
time, so a trade closed in the evening in the Americas counts toward that same
date.
Select Download CSV to export the account's complete journal history. The
file includes every closed trade, not only the rows currently loaded in the
table, together with trade facts, calculated results, journal status, setup,
tags, mistakes, execution rating, and notes.
Trading Journal
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-journal
− Review auto-logged closed trades, R multiples, session and hold-time tags, and add notes, setups, tags, mistakes, and ratings.
+ Review auto-logged closed trades, R multiples, hold-time tags, and add notes, setups, tags, mistakes, and ratings.
Open the journal
The journal lives on the dashboard at
myfundedperpetuals.com/dashboard/journal.
Every trade you close on the selected challenge account appears there
automatically: entry and exit prices, size, leverage, fees, funding, and close
reason all come from your trading history. There is no manual trade entry and
nothing to sync.
What is logged for each trade
A journal trade is one complete position lifecycle (open to fully closed).
Each row shows:
- Close time, market, side, and leverage.
- Entry size and lifecycle entry/exit prices (volume-weighted when the
position filled in parts).
- Hold time, with an automatic bucket: Scalp (under 15 minutes), Intraday
(under 24 hours), or Swing (24 hours or longer).
− - A session tag derived from the entry time using fixed UTC windows: London
− 07:00 to 13:00, New York 13:00 to 21:00, and Asia otherwise.
- Net P\&L (realized P\&L minus fees, plus funding).
- R multiple, when the trade has one (see below).
R multiple
The R multiple expresses net P\&L as a multiple of the risk you defined at
entry: the distance from your entry price to the stop loss attached when the
order was placed, times the entry size.
A trade only has an R multiple when a stop loss was attached to the entry
order. Trades without an attached stop, and trades opened before this feature
shipped, show no value instead of an estimated one. Moving the stop after
entry does not change the recorded initial risk.
Reviewing a trade
Select any row to open its dedicated trade review page. The page opens with a
time to revoke access immediately. A trade is private by default, and clearing
its journal review does not change the visibility choice.
Working through the queue
The review page includes Previous and Next controls that step through your
recent trades in close order, and Save & Review Next stores the current entry
and jumps straight to the next trade without a journal entry. Each trade in the
table shows Not Journaled until you save an entry for it, then
Journaled. These labels track your own notes only; they are not a review by
MyFundedPerps and do not affect your account. The journal table shows how many
trades are not journaled yet, and the Journal filter narrows the table to just
those.
Filters and history depth
− Filter the table by session or journal status, or search it. The table loads
+ Filter the table by journal status, or search it. The table loads
your most recent trades first and pages backward on demand, up to the most
recent 200 trades. The performance tiles and P\&L calendar above the table use
the same analytics ranges as the
Performance page.
The P\&L calendar places each trade on the New York trading day it closed in,
the same day your daily loss limit uses. That day starts at midnight New York
time, so a trade closed in the evening in the Americas counts toward that same
date.
Select Download CSV to export the account's complete journal history. The
file includes every closed trade, not only the rows currently loaded in the
table, together with trade facts, calculated results, journal status, setup,
tags, mistakes, execution rating, and notes.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading GuideArticle expanded to cover forex and index markets on multiple venues with trading hours restrictions, added Reverse Position feature, and added chart-based limit order placement.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
− Forex markets
− The forex markets are EUR/USD and USD/JPY, both on Hyperliquid. Both use
− the venue's perpetual order book and price history, with trading
− available around the clock subject to venue availability and fresh market data.
− There is no weekend price substitute or switch to another venue outside
− traditional forex hours. Check the order ticket for each market's current
− leverage and size requirements.
− Forex previously traded on Lighter. Open forex positions were carried over to
− the Hyperliquid markets with their entry price, size, leverage, and history
− unchanged, and they now follow the Hyperliquid market's prices and rules.
Browse markets
The Markets page shows cached prices
and statistics so browsing does not wait for every data source. Prices refresh
every 30 seconds while the tab is visible; polling pauses in hidden tabs.
A recent listing and its other statistics are reused for ten minutes; an older
cached listing can appear while a replacement loads. Overview cards and
historical charts load independently from the market list.
Open Filters to narrow the list by asset class (Stocks, Crypto, Indices,
Commodities, FX) and other criteria. Selected filters stay in the page URL so
a refined view can be shared or refreshed.
Open a market to see current trading data. Orders use current execution checks,
not the cached prices on the Markets page.
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
− - Tap the mark price to open Market Details. It shows mark price, 24h
− change, open interest, and 24h volume, and opens Trading Data,
− Market Info, and Market Depth. While one of those views is open, the
− tabs above it take you back to Chart.
- The chart's drawing tools start collapsed. Tap the arrow at the chart's left
edge to show them.
- Tap Focus Chart (the full-screen icon in the header) to give the chart
the whole screen. The header and bottom tabs hide, leaving one bar under the
chart with your open position for the market, Buy / Long, **Sell /
Short, and Exit Focus**, which restores the full layout. Focus applies
only to the price chart and is remembered on that device.
Net PnL percentage
Position Net PnL % on the trading terminal, dashboard, and position PnL cards
is calculated as Net PnL ÷ position margin × 100 for every market,
including forex. For example, a \$25 net profit on \$250 of margin is a 10%
return.
For example, selling 0.5 BTC while you hold a 0.5 BTC long closes the long:
it does not leave you holding a 0.5 BTC long and a 0.5 BTC short. Selling
0.8 BTC instead closes the long and opens a 0.3 BTC short.
Hedge mode is not supported. You cannot hold a long and a short on the same
market in the same account at the same time.
When a position closes or flips, its Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are
canceled automatically, because the position they protected no longer
exists. Set new exits for a flipped position if you want them. When a
position is only reduced, any exit larger than the remaining size is reduced
to fit it.
Use Reduce Only (described below) when an order should only shrink or
close your position and never flip it.
Choose an order type
Order | What it does | Main tradeoff
Market | Fills the full size using the execution model described below. | Adverse slippage is capped by the market's published tier.
Limit | Rests at your price and fills in full there once the market reaches it. A limit placed through the market fills right away as a market order. | Controls price but may remain unfilled if the market never reaches the limit.
Stop / Take Profit | Watches a trigger and submits the configured exit behavior when reached. | A trigger is not a guaranteed fill price; execution still uses current market conditions.
Scheduled or advanced order | Breaks or manages an instruction using the controls shown in the order ticket. | Each generated order still passes the ordinary account and execution checks.
Check the order ticket for the order types available on the selected market.
Select Reduce Only to cap an order at closing or shrinking an existing
position in the opposite direction. It is offered on every order type except
Take Market: a reduce-only take exit belongs on the position's Take Profit
instead. When an account restriction requires it, the option is locked on and
oversized requests are capped at the open position size.
wait longer between attempts. A brief touch still does not guarantee a fill.
Where faster confirmation is enabled, a fresh book showing the market
strictly beyond your resting limit can fill it immediately at the limit
price. If that book is too old, the order uses the usual confirmation checks.
Exact touches can start confirmation immediately after the order is
triggered, but still need a newer book that reaches the limit. If an
execution attempt is interrupted, the order can return to waiting and retry;
it does not fill using an old touch alone.
- A Limit take profit or stop loss follows the same rule after it triggers: it
rests at its price and fills in full at that price once the market reaches
it, so it can remain unfilled. If the market has already passed the limit
when it triggers, it fills right away as a market order instead.
How market orders fill
Market orders, including triggered stop and take-profit market exits, fill
their whole size at the best ask for buys or the best bid for sells, with
maximum adverse slippage capped against the current mark reference. Each
published tier is a worst-case bound, not a fixed fill offset. If the book
offers a price inside the cap, your order receives that price. A fill is never
better than the mark itself: buys fill at or above the mark and sells at or
below it, even when the book momentarily sits through the mark.
For buys, the fill is the lower of the best ask and mark × (1 + tier / 10,000),
and at least the mark. For sells, it is the higher of the best bid and
mark × (1 - tier / 10,000), and at most the mark. For example, with a mark of
\$100 and a 1 bps cap, a best ask of \$100.005 fills at \$100.005; a best ask of
at the trigger price: market movement and the spread can change the final loss.
Take Profit and Stop Loss instructions help define exits before an order is
submitted. You can show their estimated gain or loss in percent or USD, and
save a TP/SL preset that fills the same gain and loss on every market (see
Trading settings). Review
the trigger, direction, quantity, and whether the exit uses market or limit
behavior where the ticket offers that choice.
For a new order, you can enter either a trigger price or an estimated gain or
loss. The last field you edit controls the target. If you enter a USD amount or
percentage, the draft trigger price updates with the estimated entry price,
size, leverage, and fees until you submit. If you enter or drag the trigger
price, that price stays fixed and the gain or loss estimate updates instead.
− Once submitted, the order uses its saved trigger price. The selected amount is
an estimate, not a guaranteed final profit or loss.
New Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other conditional orders use the market's
standard chart source:
Venue | Trigger source
Binance, Bybit, Hyperliquid (including forex) | Last traded price
For Last Price triggers, one actual trade touching your level is enough,
including a small trade. The platform does not wait for the candle to close
or for the mark price to reach the same level. Liquidation and account loss
monitoring use their separate price references.
Protective market Stop Loss and Take Profit orders can execute using the
first recorded best bid or ask at or after the touch when eligible quote evidence
is available and the order and position have not changed. That price stays fixed
- Reset to Default: restore the platform default arrangement and panel
sizes in one click.
Choose Edit Current Layout to enter edit mode. The edit toolbar takes the
place of the market stats bar while you edit, so the terminal stays where it
is. In edit mode, drag any panel by its handle onto a highlighted zone: an
existing column, or a strip at the edge where a new column will appear.
Hovering a zone outlines where the panel will land and names the zone. You
can also use the panel's Move To menu. Each panel header also has a hide
button. Panels glide into their new places, and rearranging never reloads the
main chart. The edit toolbar keeps the arrangement with Done, restores
the layout you selected before editing with Reset, or names the
arrangement with Save as Layout.
Widgets
The Widgets row in the edit toolbar lists every panel that is not on
screen; scroll it sideways when it holds more widgets than fit. Drag a widget
chip onto a highlighted zone, or open its Place in menu and pick a zone,
and it joins the terminal there. Hiding a placed widget returns it to the
row. Widgets you can place:
- Market Chart: a compact chart with its own market picker and timeframe
chips, so you can watch one market while trading another. While it is
placed, the bottom-bar Chart button shows "Docked in the terminal"
instead of opening a floating window; the widget and the floating window
share the same market and timeframe. Click the docked chart to trade its
market: the order ticket and order book switch to it, both show a
Hiding the order ticket removes the order entry form until you show it again
from customize mode or apply another arrangement.
Automatic closure after an evaluation pass
When the server confirms that your evaluation equity reaches its profit
target and the other pass requirements are clear, the account automatically
passes and closes its open positions. Open profit and loss count toward
equity, so you do not need to close trades yourself to realize the target.
Closing fees or slippage can leave the final balance slightly below target
without changing the passed result. See
Evaluation Progress.
Understand rejections
An order can be rejected when it would violate account rules, collateral or
− position limits, current market availability, execution protection, a pending
− payout lock, or copy-follower restrictions. Read the message attached to the
rejected order, confirm the active account, then change only the condition that
caused the rejection.
Do not repeatedly resubmit an unchanged order. If the reason remains unclear,
use Troubleshooting and FAQ.
Today's fill statistics
The dashboard counts fills on the day they settle, even if you placed the order
on an earlier day. Today's fees, realized PnL, traded volume, and fill win rate
use the same fills. The day runs from midnight to midnight in America/New_York,
including daylight saving changes. Unfilled orders and historical fills with no
recorded settlement time are excluded from these daily statistics.
Today's P\&L
Today's P\&L measures the change in equity since midnight in America/New_York.
It includes changes in unrealized profit or loss, trading fees, and swap fees,
− so it can differ from the profit on trades closed today.
If you closed all positions before today's reset and have had no activity
since, today's P\&L is \$0.00. Yesterday's gain or loss is already included in
your balance. A page left open checks the current day once per minute without
requiring a refresh. If you have open positions and today's starting equity
is not yet available, the daily P\&L value and its share action remain
unavailable until that value arrives.
After
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
+ Forex and index markets
+ EUR/USD and USD/JPY trade on Hyperliquid, gold (XAU) on Binance, and the
+ S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100) on Hyperliquid, around the clock. The
+ following markets price from oracle venues that quote a bid and an ask, so
+ their order book shows a single level on each side:
+ Markets | Venue
+ GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, and USD/CHF | Veranta
+ Dow Jones 30 (US30) | Ostium
+ US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
+ point, the same as every other market on the platform. Take Profit, Stop Loss,
+ and other price triggers on these markets follow the venue's mid price. Check
+ the order ticket for each market's current leverage and size requirements.
+ Trading hours
+ These markets follow their venue's trading sessions instead of trading around
+ the clock. Times are New York time:
+ Markets | Weekly session | Daily break
+ GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, USD/CHF | Sunday 17:00 to Friday 17:00 | None
+ US30 | Sunday 18:00 to Friday 17:00 | 17:00 to 18:00, Monday to Thursday
+ Venues also close early or for the full day on some holidays. The trade page
+ shows a Market Closed notice whenever a market is outside its session.
+ While a market is closed
+ - Prices, the chart, and the order book show the last quote before the close.
+ - Market orders and position closes are rejected with a market closed
+ message. Nothing on the market can fill until it reopens.
+ - You can still place, edit, and cancel limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss
+ orders. They stay open and can trigger or fill at the reopening price.
+ - Open positions keep counting toward your account at the last quote. If your
+ account is liquidated or closed out while a market is closed, those
+ positions close at that last quote.
+ Prices can open far from the last quote after a weekend or holiday. A Stop
+ Loss that the reopening price crosses fills at the first available price,
+ which can be worse than its trigger price.
Browse markets
The Markets page shows cached prices
and statistics so browsing does not wait for every data source. Prices refresh
every 30 seconds while the tab is visible; polling pauses in hidden tabs.
A recent listing and its other statistics are reused for ten minutes; an older
cached listing can appear while a replacement loads. Overview cards and
historical charts load independently from the market list.
Open Filters to narrow the list by asset class (Stocks, Crypto, Indices,
Commodities, FX) and other criteria. Selected filters stay in the page URL so
a refined view can be shared or refreshed.
Open a market to see current trading data. Orders use current execution checks,
not the cached prices on the Markets page.
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
+ - Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
+ Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
+ Venue picker at the top switches between them. Below it are mark price,
+ 24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
+ as its trading hours. It also opens Trading Data, Market Info, and
+ Market Depth. While one of those views is open, the tabs above it take
+ you back to Chart.
- The chart's drawing tools start collapsed. Tap the arrow at the chart's left
edge to show them.
- Tap Focus Chart (the full-screen icon in the header) to give the chart
the whole screen. The header and bottom tabs hide, leaving one bar under the
chart with your open position for the market, Buy / Long, **Sell /
Short, and Exit Focus**, which restores the full layout. Focus applies
only to the price chart and is remembered on that device.
Net PnL percentage
Position Net PnL % on the trading terminal, dashboard, and position PnL cards
is calculated as Net PnL ÷ position margin × 100 for every market,
including forex. For example, a \$25 net profit on \$250 of margin is a 10%
return.
For example, selling 0.5 BTC while you hold a 0.5 BTC long closes the long:
it does not leave you holding a 0.5 BTC long and a 0.5 BTC short. Selling
0.8 BTC instead closes the long and opens a 0.3 BTC short.
Hedge mode is not supported. You cannot hold a long and a short on the same
market in the same account at the same time.
When a position closes or flips, its Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are
canceled automatically, because the position they protected no longer
exists. Set new exits for a flipped position if you want them. When a
position is only reduced, any exit larger than the remaining size is reduced
to fit it.
Use Reduce Only (described below) when an order should only shrink or
close your position and never flip it.
+ Reverse a position
+ Reverse Position closes your position and opens the same size on the other
+ side. Holding a 1 BTC long and reversing leaves you with a 1 BTC short. On the
+ chart it is the up and down arrow on the position's line. In the Positions tab
+ it is the Reverse button in each row, and on a phone it is the **Reverse
+ Position** button on each position card.
+ A reversal is one market order for twice your position size, so both sides
+ happen in a single fill:
+ - All or nothing. If the new position would break a challenge rule, exceed
+ your margin or exposure limits, or exceed your
+ Max Market Slippage, the
+ order is rejected and your original position stays open unchanged. You are
+ never left flat by a reversal that only half worked.
+ - Same settings. The new position uses the leverage and margin mode of the
+ position you reversed.
+ - Fees and slippage. The trading fee applies to the full reversed size,
+ the same as closing and then opening separately. Market slippage is
+ estimated for the full order size.
+ - Exits. The position's Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are canceled, as
+ with any flip. Set new exits for the reversed position if you want them.
+ - Current position only. If the position changes before the order fills
+ (for example, a Take Profit partly closes it, you add to it, or you change
+ its leverage), the reversal is rejected instead of reversing something other
+ than what you saw. Try again with the updated position.
+ - Copy trading followers. Reversing a lead account reverses its followers.
+ If a follower's position changes before filling, its copy is resized to reach
+ the intended position on the new side. The follower still needs enough
+ available collateral and must pass its own trading checks. See
+ Copy Trading.
+ If Confirm New Orders reviews market orders, Reverse Position opens a short
+ review first. Otherwise it is sent as soon as you click it.
+ To remove the button everywhere, turn off
+ Show Reverse Position in Trading
+ settings.
Choose an order type
Order | What it does | Main tradeoff
Market | Fills the full size using the execution model described below. | Adverse slippage is capped by the market's published tier.
Limit | Rests at your price and fills in full there once the market reaches it. A limit placed through the market fills right away as a market order. | Controls price but may remain unfilled if the market never reaches the limit.
Stop / Take Profit | Watches a trigger and submits the configured exit behavior when reached. | A trigger is not a guaranteed fill price; execution still uses current market conditions.
Scheduled or advanced order | Breaks or manages an instruction using the controls shown in the order ticket. | Each generated order still passes the ordinary account and execution checks.
Check the order ticket for the order types available on the selected market.
Select Reduce Only to cap an order at closing or shrinking an existing
position in the opposite direction. It is offered on every order type except
Take Market: a reduce-only take exit belongs on the position's Take Profit
instead. When an account restriction requires it, the option is locked on and
oversized requests are capped at the open position size.
wait longer between attempts. A brief touch still does not guarantee a fill.
Where faster confirmation is enabled, a fresh book showing the market
strictly beyond your resting limit can fill it immediately at the limit
price. If that book is too old, the order uses the usual confirmation checks.
Exact touches can start confirmation immediately after the order is
triggered, but still need a newer book that reaches the limit. If an
execution attempt is interrupted, the order can return to waiting and retry;
it does not fill using an old touch alone.
- A Limit take profit or stop loss follows the same rule after it triggers: it
rests at its price and fills in full at that price once the market reaches
it, so it can remain unfilled. If the market has already passed the limit
when it triggers, it fills right away as a market order instead.
+ Start a limit order from the chart
+ Hover the chart and a + button appears beside the price label on the price
+ scale. Click it to start a limit order at that price. A level above the current
+ price starts a sell limit and a level at or below it starts a buy limit. You
+ can switch the side in the order ticket.
+ The order ticket switches to Limit with the price filled in, and the chart
+ draws a dashed draft line at that level. The draft is not placed yet: drag the
+ line to adjust the price, set the size in the order ticket, then submit the
+ order there.
+ You can also right-click the chart and choose Buy Limit at or **Sell Limit
+ at** the price under the pointer.
How market orders fill
Market orders, including triggered stop and take-profit market exits, fill
their whole size at the best ask for buys or the best bid for sells, with
maximum adverse slippage capped against the current mark reference. Each
published tier is a worst-case bound, not a fixed fill offset. If the book
offers a price inside the cap, your order receives that price. A fill is never
better than the mark itself: buys fill at or above the mark and sells at or
below it, even when the book momentarily sits through the mark.
For buys, the fill is the lower of the best ask and mark × (1 + tier / 10,000),
and at least the mark. For sells, it is the higher of the best bid and
mark × (1 - tier / 10,000), and at most the mark. For example, with a mark of
\$100 and a 1 bps cap, a best ask of \$100.005 fills at \$100.005; a best ask of
at the trigger price: market movement and the spread can change the final loss.
Take Profit and Stop Loss instructions help define exits before an order is
submitted. You can show their estimated gain or loss in percent or USD, and
save a TP/SL preset that fills the same gain and loss on every market (see
Trading settings). Review
the trigger, direction, quantity, and whether the exit uses market or limit
behavior where the ticket offers that choice.
For a new order, you can enter either a trigger price or an estimated gain or
loss. The last field you edit controls the target. If you enter a USD amount or
percentage, the draft trigger price updates with the estimated entry price,
size, leverage, and fees until you submit. If you enter or drag the trigger
price, that price stays fixed and the gain or loss estimate updates instead.
+ If you switch between Long and Short, a fixed Take Profit or Stop Loss price
+ moves to the other side of the entry price at the same distance, so it still
+ protects the new direction. Once submitted, the order uses its saved trigger
+ price.
+ While you draft a limit order, the draft limit line on the chart shows TP
+ and SL handles. Drag a handle up or down to set that Take Profit or Stop
+ Loss price. The ticket turns on TP/SL and fills in the price, and the draft
+ line stays in sync with the ticket as you edit either one. Nothing is placed
+ until you submit the order. A handle is hidden once its level is set, and the
+ SL handle is hidden while a trailing stop is selected. The selected amount is
an estimate, not a guaranteed final profit or loss.
New Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other conditional orders use the market's
standard chart source:
Venue | Trigger source
Binance, Bybit, Hyperliquid (including forex) | Last traded price
For Last Price triggers, one actual trade touching your level is enough,
including a small trade. The platform does not wait for the candle to close
or for the mark price to reach the same level. Liquidation and account loss
monitoring use their separate price references.
Protective market Stop Loss and Take Profit orders can execute using the
first recorded best bid or ask at or after the touch when eligible quote evidence
is available and the order and position have not changed. That price stays fixed
- Reset to Default: restore the platform default arrangement and panel
sizes in one click.
Choose Edit Current Layout to enter edit mode. The edit toolbar takes the
place of the market stats bar while you edit, so the terminal stays where it
is. In edit mode, drag any panel by its handle onto a highlighted zone: an
existing column, or a strip at the edge where a new column will appear.
Hovering a zone outlines where the panel will land and names the zone. You
can also use the panel's Move To menu. Each panel header also has a hide
button. Panels glide into their new places, and rearranging never reloads the
main chart. The edit toolbar keeps the arrangement with Done, restores
the layout you selected before editing with Reset, or names the
arrangement with Save as Layout.
+ Multiple charts
+ On a desktop-width window, the chart layout buttons beside Terminal Layout
+ in the market stats bar, or the Chart Layout section of the **Terminal
+ Layout menu, split the chart area into One Chart, Two Charts** side by
+ side, or Four Charts in a grid. Every chart is a full
+ chart with your indicators, drawing tools, saved chart layouts, and position
+ and order lines for the market it shows.
+ - The first chart always shows the market in the address bar. Picking a
+ different market in its header opens that market's trade page.
+ - Each other chart has its own market picker in its header and keeps its own
+ timeframe, so you can watch different markets, or the same market on
+ different timeframes. Changing its market or timeframe does not retarget the
+ other charts. A chart the layout shows for the first time starts on the market in the address
+ bar, on the 1h, 4h, or daily timeframe.
+ - Saved chart customizations are shared across charts. Charts showing the same
+ market also share saved drawings. If you edit drawings in both, the latest
+ save is kept.
+ - Click a chart to trade its market. The active chart gets a highlighted
+ border, and the order ticket and order book switch to its market. When that
+ market differs from the address bar, both show a "Following chart" strip
+ with the market name, and the buy and sell buttons name the market, so you
+ can confirm it before you submit. Click the first chart, or open a different
+ market, to return the ticket to the market in the address bar.
+ - Starting a limit order from the chart's context menu works in the first
+ chart only.
+ Choose One Chart at any time to return to the single chart. The layout and
+ each chart's market and timeframe are remembered per browser. Charts you are
+ not showing are closed and do not load market data. Phone and narrow-window
+ layouts always show one chart.
Widgets
The Widgets row in the edit toolbar lists every panel that is not on
screen; scroll it sideways when it holds more widgets than fit. Drag a widget
chip onto a highlighted zone, or open its Place in menu and pick a zone,
and it joins the terminal there. Hiding a placed widget returns it to the
row. Widgets you can place:
- Market Chart: a compact chart with its own market picker and timeframe
chips, so you can watch one market while trading another. While it is
placed, the bottom-bar Chart button shows "Docked in the terminal"
instead of opening a floating window; the widget and the floating window
share the same market and timeframe. Click the docked chart to trade its
market: the order ticket and order book switch to it, both show a
Hiding the order ticket removes the order entry form until you show it again
from customize mode or apply another arrangement.
Automatic closure after an evaluation pass
When the server confirms that your evaluation equity reaches its profit
target and the other pass requirements are clear, the account automatically
passes and closes its open positions. Open profit and loss count toward
equity, so you do not need to close trades yourself to realize the target.
Closing fees or slippage can leave the final balance slightly below target
without changing the passed result. See
Evaluation Progress.
Understand rejections
An order can be rejected when it would violate account rules, collateral or
+ position limits, current market availability or
+ trading hours, execution protection, a pending payout lock,
+ or copy-follower restrictions. Read the message attached to the
rejected order, confirm the active account, then change only the condition that
caused the rejection.
Do not repeatedly resubmit an unchanged order. If the reason remains unclear,
use Troubleshooting and FAQ.
Today's fill statistics
The dashboard counts fills on the day they settle, even if you placed the order
on an earlier day. Today's fees, realized PnL, traded volume, and fill win rate
use the same fills. The day runs from midnight to midnight in America/New_York,
including daylight saving changes. Unfilled orders and historical fills with no
recorded settlement time are excluded from these daily statistics.
Today's P\&L
Today's P\&L measures the change in equity since midnight in America/New_York.
It includes changes in unrealized profit or loss, trading fees, and swap fees,
+ so it can differ from the profit on trades closed today. The swap fee charged
+ at midnight belongs to the day that just ended, so it is not part of today's
+ P\&L.
If you closed all positions before today's reset and have had no activity
since, today's P\&L is \$0.00. Yesterday's gain or loss is already included in
your balance. A page left open checks the current day once per minute without
requiring a refresh. If you have open positions and today's starting equity
is not yet available, the daily P\&L value and its share action remain
unavailable until that value arrives.
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
− Forex markets
− The forex markets are EUR/USD and USD/JPY, both on Hyperliquid. Both use
− the venue's perpetual order book and price history, with trading
− available around the clock subject to venue availability and fresh market data.
− There is no weekend price substitute or switch to another venue outside
− traditional forex hours. Check the order ticket for each market's current
− leverage and size requirements.
− Forex previously traded on Lighter. Open forex positions were carried over to
− the Hyperliquid markets with their entry price, size, leverage, and history
− unchanged, and they now follow the Hyperliquid market's prices and rules.
+ Forex and index markets
+ EUR/USD and USD/JPY trade on Hyperliquid, gold (XAU) on Binance, and the
+ S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100) on Hyperliquid, around the clock. The
+ following markets price from oracle venues that quote a bid and an ask, so
+ their order book shows a single level on each side:
+ Markets | Venue
+ GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, and USD/CHF | Veranta
+ Dow Jones 30 (US30) | Ostium
+ US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
+ point, the same as every other market on the platform. Take Profit, Stop Loss,
+ and other price triggers on these markets follow the venue's mid price. Check
+ the order ticket for each market's current leverage and size requirements.
+ Trading hours
+ These markets follow their venue's trading sessions instead of trading around
+ the clock. Times are New York time:
+ Markets | Weekly session | Daily break
+ GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, USD/CHF | Sunday 17:00 to Friday 17:00 | None
+ US30 | Sunday 18:00 to Friday 17:00 | 17:00 to 18:00, Monday to Thursday
+ Venues also close early or for the full day on some holidays. The trade page
+ shows a Market Closed notice whenever a market is outside its session.
+ While a market is closed
+ - Prices, the chart, and the order book show the last quote before the close.
+ - Market orders and position closes are rejected with a market closed
+ message. Nothing on the market can fill until it reopens.
+ - You can still place, edit, and cancel limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss
+ orders. They stay open and can trigger or fill at the reopening price.
+ - Open positions keep counting toward your account at the last quote. If your
+ account is liquidated or closed out while a market is closed, those
+ positions close at that last quote.
+ Prices can open far from the last quote after a weekend or holiday. A Stop
+ Loss that the reopening price crosses fills at the first available price,
+ which can be worse than its trigger price.
Browse markets
The Markets page shows cached prices
and statistics so browsing does not wait for every data source. Prices refresh
every 30 seconds while the tab is visible; polling pauses in hidden tabs.
A recent listing and its other statistics are reused for ten minutes; an older
cached listing can appear while a replacement loads. Overview cards and
historical charts load independently from the market list.
Open Filters to narrow the list by asset class (Stocks, Crypto, Indices,
Commodities, FX) and other criteria. Selected filters stay in the page URL so
a refined view can be shared or refreshed.
Open a market to see current trading data. Orders use current execution checks,
not the cached prices on the Markets page.
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
− - Tap the mark price to open Market Details. It shows mark price, 24h
− change, open interest, and 24h volume, and opens Trading Data,
− Market Info, and Market Depth. While one of those views is open, the
− tabs above it take you back to Chart.
+ - Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
+ Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
+ Venue picker at the top switches between them. Below it are mark price,
+ 24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
+ as its trading hours. It also opens Trading Data, Market Info, and
+ Market Depth. While one of those views is open, the tabs above it take
+ you back to Chart.
- The chart's drawing tools start collapsed. Tap the arrow at the chart's left
edge to show them.
- Tap Focus Chart (the full-screen icon in the header) to give the chart
the whole screen. The header and bottom tabs hide, leaving one bar under the
chart with your open position for the market, Buy / Long, **Sell /
Short, and Exit Focus**, which restores the full layout. Focus applies
only to the price chart and is remembered on that device.
Net PnL percentage
Position Net PnL % on the trading terminal, dashboard, and position PnL cards
is calculated as Net PnL ÷ position margin × 100 for every market,
including forex. For example, a \$25 net profit on \$250 of margin is a 10%
return.
For example, selling 0.5 BTC while you hold a 0.5 BTC long closes the long:
it does not leave you holding a 0.5 BTC long and a 0.5 BTC short. Selling
0.8 BTC instead closes the long and opens a 0.3 BTC short.
Hedge mode is not supported. You cannot hold a long and a short on the same
market in the same account at the same time.
When a position closes or flips, its Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are
canceled automatically, because the position they protected no longer
exists. Set new exits for a flipped position if you want them. When a
position is only reduced, any exit larger than the remaining size is reduced
to fit it.
Use Reduce Only (described below) when an order should only shrink or
close your position and never flip it.
+ Reverse a position
+ Reverse Position closes your position and opens the same size on the other
+ side. Holding a 1 BTC long and reversing leaves you with a 1 BTC short. On the
+ chart it is the up and down arrow on the position's line. In the Positions tab
+ it is the Reverse button in each row, and on a phone it is the **Reverse
+ Position** button on each position card.
+ A reversal is one market order for twice your position size, so both sides
+ happen in a single fill:
+ - All or nothing. If the new position would break a challenge rule, exceed
+ your margin or exposure limits, or exceed your
+ Max Market Slippage, the
+ order is rejected and your original position stays open unchanged. You are
+ never left flat by a reversal that only half worked.
+ - Same settings. The new position uses the leverage and margin mode of the
+ position you reversed.
+ - Fees and slippage. The trading fee applies to the full reversed size,
+ the same as closing and then opening separately. Market slippage is
+ estimated for the full order size.
+ - Exits. The position's Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are canceled, as
+ with any flip. Set new exits for the reversed position if you want them.
+ - Current position only. If the position changes before the order fills
+ (for example, a Take Profit partly closes it, you add to it, or you change
+ its leverage), the reversal is rejected instead of reversing something other
+ than what you saw. Try again with the updated position.
+ - Copy trading followers. Reversing a lead account reverses its followers.
+ If a follower's position changes before filling, its copy is resized to reach
+ the intended position on the new side. The follower still needs enough
+ available collateral and must pass its own trading checks. See
+ Copy Trading.
+ If Confirm New Orders reviews market orders, Reverse Position opens a short
+ review first. Otherwise it is sent as soon as you click it.
+ To remove the button everywhere, turn off
+ Show Reverse Position in Trading
+ settings.
Choose an order type
Order | What it does | Main tradeoff
Market | Fills the full size using the execution model described below. | Adverse slippage is capped by the market's published tier.
Limit | Rests at your price and fills in full there once the market reaches it. A limit placed through the market fills right away as a market order. | Controls price but may remain unfilled if the market never reaches the limit.
Stop / Take Profit | Watches a trigger and submits the configured exit behavior when reached. | A trigger is not a guaranteed fill price; execution still uses current market conditions.
Scheduled or advanced order | Breaks or manages an instruction using the controls shown in the order ticket. | Each generated order still passes the ordinary account and execution checks.
Check the order ticket for the order types available on the selected market.
Select Reduce Only to cap an order at closing or shrinking an existing
position in the opposite direction. It is offered on every order type except
Take Market: a reduce-only take exit belongs on the position's Take Profit
instead. When an account restriction requires it, the option is locked on and
oversized requests are capped at the open position size.
wait longer between attempts. A brief touch still does not guarantee a fill.
Where faster confirmation is enabled, a fresh book showing the market
strictly beyond your resting limit can fill it immediately at the limit
price. If that book is too old, the order uses the usual confirmation checks.
Exact touches can start confirmation immediately after the order is
triggered, but still need a newer book that reaches the limit. If an
execution attempt is interrupted, the order can return to waiting and retry;
it does not fill using an old touch alone.
- A Limit take profit or stop loss follows the same rule after it triggers: it
rests at its price and fills in full at that price once the market reaches
it, so it can remain unfilled. If the market has already passed the limit
when it triggers, it fills right away as a market order instead.
+ Start a limit order from the chart
+ Hover the chart and a + button appears beside the price label on the price
+ scale. Click it to start a limit order at that price. A level above the current
+ price starts a sell limit and a level at or below it starts a buy limit. You
+ can switch the side in the order ticket.
+ The order ticket switches to Limit with the price filled in, and the chart
+ draws a dashed draft line at that level. The draft is not placed yet: drag the
+ line to adjust the price, set the size in the order ticket, then submit the
+ order there.
+ You can also right-click the chart and choose Buy Limit at or **Sell Limit
+ at** the price under the pointer.
How market orders fill
Market orders, including triggered stop and take-profit market exits, fill
their whole size at the best ask for buys or the best bid for sells, with
maximum adverse slippage capped against the current mark reference. Each
published tier is a worst-case bound, not a fixed fill offset. If the book
offers a price inside the cap, your order receives that price. A fill is never
better than the mark itself: buys fill at or above the mark and sells at or
below it, even when the book momentarily sits through the mark.
For buys, the fill is the lower of the best ask and mark × (1 + tier / 10,000),
and at least the mark. For sells, it is the higher of the best bid and
mark × (1 - tier / 10,000), and at most the mark. For example, with a mark of
\$100 and a 1 bps cap, a best ask of \$100.005 fills at \$100.005; a best ask of
at the trigger price: market movement and the spread can change the final loss.
Take Profit and Stop Loss instructions help define exits before an order is
submitted. You can show their estimated gain or loss in percent or USD, and
save a TP/SL preset that fills the same gain and loss on every market (see
Trading settings). Review
the trigger, direction, quantity, and whether the exit uses market or limit
behavior where the ticket offers that choice.
For a new order, you can enter either a trigger price or an estimated gain or
loss. The last field you edit controls the target. If you enter a USD amount or
percentage, the draft trigger price updates with the estimated entry price,
size, leverage, and fees until you submit. If you enter or drag the trigger
price, that price stays fixed and the gain or loss estimate updates instead.
− Once submitted, the order uses its saved trigger price. The selected amount is
+ If you switch between Long and Short, a fixed Take Profit or Stop Loss price
+ moves to the other side of the entry price at the same distance, so it still
+ protects the new direction. Once submitted, the order uses its saved trigger
+ price.
+ While you draft a limit order, the draft limit line on the chart shows TP
+ and SL handles. Drag a handle up or down to set that Take Profit or Stop
+ Loss price. The ticket turns on TP/SL and fills in the price, and the draft
+ line stays in sync with the ticket as you edit either one. Nothing is placed
+ until you submit the order. A handle is hidden once its level is set, and the
+ SL handle is hidden while a trailing stop is selected. The selected amount is
an estimate, not a guaranteed final profit or loss.
New Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other conditional orders use the market's
standard chart source:
Venue | Trigger source
Binance, Bybit, Hyperliquid (including forex) | Last traded price
For Last Price triggers, one actual trade touching your level is enough,
including a small trade. The platform does not wait for the candle to close
or for the mark price to reach the same level. Liquidation and account loss
monitoring use their separate price references.
Protective market Stop Loss and Take Profit orders can execute using the
first recorded best bid or ask at or after the touch when eligible quote evidence
is available and the order and position have not changed. That price stays fixed
- Reset to Default: restore the platform default arrangement and panel
sizes in one click.
Choose Edit Current Layout to enter edit mode. The edit toolbar takes the
place of the market stats bar while you edit, so the terminal stays where it
is. In edit mode, drag any panel by its handle onto a highlighted zone: an
existing column, or a strip at the edge where a new column will appear.
Hovering a zone outlines where the panel will land and names the zone. You
can also use the panel's Move To menu. Each panel header also has a hide
button. Panels glide into their new places, and rearranging never reloads the
main chart. The edit toolbar keeps the arrangement with Done, restores
the layout you selected before editing with Reset, or names the
arrangement with Save as Layout.
+ Multiple charts
+ On a desktop-width window, the chart layout buttons beside Terminal Layout
+ in the market stats bar, or the Chart Layout section of the **Terminal
+ Layout menu, split the chart area into One Chart, Two Charts** side by
+ side, or Four Charts in a grid. Every chart is a full
+ chart with your indicators, drawing tools, saved chart layouts, and position
+ and order lines for the market it shows.
+ - The first chart always shows the market in the address bar. Picking a
+ different market in its header opens that market's trade page.
+ - Each other chart has its own market picker in its header and keeps its own
+ timeframe, so you can watch different markets, or the same market on
+ different timeframes. Changing its market or timeframe does not retarget the
+ other charts. A chart the layout shows for the first time starts on the market in the address
+ bar, on the 1h, 4h, or daily timeframe.
+ - Saved chart customizations are shared across charts. Charts showing the same
+ market also share saved drawings. If you edit drawings in both, the latest
+ save is kept.
+ - Click a chart to trade its market. The active chart gets a highlighted
+ border, and the order ticket and order book switch to its market. When that
+ market differs from the address bar, both show a "Following chart" strip
+ with the market name, and the buy and sell buttons name the market, so you
+ can confirm it before you submit. Click the first chart, or open a different
+ market, to return the ticket to the market in the address bar.
+ - Starting a limit order from the chart's context menu works in the first
+ chart only.
+ Choose One Chart at any time to return to the single chart. The layout and
+ each chart's market and timeframe are remembered per browser. Charts you are
+ not showing are closed and do not load market data. Phone and narrow-window
+ layouts always show one chart.
Widgets
The Widgets row in the edit toolbar lists every panel that is not on
screen; scroll it sideways when it holds more widgets than fit. Drag a widget
chip onto a highlighted zone, or open its Place in menu and pick a zone,
and it joins the terminal there. Hiding a placed widget returns it to the
row. Widgets you can place:
- Market Chart: a compact chart with its own market picker and timeframe
chips, so you can watch one market while trading another. While it is
placed, the bottom-bar Chart button shows "Docked in the terminal"
instead of opening a floating window; the widget and the floating window
share the same market and timeframe. Click the docked chart to trade its
market: the order ticket and order book switch to it, both show a
Hiding the order ticket removes the order entry form until you show it again
from customize mode or apply another arrangement.
Automatic closure after an evaluation pass
When the server confirms that your evaluation equity reaches its profit
target and the other pass requirements are clear, the account automatically
passes and closes its open positions. Open profit and loss count toward
equity, so you do not need to close trades yourself to realize the target.
Closing fees or slippage can leave the final balance slightly below target
without changing the passed result. See
Evaluation Progress.
Understand rejections
An order can be rejected when it would violate account rules, collateral or
− position limits, current market availability, execution protection, a pending
− payout lock, or copy-follower restrictions. Read the message attached to the
+ position limits, current market availability or
+ trading hours, execution protection, a pending payout lock,
+ or copy-follower restrictions. Read the message attached to the
rejected order, confirm the active account, then change only the condition that
caused the rejection.
Do not repeatedly resubmit an unchanged order. If the reason remains unclear,
use Troubleshooting and FAQ.
Today's fill statistics
The dashboard counts fills on the day they settle, even if you placed the order
on an earlier day. Today's fees, realized PnL, traded volume, and fill win rate
use the same fills. The day runs from midnight to midnight in America/New_York,
including daylight saving changes. Unfilled orders and historical fills with no
recorded settlement time are excluded from these daily statistics.
Today's P\&L
Today's P\&L measures the change in equity since midnight in America/New_York.
It includes changes in unrealized profit or loss, trading fees, and swap fees,
− so it can differ from the profit on trades closed today.
+ so it can differ from the profit on trades closed today. The swap fee charged
+ at midnight belongs to the day that just ended, so it is not part of today's
+ P\&L.
If you closed all positions before today's reset and have had no activity
since, today's P\&L is \$0.00. Yesterday's gain or loss is already included in
your balance. A page left open checks the current day once per minute without
requiring a refresh. If you have open positions and today's starting equity
is not yet available, the daily P\&L value and its share action remain
unavailable until that value arrives.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Tradable AssetsAdded source documentation link; removed Mintlify platform attribution statement.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Tradable Assets
Every market you can currently open positions on, grouped by asset class, with the names and symbols shown on the trade page.
This page lists all 134 markets currently enabled for trading on MyFundedPerps. The Market column matches the market name on the trade page, and Symbol is the ticker you can search for.
List last changed: 2026-10-12.
This list is updated from the platform's market configuration after markets
are added or removed, so it can briefly trail the app. The [Markets
page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/markets) and the trade page always show
current availability. Markets that follow [trading
hours](/guides/trading-guide#trading-hours) stay listed while they are closed.
Maximum leverage and exposure caps for each market are listed on Market Exposure Caps. See Asset Exposure Limits for how those caps apply to your accounts.
Crypto
68 markets.
Market | Symbol
BRENTOIL-USD | BRENTOIL
BZ-USD | BZ
CL-USD | CL
COPPER-USD | COPPER
NATGAS-USD | NATGAS
PALLADIUM-USD | PALLADIUM
PLATINUM-USD | PLATINUM
SILVER-USD | SILVER
XAG-USD | XAG
XAU-USD | XAU
XPD-USD | XPD
XPT-USD | XPT
− This documentation is built and hosted on Mintlify, a developer documentation platform.
After
Tradable Assets
+ Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/tradable-assets
Every market you can currently open positions on, grouped by asset class, with the names and symbols shown on the trade page.
This page lists all 134 markets currently enabled for trading on MyFundedPerps. The Market column matches the market name on the trade page, and Symbol is the ticker you can search for.
List last changed: 2026-10-12.
This list is updated from the platform's market configuration after markets
are added or removed, so it can briefly trail the app. The [Markets
page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/markets) and the trade page always show
current availability. Markets that follow [trading
hours](/guides/trading-guide#trading-hours) stay listed while they are closed.
Maximum leverage and exposure caps for each market are listed on Market Exposure Caps. See Asset Exposure Limits for how those caps apply to your accounts.
Crypto
68 markets.
Market | Symbol
BRENTOIL-USD | BRENTOIL
BZ-USD | BZ
CL-USD | CL
COPPER-USD | COPPER
NATGAS-USD | NATGAS
PALLADIUM-USD | PALLADIUM
PLATINUM-USD | PLATINUM
SILVER-USD | SILVER
XAG-USD | XAG
XAU-USD | XAU
XPD-USD | XPD
XPT-USD | XPT
Tradable Assets
+ Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/tradable-assets
Every market you can currently open positions on, grouped by asset class, with the names and symbols shown on the trade page.
This page lists all 134 markets currently enabled for trading on MyFundedPerps. The Market column matches the market name on the trade page, and Symbol is the ticker you can search for.
List last changed: 2026-10-12.
This list is updated from the platform's market configuration after markets
are added or removed, so it can briefly trail the app. The [Markets
page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/markets) and the trade page always show
current availability. Markets that follow [trading
hours](/guides/trading-guide#trading-hours) stay listed while they are closed.
Maximum leverage and exposure caps for each market are listed on Market Exposure Caps. See Asset Exposure Limits for how those caps apply to your accounts.
Crypto
68 markets.
Market | Symbol
BRENTOIL-USD | BRENTOIL
BZ-USD | BZ
CL-USD | CL
COPPER-USD | COPPER
NATGAS-USD | NATGAS
PALLADIUM-USD | PALLADIUM
PLATINUM-USD | PLATINUM
SILVER-USD | SILVER
XAG-USD | XAG
XAU-USD | XAU
XPD-USD | XPD
XPT-USD | XPT
− This documentation is built and hosted on Mintlify, a developer documentation platform.
PremierMyFundedPerps · October competitionBonus reset eligibility changed from active to expired; task reset is now the only free reset available.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
You choose a path once. Your account starts with the Classic balance and caps, and trading before you choose keeps those terms and closes the choice. Close positions and cancel working orders before choosing. After the free reset, you can choose a path again.
Trading and ranking
There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, and your path's leverage and exposure caps apply.
The highest account equity wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. The return shown beside each trader is measured against their own path's starting balance, so a Whale account at \$151,500 shows +1%. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades. You appear on the leaderboard after your first fill.
Standings count genuine, independent trading only. Operating more than one account, copying or coordinating trades across accounts, or exploiting stale prices and platform errors leads to disqualification and can end platform access. The full prohibited-conduct list is in the Terms of Use. For what disqualification does to your competition account, see Disqualification.
Free reset
You get one free reset. It unlocks after you complete three tasks on the competition page:
1. Post about the competition on X using the prepared post.
2. Follow MyFundedPerps on YouTube and Instagram. Open each profile, follow it, then choose Confirm Follows. Confirmation becomes available 15 seconds after you start the task.
3. Repost the competition post on X.
To reset, close every open position and cancel working orders first. A reset returns your account to \$100,000 on the Classic path, and you can choose a path again before your next trade. Resets are available only while the competition is live, and the reset cannot be undone.
Bonus reset
− Until October 6, 2026 at 06:00 UTC, every entrant gets one extra free reset with no tasks required. It is used before your task reset, so you can still unlock and use the task reset afterward, starting 24 hours after your bonus reset. The bonus reset is available even if you reset recently, and it still requires closed positions and canceled orders.
After
You choose a path once. Your account starts with the Classic balance and caps, and trading before you choose keeps those terms and closes the choice. Close positions and cancel working orders before choosing. After the free reset, you can choose a path again.
Trading and ranking
There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, and your path's leverage and exposure caps apply.
The highest account equity wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. The return shown beside each trader is measured against their own path's starting balance, so a Whale account at \$151,500 shows +1%. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades. You appear on the leaderboard after your first fill.
Standings count genuine, independent trading only. Operating more than one account, copying or coordinating trades across accounts, or exploiting stale prices and platform errors leads to disqualification and can end platform access. The full prohibited-conduct list is in the Terms of Use. For what disqualification does to your competition account, see Disqualification.
Free reset
You get one free reset. It unlocks after you complete three tasks on the competition page:
1. Post about the competition on X using the prepared post.
2. Follow MyFundedPerps on YouTube and Instagram. Open each profile, follow it, then choose Confirm Follows. Confirmation becomes available 15 seconds after you start the task.
3. Repost the competition post on X.
To reset, close every open position and cancel working orders first. A reset returns your account to \$100,000 on the Classic path, and you can choose a path again before your next trade. Resets are available only while the competition is live, and the reset cannot be undone.
Bonus reset
+ Until October 6, 2026 at 06:00 UTC, every entrant could take one extra free reset with no tasks required. That window has closed, so the task reset is now the only free reset. If you used the bonus reset, you can still unlock and use the task reset, starting 24 hours after your bonus reset.
You choose a path once. Your account starts with the Classic balance and caps, and trading before you choose keeps those terms and closes the choice. Close positions and cancel working orders before choosing. After the free reset, you can choose a path again.
Trading and ranking
There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, and your path's leverage and exposure caps apply.
The highest account equity wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. The return shown beside each trader is measured against their own path's starting balance, so a Whale account at \$151,500 shows +1%. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades. You appear on the leaderboard after your first fill.
Standings count genuine, independent trading only. Operating more than one account, copying or coordinating trades across accounts, or exploiting stale prices and platform errors leads to disqualification and can end platform access. The full prohibited-conduct list is in the Terms of Use. For what disqualification does to your competition account, see Disqualification.
Free reset
You get one free reset. It unlocks after you complete three tasks on the competition page:
1. Post about the competition on X using the prepared post.
2. Follow MyFundedPerps on YouTube and Instagram. Open each profile, follow it, then choose Confirm Follows. Confirmation becomes available 15 seconds after you start the task.
3. Repost the competition post on X.
To reset, close every open position and cancel working orders first. A reset returns your account to \$100,000 on the Classic path, and you can choose a path again before your next trade. Resets are available only while the competition is live, and the reset cannot be undone.
Bonus reset
− Until October 6, 2026 at 06:00 UTC, every entrant gets one extra free reset with no tasks required. It is used before your task reset, so you can still unlock and use the task reset afterward, starting 24 hours after your bonus reset. The bonus reset is available even if you reset recently, and it still requires closed positions and canceled orders.
+ Until October 6, 2026 at 06:00 UTC, every entrant could take one extra free reset with no tasks required. That window has closed, so the task reset is now the only free reset. If you used the bonus reset, you can still unlock and use the task reset, starting 24 hours after your bonus reset.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Launch competitionLaunch competition ended; description changed to past tense and competition moved to finished section with prize redemption details added.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Launch competition
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/launch-competition
Entry, trading rules, prizes, daily case drops, resets, and leaderboard sharing for the MyFundedPerps Launch Competition.
Schedule and entry
− The MyFundedPerps Launch Competition runs from September 15, 2026 at 10:00 AM to September 28, 2026 at 12:00 PM, New York time (EDT, UTC−4).
− Competitions shows the launch competition at the top while it runs, with the countdown, the top of the leaderboard, and the next daily case draw. Once you have joined, it also shows your rank and equity, and Trade Now opens your competition account. Select the competition's name or View Leaderboard to open its full page; Competitions at the top of that page returns you to the list.
− Every platform user who registered before the start is automatically entered, regardless of account status. A dismissible notice appears when your competition account is ready. Users who register after the start can join manually from the competition's page before it closes.
− On the competition's page, choose Trade Competition above the countdown to open your competition account. Your Competition Account brings together your standings and reset availability. The leaderboard follows your account panel, with Share Leaderboard Card in its header. On mobile, each trader's row includes their equity, profit and loss, balance, and prize. Prize Structure below the leaderboard shows the full prize breakdown by default; select its heading to collapse or expand it. Trading rules, fair-play standards, and daily case rewards appear in Competition Details.
Trading and ranking
Each participant receives a separate \$100,000 competition account. There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, leverage caps, and exposure caps still apply.
The highest account equity at close wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. If both are equal, a stable participant identifier determines the order. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades; an account without closed trades has a zero win rate.
Leaderboard positions refresh approximately every 15 minutes, and every three minutes during the final hour of the competition. Final results use closing equity, so prizes become available after closing scores have finished settling.
Standings count genuine, independent trading only. Operating more than one account, copying or coordinating trades across accounts, or exploiting stale prices and platform errors leads to disqualification and can end platform access. The full prohibited-conduct list is in the Terms of Use. For what disqualification does to your competition account, see Disqualification.
Account resets
You can reset your competition account three times in total, with at least 24 hours between resets. Close every open position and cancel working orders and TWAPs before resetting.
A reset restores equity to \$100,000. Trade statistics, leaderboard history, and case-drop eligibility and history are preserved. Resets are available only while the competition is live.
Top 100 prizes
After results are finalized, launch competition trading accounts are archived and removed from your dashboard. Any remaining positions are closed and pending orders are canceled. Final standings, prize redemption codes, and reward cases remain available. Accounts received as prizes are separate from competition trading accounts and remain available.
Each winning rank receives both prizes below. All MyFundedFutures accounts are Rapid accounts.
Rank | MyFundedPerps | MyFundedFutures Rapid | Combined account size
After
Launch competition
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/launch-competition
Entry, trading rules, prizes, daily case drops, resets, and leaderboard sharing for the MyFundedPerps Launch Competition.
Schedule and entry
+ The launch competition has ended. This page describes how it ran, for
+ reference.
+ The MyFundedPerps Launch Competition ran from September 15, 2026 at 10:00 AM to September 28, 2026 at 12:00 PM, New York time (EDT, UTC−4).
+ Every platform user who registered before the start was automatically entered, regardless of account status. Users who registered after the start could join manually from the competition's page before it closed.
+ The competition now appears with finished competitions on Competitions. Its full page keeps the final standings, and winners find their prize redemption codes there (see Top 100 prizes).
Trading and ranking
Each participant receives a separate \$100,000 competition account. There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, leverage caps, and exposure caps still apply.
The highest account equity at close wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. If both are equal, a stable participant identifier determines the order. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades; an account without closed trades has a zero win rate.
Leaderboard positions refresh approximately every 15 minutes, and every three minutes during the final hour of the competition. Final results use closing equity, so prizes become available after closing scores have finished settling.
Standings count genuine, independent trading only. Operating more than one account, copying or coordinating trades across accounts, or exploiting stale prices and platform errors leads to disqualification and can end platform access. The full prohibited-conduct list is in the Terms of Use. For what disqualification does to your competition account, see Disqualification.
Account resets
You can reset your competition account three times in total, with at least 24 hours between resets. Close every open position and cancel working orders and TWAPs before resetting.
A reset restores equity to \$100,000. Trade statistics, leaderboard history, and case-drop eligibility and history are preserved. Resets are available only while the competition is live.
Top 100 prizes
After results are finalized, launch competition trading accounts are archived and removed from your dashboard. Any remaining positions are closed and pending orders are canceled. Final standings, prize redemption codes, and reward cases remain available. Accounts received as prizes are separate from competition trading accounts and remain available.
Each winning rank receives both prizes below. All MyFundedFutures accounts are Rapid accounts.
Rank | MyFundedPerps | MyFundedFutures Rapid | Combined account size
Launch competition
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/launch-competition
Entry, trading rules, prizes, daily case drops, resets, and leaderboard sharing for the MyFundedPerps Launch Competition.
Schedule and entry
− The MyFundedPerps Launch Competition runs from September 15, 2026 at 10:00 AM to September 28, 2026 at 12:00 PM, New York time (EDT, UTC−4).
− Competitions shows the launch competition at the top while it runs, with the countdown, the top of the leaderboard, and the next daily case draw. Once you have joined, it also shows your rank and equity, and Trade Now opens your competition account. Select the competition's name or View Leaderboard to open its full page; Competitions at the top of that page returns you to the list.
− Every platform user who registered before the start is automatically entered, regardless of account status. A dismissible notice appears when your competition account is ready. Users who register after the start can join manually from the competition's page before it closes.
− On the competition's page, choose Trade Competition above the countdown to open your competition account. Your Competition Account brings together your standings and reset availability. The leaderboard follows your account panel, with Share Leaderboard Card in its header. On mobile, each trader's row includes their equity, profit and loss, balance, and prize. Prize Structure below the leaderboard shows the full prize breakdown by default; select its heading to collapse or expand it. Trading rules, fair-play standards, and daily case rewards appear in Competition Details.
+ The launch competition has ended. This page describes how it ran, for
+ reference.
+ The MyFundedPerps Launch Competition ran from September 15, 2026 at 10:00 AM to September 28, 2026 at 12:00 PM, New York time (EDT, UTC−4).
+ Every platform user who registered before the start was automatically entered, regardless of account status. Users who registered after the start could join manually from the competition's page before it closed.
+ The competition now appears with finished competitions on Competitions. Its full page keeps the final standings, and winners find their prize redemption codes there (see Top 100 prizes).
Trading and ranking
Each participant receives a separate \$100,000 competition account. There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, leverage caps, and exposure caps still apply.
The highest account equity at close wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. If both are equal, a stable participant identifier determines the order. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades; an account without closed trades has a zero win rate.
Leaderboard positions refresh approximately every 15 minutes, and every three minutes during the final hour of the competition. Final results use closing equity, so prizes become available after closing scores have finished settling.
Standings count genuine, independent trading only. Operating more than one account, copying or coordinating trades across accounts, or exploiting stale prices and platform errors leads to disqualification and can end platform access. The full prohibited-conduct list is in the Terms of Use. For what disqualification does to your competition account, see Disqualification.
Account resets
You can reset your competition account three times in total, with at least 24 hours between resets. Close every open position and cancel working orders and TWAPs before resetting.
A reset restores equity to \$100,000. Trade statistics, leaderboard history, and case-drop eligibility and history are preserved. Resets are available only while the competition is live.
Top 100 prizes
After results are finalized, launch competition trading accounts are archived and removed from your dashboard. Any remaining positions are closed and pending orders are canceled. Final standings, prize redemption codes, and reward cases remain available. Accounts received as prizes are separate from competition trading accounts and remain available.
Each winning rank receives both prizes below. All MyFundedFutures accounts are Rapid accounts.
Rank | MyFundedPerps | MyFundedFutures Rapid | Combined account size
PremierMyFundedPerps · Getting StartedSign In and Sign Up locations changed from phone menu to always-visible header across all screen sizes.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
The platform is operated by Funding Perpetuals Holdings, Inc., d/b/a
MyFundedPerpetuals.
1. Open MyFundedPerps
Open MyFundedPerps. You can choose a challenge
before signing in. Your profile, challenge accounts, settings, purchase history,
and trading activity belong to the account you verify at checkout.
If the launch page appears, the countdown shows the time remaining until
opening. Keep the page open to enter automatically when launch begins. If launch is
paused or delayed, this page receives the updated schedule and access stays
closed. A countdown reaching zero does not override a launch pause. If you have
an early-access password, select Enter Password. To receive launch updates,
enter your email address and select Notify Me.
− After entering the site, select Open Menu on a phone to find Sign In.
− Sign Up and the language picker remain in the header.
2. Choose a challenge
Open the challenge selector and compare
the available formats. Before checkout, review:
- account size and starting balance;
- evaluation step count and profit target for each step;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
- drawdown type, such as static or trailing end-of-day;
- consistency, qualifying-day, and payout requirements;
- purchased profit split, price, discount, and total.
These values can differ by plan. The terms shown for the selected challenge are
the authoritative terms for that purchase.
Select Start Challenge to open checkout with your selected plan. If you are
After
The platform is operated by Funding Perpetuals Holdings, Inc., d/b/a
MyFundedPerpetuals.
1. Open MyFundedPerps
Open MyFundedPerps. You can choose a challenge
before signing in. Your profile, challenge accounts, settings, purchase history,
and trading activity belong to the account you verify at checkout.
If the launch page appears, the countdown shows the time remaining until
opening. Keep the page open to enter automatically when launch begins. If launch is
paused or delayed, this page receives the updated schedule and access stays
closed. A countdown reaching zero does not override a launch pause. If you have
an early-access password, select Enter Password. To receive launch updates,
enter your email address and select Notify Me.
+ After entering the site, Sign In, Sign Up, and the language picker are
+ in the header on every screen size, including phones.
2. Choose a challenge
Open the challenge selector and compare
the available formats. Before checkout, review:
- account size and starting balance;
- evaluation step count and profit target for each step;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
- drawdown type, such as static or trailing end-of-day;
- consistency, qualifying-day, and payout requirements;
- purchased profit split, price, discount, and total.
These values can differ by plan. The terms shown for the selected challenge are
the authoritative terms for that purchase.
Select Start Challenge to open checkout with your selected plan. If you are
The platform is operated by Funding Perpetuals Holdings, Inc., d/b/a
MyFundedPerpetuals.
1. Open MyFundedPerps
Open MyFundedPerps. You can choose a challenge
before signing in. Your profile, challenge accounts, settings, purchase history,
and trading activity belong to the account you verify at checkout.
If the launch page appears, the countdown shows the time remaining until
opening. Keep the page open to enter automatically when launch begins. If launch is
paused or delayed, this page receives the updated schedule and access stays
closed. A countdown reaching zero does not override a launch pause. If you have
an early-access password, select Enter Password. To receive launch updates,
enter your email address and select Notify Me.
− After entering the site, select Open Menu on a phone to find Sign In.
− Sign Up and the language picker remain in the header.
+ After entering the site, Sign In, Sign Up, and the language picker are
+ in the header on every screen size, including phones.
2. Choose a challenge
Open the challenge selector and compare
the available formats. Before checkout, review:
- account size and starting balance;
- evaluation step count and profit target for each step;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
- drawdown type, such as static or trailing end-of-day;
- consistency, qualifying-day, and payout requirements;
- purchased profit split, price, discount, and total.
These values can differ by plan. The terms shown for the selected challenge are
the authoritative terms for that purchase.
Select Start Challenge to open checkout with your selected plan. If you are
PremierMyFundedPerps · Elite AccountsUS30 added to Elite plan's boosted leverage markets; tab naming and purchase limit rules changed; exposure cap table and notes updated.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
− rule, and boosted leverage on indices, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
− Elite Perps tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000
One-time price, 3% DLL | \$49 | \$95 | \$249 | \$495
One-time price, No DLL | \$89 | \$175 | \$449 | \$889
With 90/10 upgrade, 3% DLL | \$59 | \$114 | \$299 | \$594
With 90/10 upgrade, No DLL | \$107 | \$210 | \$539 | \$1,067
Funded accounts at the funded cap | 20 | 10 | 4 | 2
These are list prices. Checkout shows the current price and any discount before
you pay. The 90/10 upgrade is optional and chosen at checkout; its rows show the
total price with the upgrade. The funded count row assumes every account is the
same size; see Funded allocation for mixed sizes.
There is no limit on the total Elite account size you can buy. You can buy any
− number and mix of Elite sizes and options, within the per-order and rolling
− purchase limits
− that apply to every plan. Only funded Elite accounts are capped; see
Funded allocation.
DLL options
Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at checkout. The two options
are identical except for the daily loss limit:
Option | Daily loss limit | Everything else
3% DLL | 3% of starting balance, measured from the day's starting equity | Same Elite rules on this page
No DLL | None | Same Elite rules on this page
A 3% DLL account follows the same 3% rule as Select, Prime, and Signature:
- The floor is the day's starting equity, including open-position profit or
loss, minus 3% of the starting balance. On an Elite \$50K account the
allowance is \$1,500.
- Equity that reaches the floor breaches the account, fails it, and closes its
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
− Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, gold, and oil. Each cap is a
− multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure
NAS100, SP500 | 40x | \$200,000 | \$400,000 | \$1,000,000 | \$2,000,000
Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000
Oil (CL, BRENTOIL) | 10x | \$50,000 | \$100,000 | \$250,000 | \$500,000
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
− short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, and CL and BRENTOIL share the
− oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD market count toward the
− gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
starting balance.
- Every other market keeps its normal maximum leverage, shown on the
Market Exposure Caps page.
- Market exposure caps still apply on top of
the Elite caps. Each Elite account has its own market exposure cap: your
other Elite accounts of the same size do not share or use up its capacity.
The order ticket shows the limit for the selected market as **Account
Exposure Cap**, and the leverage selector goes up to the Elite maximum for that
market. An order that would exceed the leverage or an exposure cap is
rejected. Reducing or closing a position is always allowed.
Fees
Elite accounts pay reduced fees on four markets, in both the evaluation and
Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Elite commission per fill | Elite daily swap rate | Standard commission | Standard daily swap rate
NAS100, SP500 | 0.001% | 0.01% | 0.005% | 0.015%
Gold, WTI Oil | 0.001% | 0.015% | 0.005% | 0.015%
- On a \$10,000 fill in NAS100, SP500, Gold, or WTI Oil, the Elite commission
is \$0.10 instead of \$0.50.
- A NAS100 or SP500 position worth \$10,000 pays \$1.00 in swap fees over 24
hourly charges, instead of \$1.50.
- Every other market, including other indices, other commodities such as
silver and Brent, crypto, forex, and stocks, uses the standard rates.
Read Commissions and Fees for how commissions
and hourly swap fees are calculated.
Accounts per order
One order can include up to 10 accounts at \$5K or \$10K, up to 4 at \$25K, or
− up to 2 at \$50K, all of the same size and option. The general
− purchase limits
− also apply.
Sim Funded
Passing the evaluation leads to a Sim Funded Elite account. It keeps the same
rules as the evaluation, without the profit target:
- the same starting balance;
- the same 5% static MLL and loss threshold, which does not move after a
withdrawal;
- the same leverage and exposure caps;
- the same daily loss limit option: a 3% daily loss limit on a 3% DLL
account, or none on a No DLL account;
- no consistency rule.
Sim Funded accounts use simulated capital and simulated execution, like every
funded account.
After
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
+ rule, and boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
+ Elite tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000
One-time price, 3% DLL | \$49 | \$95 | \$249 | \$495
One-time price, No DLL | \$89 | \$175 | \$449 | \$889
With 90/10 upgrade, 3% DLL | \$59 | \$114 | \$299 | \$594
With 90/10 upgrade, No DLL | \$107 | \$210 | \$539 | \$1,067
Funded accounts at the funded cap | 20 | 10 | 4 | 2
These are list prices. Checkout shows the current price and any discount before
you pay. The 90/10 upgrade is optional and chosen at checkout; its rows show the
total price with the upgrade. The funded count row assumes every account is the
same size; see Funded allocation for mixed sizes.
There is no limit on the total Elite account size you can buy. You can buy any
+ number and mix of Elite sizes and options, within the
+ per-order account limits. Only funded Elite accounts are
+ capped; see
Funded allocation.
DLL options
Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at checkout. The two options
are identical except for the daily loss limit:
Option | Daily loss limit | Everything else
3% DLL | 3% of starting balance, measured from the day's starting equity | Same Elite rules on this page
No DLL | None | Same Elite rules on this page
A 3% DLL account follows the same 3% rule as Select, Prime, and Signature:
- The floor is the day's starting equity, including open-position profit or
loss, minus 3% of the starting balance. On an Elite \$50K account the
allowance is \$1,500.
- Equity that reaches the floor breaches the account, fails it, and closes its
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
+ Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
+ is a multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure
NAS100, SP500 | 40x | \$200,000 | \$400,000 | \$1,000,000 | \$2,000,000
+ US30 | 25x | \$125,000 | \$250,000 | \$625,000 | \$1,250,000
Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000
Oil (CL, BRENTOIL) | 10x | \$50,000 | \$100,000 | \$250,000 | \$500,000
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
+ short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, US30 has its own cap, and CL
+ and BRENTOIL share the oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD
+ market count toward the gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
starting balance.
- Every other market keeps its normal maximum leverage, shown on the
Market Exposure Caps page.
+ Choose Elite and your account size there to see the current group caps,
+ account exposure limit, and market caps for that size.
- Market exposure caps still apply on top of
the Elite caps. Each Elite account has its own market exposure cap: your
other Elite accounts of the same size do not share or use up its capacity.
The order ticket shows the limit for the selected market as **Account
Exposure Cap**, and the leverage selector goes up to the Elite maximum for that
market. An order that would exceed the leverage or an exposure cap is
rejected. Reducing or closing a position is always allowed.
Fees
Elite accounts pay reduced fees on four markets, in both the evaluation and
Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Elite commission per fill | Elite daily swap rate | Standard commission | Standard daily swap rate
NAS100, SP500 | 0.001% | 0.01% | 0.005% | 0.015%
Gold, WTI Oil | 0.001% | 0.015% | 0.005% | 0.015%
- On a \$10,000 fill in NAS100, SP500, Gold, or WTI Oil, the Elite commission
is \$0.10 instead of \$0.50.
- A NAS100 or SP500 position worth \$10,000 pays \$1.00 in swap fees over 24
hourly charges, instead of \$1.50.
- Every other market, including other indices, other commodities such as
silver and Brent, crypto, forex, and stocks, uses the standard rates.
Read Commissions and Fees for how commissions
and hourly swap fees are calculated.
Accounts per order
One order can include up to 10 accounts at \$5K or \$10K, up to 4 at \$25K, or
+ up to 2 at \$50K, all of the same size and option. You can place as many
+ orders as you like.
Sim Funded
Passing the evaluation leads to a Sim Funded Elite account. It keeps the same
rules as the evaluation, without the profit target:
- the same starting balance;
- the same 5% static MLL and loss threshold, which does not move after a
withdrawal;
- the same leverage and exposure caps;
- the same daily loss limit option: a 3% daily loss limit on a 3% DLL
account, or none on a No DLL account;
- no consistency rule.
Sim Funded accounts use simulated capital and simulated execution, like every
funded account.
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
− rule, and boosted leverage on indices, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
+ rule, and boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
− Elite Perps tab to buy.
+ Elite tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000
One-time price, 3% DLL | \$49 | \$95 | \$249 | \$495
One-time price, No DLL | \$89 | \$175 | \$449 | \$889
With 90/10 upgrade, 3% DLL | \$59 | \$114 | \$299 | \$594
With 90/10 upgrade, No DLL | \$107 | \$210 | \$539 | \$1,067
Funded accounts at the funded cap | 20 | 10 | 4 | 2
These are list prices. Checkout shows the current price and any discount before
you pay. The 90/10 upgrade is optional and chosen at checkout; its rows show the
total price with the upgrade. The funded count row assumes every account is the
same size; see Funded allocation for mixed sizes.
There is no limit on the total Elite account size you can buy. You can buy any
− number and mix of Elite sizes and options, within the per-order and rolling
− purchase limits
− that apply to every plan. Only funded Elite accounts are capped; see
+ number and mix of Elite sizes and options, within the
+ per-order account limits. Only funded Elite accounts are
+ capped; see
Funded allocation.
DLL options
Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at checkout. The two options
are identical except for the daily loss limit:
Option | Daily loss limit | Everything else
3% DLL | 3% of starting balance, measured from the day's starting equity | Same Elite rules on this page
No DLL | None | Same Elite rules on this page
A 3% DLL account follows the same 3% rule as Select, Prime, and Signature:
- The floor is the day's starting equity, including open-position profit or
loss, minus 3% of the starting balance. On an Elite \$50K account the
allowance is \$1,500.
- Equity that reaches the floor breaches the account, fails it, and closes its
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
− Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, gold, and oil. Each cap is a
− multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
+ Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
+ is a multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure
NAS100, SP500 | 40x | \$200,000 | \$400,000 | \$1,000,000 | \$2,000,000
+ US30 | 25x | \$125,000 | \$250,000 | \$625,000 | \$1,250,000
Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000
Oil (CL, BRENTOIL) | 10x | \$50,000 | \$100,000 | \$250,000 | \$500,000
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
− short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, and CL and BRENTOIL share the
− oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD market count toward the
− gold cap together with XAU.
+ short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, US30 has its own cap, and CL
+ and BRENTOIL share the oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD
+ market count toward the gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
starting balance.
- Every other market keeps its normal maximum leverage, shown on the
Market Exposure Caps page.
+ Choose Elite and your account size there to see the current group caps,
+ account exposure limit, and market caps for that size.
- Market exposure caps still apply on top of
the Elite caps. Each Elite account has its own market exposure cap: your
other Elite accounts of the same size do not share or use up its capacity.
The order ticket shows the limit for the selected market as **Account
Exposure Cap**, and the leverage selector goes up to the Elite maximum for that
market. An order that would exceed the leverage or an exposure cap is
rejected. Reducing or closing a position is always allowed.
Fees
Elite accounts pay reduced fees on four markets, in both the evaluation and
Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Elite commission per fill | Elite daily swap rate | Standard commission | Standard daily swap rate
NAS100, SP500 | 0.001% | 0.01% | 0.005% | 0.015%
Gold, WTI Oil | 0.001% | 0.015% | 0.005% | 0.015%
- On a \$10,000 fill in NAS100, SP500, Gold, or WTI Oil, the Elite commission
is \$0.10 instead of \$0.50.
- A NAS100 or SP500 position worth \$10,000 pays \$1.00 in swap fees over 24
hourly charges, instead of \$1.50.
- Every other market, including other indices, other commodities such as
silver and Brent, crypto, forex, and stocks, uses the standard rates.
Read Commissions and Fees for how commissions
and hourly swap fees are calculated.
Accounts per order
One order can include up to 10 accounts at \$5K or \$10K, up to 4 at \$25K, or
− up to 2 at \$50K, all of the same size and option. The general
− purchase limits
− also apply.
+ up to 2 at \$50K, all of the same size and option. You can place as many
+ orders as you like.
Sim Funded
Passing the evaluation leads to a Sim Funded Elite account. It keeps the same
rules as the evaluation, without the profit target:
- the same starting balance;
- the same 5% static MLL and loss threshold, which does not move after a
withdrawal;
- the same leverage and exposure caps;
- the same daily loss limit option: a 3% daily loss limit on a 3% DLL
account, or none on a No DLL account;
- no consistency rule.
Sim Funded accounts use simulated capital and simulated execution, like every
funded account.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Copy Trading GuideArticle adds detailed rules for how copied orders execute, including leverage application, position reversals, margin adjustments, resizing logic, and cancellation scenarios.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Copy Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/copy-trading-guide
Create a same-owner copy-trading group, choose a lead and followers, set risk multipliers, and understand independent follower checks.
Native copy trading coordinates orders across active challenge accounts owned
by the same MyFundedPerps user. Each group has one lead account and one or
more followers.
Before you start
Every account in the group must be active, unarchived, and yours. An account can
belong to only one enabled group. Evaluation accounts can follow either stage,
but a funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
Follower accounts are locked against manual trading while their group is
enabled. Manage the strategy from the lead account or disable the group and
− let cleanup finish before trading a follower manually.
Create a group
Go to [Settings → Copy
Trading](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=copy-trading).
Select the account whose eligible orders should be copied.
Choose active accounts that are not already part of another enabled group.
Choose how much of the lead's balance-adjusted quantity each follower should
use.
Confirm the group composition and save it before placing lead orders.
How follower size is calculated
Opening and increasing quantities are normalized by the lead and follower
starting balances, then adjusted by the follower multiplier. 1× follows the
lead's relative size; lower values reduce it and higher values increase it. The
available range is 0.1× through 2×.
Reductions preserve the fraction of the lead position being reduced. The
platform rounds copied quantity down to the market's size step rather than
rounding a follower into more risk.
Trigger policy across updates
A copied order keeps the originating order's trigger policy, including when a
copy or an attached TP/SL is created after a platform update. Existing orders
keep their policy when you edit their price or size. A canceled order's new
replacement uses the current policy. See
Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Market order execution
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Independent follower checks
Every follower order is validated against that follower's own:
- available collateral and current positions;
- challenge and funded-account rules;
- market and position limits;
- allowed stage pairing and current account status.
A follower can reject or reduce a copied instruction without blocking the lead
or other followers. Follower accounts can end with different fills, positions,
and performance from the lead.
− After you submit an opening order or close a position from the lead account,
the Copy Results panel briefly reports whether each follower copied the
instruction. A follower result does not change whether the lead instruction
succeeds.
Stop or change a group
Disable a group before changing its lead or deleting it. When a lead passes,
fails, or is closed, the group stops automatically: resting follower orders are
canceled, follower positions are closed under the platform's terminal-close
− policy, and manual trading unlocks only after cleanup completes.
Stopped history remains visible until you remove it. See the
Copy Trading settings reference for control-by-control
details.
Inspect follower access through the API
API integrations can call GET /v1/accounts/{account_id}/trading-policy with a
read or trade credential to inspect copy_follower_locked before sending a
manual instruction. A locked follower rejects manual entries, reductions,
closes, and protective-order changes.
− Follower orders that copy trading canceled (because the lead order changed or
− ended, the group was disabled or changed, or the copy could no longer be
− applied) report cancel_reason copy in API order responses. Orders the
follower canceled themselves report user.
The account's copy_stop record exposes stopped_at, completed_at,
acknowledged_at, and reason. It remains available after its group is deleted,
so a reconnecting client can still explain why copying stopped. Unset timestamps
are null; the record itself is null when the account has no stop notice. The API
does not expose a lead account ID outside the credential's account access.
The policy also reports copy_scope_blocked when an enabled group led by the
selected account contains a member the credential cannot access. Group coverage
requires the same live or sandbox environment and access to every configured
− member. Member IDs outside the credential boundary are not returned. Stale
working copies from older configurations are checked separately for each
modification or cancellation.
This is an advisory snapshot. The trading engine checks the current lock again
when an instruction is placed or settled. See Account trading policy
for the other restrictions and refresh guidance.
After
Copy Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/copy-trading-guide
Create a same-owner copy-trading group, choose a lead and followers, set risk multipliers, and understand independent follower checks.
Native copy trading coordinates orders across active challenge accounts owned
by the same MyFundedPerps user. Each group has one lead account and one or
more followers.
Before you start
Every account in the group must be active, unarchived, and yours. An account can
belong to only one enabled group. Evaluation accounts can follow either stage,
but a funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
Follower accounts are locked against manual trading while their group is
enabled. Manage the strategy from the lead account or disable the group and
+ let cleanup finish before trading a follower manually. When an account starts
+ following, its open orders, including stop loss and take profit orders, are
+ canceled, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. Its positions stay open.
Create a group
Go to [Settings → Copy
Trading](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=copy-trading).
Select the account whose eligible orders should be copied.
Choose active accounts that are not already part of another enabled group.
Choose how much of the lead's balance-adjusted quantity each follower should
use.
Confirm the group composition and save it before placing lead orders.
How follower size is calculated
Opening and increasing quantities are normalized by the lead and follower
starting balances, then adjusted by the follower multiplier. 1× follows the
lead's relative size; lower values reduce it and higher values increase it. The
available range is 0.1× through 2×.
Reductions preserve the fraction of the lead position being reduced. The
platform rounds copied quantity down to the market's size step rather than
rounding a follower into more risk.
+ A copied order uses the lead's leverage unless it is above the follower's own
+ maximum for that market. In that case, the copy uses the follower's maximum
+ instead. If the follower already holds the market, the copy keeps that
+ position's margin mode (cross or isolated).
+ Reversing a lead position reverses each follower too. The follower's whole
+ position on that side closes, and a new position opens on the other side at
+ the follower's normal copy size.
+ If the follower's position changes before its copy fills, for example because
+ one of its take profit orders filled first, the copy is resized so the follower
+ still ends on the new side at that same size. This also applies if the follower
+ was flat or already held the new side when the lead reversed. An existing
+ position on the new side keeps its size plus the copied opening size.
+ Isolated margin
+ When you add or remove margin on an isolated lead position, each follower's
+ isolated position in the same market and direction is adjusted too. The
+ amount is scaled to the follower's position size, so every account carries
+ the same margin per unit and the liquidation prices stay in line. A follower
+ adds only what its free balance allows and removes only what it can release
+ safely. Follower accounts cannot adjust margin on their own while they follow
+ a lead.
Trigger policy across updates
A copied order keeps the originating order's trigger policy, including when a
copy or an attached TP/SL is created after a platform update. Existing orders
keep their policy when you edit their price or size. A canceled order's new
replacement uses the current policy. See
Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Market order execution
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Independent follower checks
+ If a copied reversal is resized because the follower's position changed,
+ its collateral requirement is checked again before execution. It can be
+ rejected if the follower can no longer afford the intended position. A copy
+ can be resized up to three times. If the position changes again before filling,
+ the copy is rejected instead of continuing to retry.
Every follower order is validated against that follower's own:
- available collateral and current positions;
- challenge and funded-account rules;
- market and position limits;
- allowed stage pairing and current account status.
A follower can reject or reduce a copied instruction without blocking the lead
or other followers. Follower accounts can end with different fills, positions,
and performance from the lead.
+ After you submit an opening order, close, or reverse a position from the lead account,
the Copy Results panel briefly reports whether each follower copied the
instruction. A follower result does not change whether the lead instruction
succeeds.
Stop or change a group
Disable a group before changing its lead or deleting it. When a lead passes,
fails, or is closed, the group stops automatically: resting follower orders are
canceled, follower positions are closed under the platform's terminal-close
+ policy, and manual trading unlocks only after cleanup completes. A copied order
+ still executing when the group stops is rejected with reason
+ copy_lead_stopped.
Stopped history remains visible until you remove it. See the
Copy Trading settings reference for control-by-control
details.
Inspect follower access through the API
API integrations can call GET /v1/accounts/{account_id}/trading-policy with a
read or trade credential to inspect copy_follower_locked before sending a
manual instruction. A locked follower rejects manual entries, reductions,
closes, and protective-order changes.
+ Follower orders that copy trading canceled (because the account started
+ following a lead, the lead order changed or ended, the group was disabled or
+ changed, or the copy could no longer be applied) report cancel_reason copy
+ in API order responses. Orders the
follower canceled themselves report user.
The account's copy_stop record exposes stopped_at, completed_at,
acknowledged_at, and reason. It remains available after its group is deleted,
so a reconnecting client can still explain why copying stopped. Unset timestamps
are null; the record itself is null when the account has no stop notice. The API
does not expose a lead account ID outside the credential's account access.
The policy also reports copy_scope_blocked when an enabled group led by the
selected account contains a member the credential cannot access. Group coverage
requires the same live or sandbox environment and access to every configured
+ member. This coverage also applies when setting isolated margin on a lead
+ position, because that adjustment reaches its followers. Member IDs outside
+ the credential boundary are not returned. Stale
working copies from older configurations are checked separately for each
modification or cancellation.
This is an advisory snapshot. The trading engine checks the current lock again
when an instruction is placed or settled. See Account trading policy
for the other restrictions and refresh guidance.
Copy Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/copy-trading-guide
Create a same-owner copy-trading group, choose a lead and followers, set risk multipliers, and understand independent follower checks.
Native copy trading coordinates orders across active challenge accounts owned
by the same MyFundedPerps user. Each group has one lead account and one or
more followers.
Before you start
Every account in the group must be active, unarchived, and yours. An account can
belong to only one enabled group. Evaluation accounts can follow either stage,
but a funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
Follower accounts are locked against manual trading while their group is
enabled. Manage the strategy from the lead account or disable the group and
− let cleanup finish before trading a follower manually.
+ let cleanup finish before trading a follower manually. When an account starts
+ following, its open orders, including stop loss and take profit orders, are
+ canceled, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. Its positions stay open.
Create a group
Go to [Settings → Copy
Trading](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=copy-trading).
Select the account whose eligible orders should be copied.
Choose active accounts that are not already part of another enabled group.
Choose how much of the lead's balance-adjusted quantity each follower should
use.
Confirm the group composition and save it before placing lead orders.
How follower size is calculated
Opening and increasing quantities are normalized by the lead and follower
starting balances, then adjusted by the follower multiplier. 1× follows the
lead's relative size; lower values reduce it and higher values increase it. The
available range is 0.1× through 2×.
Reductions preserve the fraction of the lead position being reduced. The
platform rounds copied quantity down to the market's size step rather than
rounding a follower into more risk.
+ A copied order uses the lead's leverage unless it is above the follower's own
+ maximum for that market. In that case, the copy uses the follower's maximum
+ instead. If the follower already holds the market, the copy keeps that
+ position's margin mode (cross or isolated).
+ Reversing a lead position reverses each follower too. The follower's whole
+ position on that side closes, and a new position opens on the other side at
+ the follower's normal copy size.
+ If the follower's position changes before its copy fills, for example because
+ one of its take profit orders filled first, the copy is resized so the follower
+ still ends on the new side at that same size. This also applies if the follower
+ was flat or already held the new side when the lead reversed. An existing
+ position on the new side keeps its size plus the copied opening size.
+ Isolated margin
+ When you add or remove margin on an isolated lead position, each follower's
+ isolated position in the same market and direction is adjusted too. The
+ amount is scaled to the follower's position size, so every account carries
+ the same margin per unit and the liquidation prices stay in line. A follower
+ adds only what its free balance allows and removes only what it can release
+ safely. Follower accounts cannot adjust margin on their own while they follow
+ a lead.
Trigger policy across updates
A copied order keeps the originating order's trigger policy, including when a
copy or an attached TP/SL is created after a platform update. Existing orders
keep their policy when you edit their price or size. A canceled order's new
replacement uses the current policy. See
Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Market order execution
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Independent follower checks
+ If a copied reversal is resized because the follower's position changed,
+ its collateral requirement is checked again before execution. It can be
+ rejected if the follower can no longer afford the intended position. A copy
+ can be resized up to three times. If the position changes again before filling,
+ the copy is rejected instead of continuing to retry.
Every follower order is validated against that follower's own:
- available collateral and current positions;
- challenge and funded-account rules;
- market and position limits;
- allowed stage pairing and current account status.
A follower can reject or reduce a copied instruction without blocking the lead
or other followers. Follower accounts can end with different fills, positions,
and performance from the lead.
− After you submit an opening order or close a position from the lead account,
+ After you submit an opening order, close, or reverse a position from the lead account,
the Copy Results panel briefly reports whether each follower copied the
instruction. A follower result does not change whether the lead instruction
succeeds.
Stop or change a group
Disable a group before changing its lead or deleting it. When a lead passes,
fails, or is closed, the group stops automatically: resting follower orders are
canceled, follower positions are closed under the platform's terminal-close
− policy, and manual trading unlocks only after cleanup completes.
+ policy, and manual trading unlocks only after cleanup completes. A copied order
+ still executing when the group stops is rejected with reason
+ copy_lead_stopped.
Stopped history remains visible until you remove it. See the
Copy Trading settings reference for control-by-control
details.
Inspect follower access through the API
API integrations can call GET /v1/accounts/{account_id}/trading-policy with a
read or trade credential to inspect copy_follower_locked before sending a
manual instruction. A locked follower rejects manual entries, reductions,
closes, and protective-order changes.
− Follower orders that copy trading canceled (because the lead order changed or
− ended, the group was disabled or changed, or the copy could no longer be
− applied) report cancel_reason copy in API order responses. Orders the
+ Follower orders that copy trading canceled (because the account started
+ following a lead, the lead order changed or ended, the group was disabled or
+ changed, or the copy could no longer be applied) report cancel_reason copy
+ in API order responses. Orders the
follower canceled themselves report user.
The account's copy_stop record exposes stopped_at, completed_at,
acknowledged_at, and reason. It remains available after its group is deleted,
so a reconnecting client can still explain why copying stopped. Unset timestamps
are null; the record itself is null when the account has no stop notice. The API
does not expose a lead account ID outside the credential's account access.
The policy also reports copy_scope_blocked when an enabled group led by the
selected account contains a member the credential cannot access. Group coverage
requires the same live or sandbox environment and access to every configured
− member. Member IDs outside the credential boundary are not returned. Stale
+ member. This coverage also applies when setting isolated margin on a lead
+ position, because that adjustment reaches its followers. Member IDs outside
+ the credential boundary are not returned. Stale
working copies from older configurations are checked separately for each
modification or cancellation.
This is an advisory snapshot. The trading engine checks the current lock again
when an instruction is placed or settled. See Account trading policy
for the other restrictions and refresh guidance.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Challenges and RulesArticle adds information about market exposure caps, hourly swap fee timing, and stop loss order behavior for additional venues.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Challenges and Rules
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenges-and-rules
Understand evaluation stages, profit targets, loss and drawdown rules, account states, funded progression, and payout-specific requirements.
Every sold challenge is a 1-Step evaluation. Select, Prime, and Signature use
one profit target, a 3% daily loss limit, and static maximum drawdown. Elite
uses one profit target and static maximum drawdown, with a choice of a 3% daily
loss limit (3% DLL) or no daily loss limit (No DLL) when you buy, and has its
own leverage, exposure, allocation, and payout terms; see
− Elite Accounts. There is no minimum trading-day count
or evaluation time limit. All percentages use starting balance, never current
equity.
Evaluation rules
Plan | Profit target | Daily loss limit | Static maximum drawdown
1-Step Select | 9% | 3% | 3%
1-Step Prime | 12% | 3% | 5%
1-Step Signature | 10% | 3% | 6%
Elite, 3% DLL | 10% | 3% | 5%
Elite, No DLL | 10% | None | 5%
The profit target and loss rules use account equity, including
open-position profit or loss. On plans with a daily loss limit, daily loss is
measured from start-of-day equity at midnight America/New_York, including
entirely as store credit. See
Payouts for
their minimum request.
Daily loss reset time
On Select, Prime, Signature, and 3% DLL Elite accounts, the daily loss limit resets at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time
(America/New_York) every day. This is **04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight
Time (EDT) and 05:00 UTC during Eastern Standard Time (EST)**. The reset
follows New York's daylight saving changes, so it is not a fixed UTC time.
The new trading day's equity, including open-position profit or loss, becomes
the daily-loss reference. The dollar loss allowance remains a percentage of
starting balance. A daily reset does not reopen a failed account or reset the
maximum loss limit.
Static drawdown and the withdrawal lock
The initial MLL floor is starting balance minus the static drawdown allowance.
It does not follow intraday or end-of-day highs. On the first withdrawal from
a Select, Prime, or Signature funded account, the floor locks permanently to
starting balance. It never moves again, including after later withdrawals.
Before this lock, reaching a loss floor breaches the account. After the lock,
equity exactly at the MLL floor is allowed; falling below it breaches. The
daily-loss floor remains inclusive. The dashboard shows both loss floors.
A withdrawal never restores the original buffer.
Elite has no withdrawal lock. An Elite account's MLL floor stays at starting
balance minus 5% for the life of the account, including after withdrawals, and
reaching it breaches the account. See
Elite Accounts.
Loss-limit monitoring continues while the account is active, including after
trades settle or hourly swap fees are charged. A confirmed loss-limit breach
changes the account to Failed and stops further trading.
Through the API, a position closed by liquidation reports close_reason
liquidation, and a position closed because the account reached a final state
reports system. Resting exits canceled by a liquidation report
cancel_reason liquidation.
New Stop Loss orders follow the market's chart source: Last Price for Binance,
− Bybit and Hyperliquid. This does not change the price references used for
loss-limit or liquidation checks. Existing orders
keep their original trigger policy until canceled and replaced.
A detected Stop Loss crossing remains valid if the price moves back before
execution. The exit still needs a fresh execution price, so placing a stop does
not guarantee a fill before a loss-limit breach. See
Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Account states
Competition trading uses a separate market exposure allowance from your
purchased challenges. Matching competition accounts share a capped allowance
for each market, product, and size. Competition positions do not consume your
purchased-account allowance. See Asset Exposure Limits
for the calculation and rejection behavior.
After
Challenges and Rules
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenges-and-rules
Understand evaluation stages, profit targets, loss and drawdown rules, account states, funded progression, and payout-specific requirements.
Every sold challenge is a 1-Step evaluation. Select, Prime, and Signature use
one profit target, a 3% daily loss limit, and static maximum drawdown. Elite
uses one profit target and static maximum drawdown, with a choice of a 3% daily
loss limit (3% DLL) or no daily loss limit (No DLL) when you buy, and has its
own leverage, exposure, allocation, and payout terms; see
+ Elite Accounts. To see the market exposure caps and
+ maximum leverage for a specific product and account size, choose them on
+ Market Exposure Caps. There is
+ no minimum trading-day count
or evaluation time limit. All percentages use starting balance, never current
equity.
Evaluation rules
Plan | Profit target | Daily loss limit | Static maximum drawdown
1-Step Select | 9% | 3% | 3%
1-Step Prime | 12% | 3% | 5%
1-Step Signature | 10% | 3% | 6%
Elite, 3% DLL | 10% | 3% | 5%
Elite, No DLL | 10% | None | 5%
The profit target and loss rules use account equity, including
open-position profit or loss. On plans with a daily loss limit, daily loss is
measured from start-of-day equity at midnight America/New_York, including
entirely as store credit. See
Payouts for
their minimum request.
Daily loss reset time
On Select, Prime, Signature, and 3% DLL Elite accounts, the daily loss limit resets at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time
(America/New_York) every day. This is **04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight
Time (EDT) and 05:00 UTC during Eastern Standard Time (EST)**. The reset
follows New York's daylight saving changes, so it is not a fixed UTC time.
The new trading day's equity, including open-position profit or loss, becomes
the daily-loss reference. The dollar loss allowance remains a percentage of
starting balance. A daily reset does not reopen a failed account or reset the
maximum loss limit.
+ The hourly swap fee charged at midnight covers the hour before the reset, so it
+ counts toward the trading day that just ended. The new day's reference equity
+ is taken after that fee is charged.
Static drawdown and the withdrawal lock
The initial MLL floor is starting balance minus the static drawdown allowance.
It does not follow intraday or end-of-day highs. On the first withdrawal from
a Select, Prime, or Signature funded account, the floor locks permanently to
starting balance. It never moves again, including after later withdrawals.
Before this lock, reaching a loss floor breaches the account. After the lock,
equity exactly at the MLL floor is allowed; falling below it breaches. The
daily-loss floor remains inclusive. The dashboard shows both loss floors.
A withdrawal never restores the original buffer.
Elite has no withdrawal lock. An Elite account's MLL floor stays at starting
balance minus 5% for the life of the account, including after withdrawals, and
reaching it breaches the account. See
Elite Accounts.
Loss-limit monitoring continues while the account is active, including after
trades settle or hourly swap fees are charged. A confirmed loss-limit breach
changes the account to Failed and stops further trading.
Through the API, a position closed by liquidation reports close_reason
liquidation, and a position closed because the account reached a final state
reports system. Resting exits canceled by a liquidation report
cancel_reason liquidation.
New Stop Loss orders follow the market's chart source: Last Price for Binance,
+ Bybit and Hyperliquid, and the venue's mid price for Veranta and Ostium, which
+ publish no trades. This does not change the price references used for
loss-limit or liquidation checks. Existing orders
keep their original trigger policy until canceled and replaced.
A detected Stop Loss crossing remains valid if the price moves back before
execution. The exit still needs a fresh execution price, so placing a stop does
not guarantee a fill before a loss-limit breach. See
Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Account states
Competition trading uses a separate market exposure allowance from your
purchased challenges. Matching competition accounts share a capped allowance
for each market, product, and size. Competition positions do not consume your
purchased-account allowance. See Asset Exposure Limits
for the calculation and rejection behavior.
Challenges and Rules
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenges-and-rules
Understand evaluation stages, profit targets, loss and drawdown rules, account states, funded progression, and payout-specific requirements.
Every sold challenge is a 1-Step evaluation. Select, Prime, and Signature use
one profit target, a 3% daily loss limit, and static maximum drawdown. Elite
uses one profit target and static maximum drawdown, with a choice of a 3% daily
loss limit (3% DLL) or no daily loss limit (No DLL) when you buy, and has its
own leverage, exposure, allocation, and payout terms; see
− Elite Accounts. There is no minimum trading-day count
+ Elite Accounts. To see the market exposure caps and
+ maximum leverage for a specific product and account size, choose them on
+ Market Exposure Caps. There is
+ no minimum trading-day count
or evaluation time limit. All percentages use starting balance, never current
equity.
Evaluation rules
Plan | Profit target | Daily loss limit | Static maximum drawdown
1-Step Select | 9% | 3% | 3%
1-Step Prime | 12% | 3% | 5%
1-Step Signature | 10% | 3% | 6%
Elite, 3% DLL | 10% | 3% | 5%
Elite, No DLL | 10% | None | 5%
The profit target and loss rules use account equity, including
open-position profit or loss. On plans with a daily loss limit, daily loss is
measured from start-of-day equity at midnight America/New_York, including
entirely as store credit. See
Payouts for
their minimum request.
Daily loss reset time
On Select, Prime, Signature, and 3% DLL Elite accounts, the daily loss limit resets at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time
(America/New_York) every day. This is **04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight
Time (EDT) and 05:00 UTC during Eastern Standard Time (EST)**. The reset
follows New York's daylight saving changes, so it is not a fixed UTC time.
The new trading day's equity, including open-position profit or loss, becomes
the daily-loss reference. The dollar loss allowance remains a percentage of
starting balance. A daily reset does not reopen a failed account or reset the
maximum loss limit.
+ The hourly swap fee charged at midnight covers the hour before the reset, so it
+ counts toward the trading day that just ended. The new day's reference equity
+ is taken after that fee is charged.
Static drawdown and the withdrawal lock
The initial MLL floor is starting balance minus the static drawdown allowance.
It does not follow intraday or end-of-day highs. On the first withdrawal from
a Select, Prime, or Signature funded account, the floor locks permanently to
starting balance. It never moves again, including after later withdrawals.
Before this lock, reaching a loss floor breaches the account. After the lock,
equity exactly at the MLL floor is allowed; falling below it breaches. The
daily-loss floor remains inclusive. The dashboard shows both loss floors.
A withdrawal never restores the original buffer.
Elite has no withdrawal lock. An Elite account's MLL floor stays at starting
balance minus 5% for the life of the account, including after withdrawals, and
reaching it breaches the account. See
Elite Accounts.
Loss-limit monitoring continues while the account is active, including after
trades settle or hourly swap fees are charged. A confirmed loss-limit breach
changes the account to Failed and stops further trading.
Through the API, a position closed by liquidation reports close_reason
liquidation, and a position closed because the account reached a final state
reports system. Resting exits canceled by a liquidation report
cancel_reason liquidation.
New Stop Loss orders follow the market's chart source: Last Price for Binance,
− Bybit and Hyperliquid. This does not change the price references used for
+ Bybit and Hyperliquid, and the venue's mid price for Veranta and Ostium, which
+ publish no trades. This does not change the price references used for
loss-limit or liquidation checks. Existing orders
keep their original trigger policy until canceled and replaced.
A detected Stop Loss crossing remains valid if the price moves back before
execution. The exit still needs a fresh execution price, so placing a stop does
not guarantee a fill before a loss-limit breach. See
Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Account states
Competition trading uses a separate market exposure allowance from your
purchased challenges. Matching competition accounts share a capped allowance
for each market, product, and size. Competition positions do not consume your
purchased-account allowance. See Asset Exposure Limits
for the calculation and rejection behavior.
PremierMyFundedPerps · PayoutsPayout requests opening date changed from future (September 11, 2026) to past tense, with removed details about cutoff application and disabled state handling.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Payouts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts
Read funded payout terms, complete Rise onboarding, clear eligibility gates, submit a request, and understand its effect on the account.
Payouts are available from the
Payouts panel for an active
funded account. Select the intended account before reviewing or submitting a
request.
Payout request availability
− Payout requests open on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
− Time (04:00 UTC)**. This cutoff applies to all existing and newly funded
− accounts, including the first payout. Passing an evaluation before the cutoff
− does not allow an immediate withdrawal.
− Until then, the request action is disabled and the panel shows the opening
− time. The opening can be rescheduled, or requests can be paused. The panel
− checks availability when you open it, return to the tab, reconnect, and reach
− the displayed opening time. Every submission checks availability again.
− When requests are paused or availability cannot be verified, the form stays
− disabled. All normal payout requirements and the daily request allowance
− continue to apply after opening.
Daily payout window
Each funded account can submit one payout request per day. Elite accounts are
the exception: they have no daily limit, so you can request again as soon as
your previous request finishes. See Elite Accounts.
On every other plan, the allowance resets
at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time (America/New_York), the same time
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
After
Payouts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts
Read funded payout terms, complete Rise onboarding, clear eligibility gates, submit a request, and understand its effect on the account.
Payouts are available from the
Payouts panel for an active
funded account. Select the intended account before reviewing or submitting a
request.
Payout request availability
+ Payout requests opened on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
+ Time (04:00 UTC)** for all existing and newly funded accounts.
+ Requests can be paused. The panel checks availability when you open it, return
+ to the tab, and reconnect, and every submission checks availability again.
+ When requests are paused or availability cannot be verified, the request
+ action is disabled. All normal payout requirements still apply.
Daily payout window
Each funded account can submit one payout request per day. Elite accounts are
the exception: they have no daily limit, so you can request again as soon as
your previous request finishes. See Elite Accounts.
On every other plan, the allowance resets
at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time (America/New_York), the same time
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
Payouts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts
Read funded payout terms, complete Rise onboarding, clear eligibility gates, submit a request, and understand its effect on the account.
Payouts are available from the
Payouts panel for an active
funded account. Select the intended account before reviewing or submitting a
request.
Payout request availability
− Payout requests open on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
− Time (04:00 UTC)**. This cutoff applies to all existing and newly funded
− accounts, including the first payout. Passing an evaluation before the cutoff
− does not allow an immediate withdrawal.
− Until then, the request action is disabled and the panel shows the opening
− time. The opening can be rescheduled, or requests can be paused. The panel
− checks availability when you open it, return to the tab, reconnect, and reach
− the displayed opening time. Every submission checks availability again.
− When requests are paused or availability cannot be verified, the form stays
− disabled. All normal payout requirements and the daily request allowance
− continue to apply after opening.
+ Payout requests opened on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
+ Time (04:00 UTC)** for all existing and newly funded accounts.
+ Requests can be paused. The panel checks availability when you open it, return
+ to the tab, and reconnect, and every submission checks availability again.
+ When requests are paused or availability cannot be verified, the request
+ action is disabled. All normal payout requirements still apply.
Daily payout window
Each funded account can submit one payout request per day. Elite accounts are
the exception: they have no daily limit, so you can request again as soon as
your previous request finishes. See Elite Accounts.
On every other plan, the allowance resets
at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time (America/New_York), the same time
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
PremierMyFundedPerps · Buying a ChallengePurchase limits changed from rolling 24/75/200-hour limits to no limits; added individual limit notice feature and renamed checkout result from "Payment Approved" to "Your Challenge Is Ready" with updated description.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
The homepage shows whole-dollar prices. When PERPS is available, the cards
show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate @CODE link takes priority at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. Without either, checkout may automatically apply PERPS when the offer is enabled for you. Otherwise, enter a code and select Add Code. A valid code
discounts the list price once, including the 90/10 upgrade. There is no additional catalog discount. A percentage discount on a
whole-dollar total rounds down to the nearest whole dollar, so the discounted
price on a homepage card is the amount you pay and you never get less than
the stated percentage off.
The percentage comes from the current PERPS offer and can change with public
promotions. A different discount or affiliate code replaces PERPS; percentage discounts do
not stack. Available store credit is applied automatically after the discount.
A custom price that includes cents, or a discounted total under \$1, keeps
its exact cents, which checkout shows in full. The final order total is the
amount you will pay.
PERPS can give a larger discount on your first purchase. The homepage cards
and banner show that first-purchase discount until you have bought an account,
then the standard PERPS discount. A refunded purchase still uses up the first-purchase
discount. Affiliate codes share the same first-purchase discount: on your first
purchase, an affiliate code gives you whichever is larger, the first-purchase
discount or the affiliate's standard discount. A promotion that applies to the
− affiliate code uses its own discount instead.
Some other codes also give a larger discount on your first purchase and a
standard discount on every purchase after it. These codes count every purchase
− you have made, whichever code you used. Checkout shows the discount that applies
− to you before you pay. A failed or abandoned checkout does not use up the
first-purchase discount, but a completed purchase does, even if it is later
refunded. While one checkout with the first-purchase discount is still open,
other checkouts get the standard discount for up to 30 minutes.
Before email verification and profile setup, an affiliate-link visit shows the
selected code and the price before discounts. The code stays selected through
sign-in, and checkout validates its discount and eligibility afterward. Other
visits preview the current standing-code discount, including any selected
profit-split upgrade. The collapsed summary shows the same price as the expanded
summary. Use Back at the left of the checkout header, beside the logo,
to return to the challenge selector. This is a public price preview; enter the
code at payment and review the confirmed total.
Checkout shows the chosen plan and account size as the item in your order,
with its collector card, fee, and rules, beside the billing and payment form.
Use the Account Size control to move between the sizes the plan sells,
and the Challenge Type control to switch plans, without leaving checkout.
Each size shows its fee before you select it. A cell marked Coming Soon
is an unavailable placeholder with no announced account size or price and
cannot be selected. Switching plans keeps your account size when the new plan
sells it and otherwise moves to that plan's recommended size. The fee, rules,
− and total update with every change. On a phone the order folds into a bar at
− the top of the page; tap it to open or close the order details.
Pay particular attention to:
- the single evaluation profit target;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
- the daily payout window and gross minimum;
- funded payout terms and purchased profit split;
- challenge fee, discount, optional add-ons, and final total.
Plan values can change. The terms displayed for the selected order are more
reliable than an older screenshot or example. If pricing changes while your
checkout is open, the payment is stopped so you can review the refreshed prices
and confirm the order again.
Buy more than one account
When multi-account checkout is available for your account, a **Number of
the payment provider confirms cancellation or expiry. Once funds are arriving or
processing, cancellation may be unavailable: check the status or contact support
with your order number before sending anything else. Closing the payment window
alone does not cancel the invoice. A closed invoice cannot be paid again; start
a new purchase to use released credit for a different challenge.
3. Apply a checkout code
Opening a valid affiliate @CODE link selects that code ahead of PERPS and
any older referral cookie. The selection follows your navigation and sign-in
even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Checkout validates the code
before applying its discount. Without a code selected in the URL, an active
referral cookie supplies the default when attribution consent permits it.
Otherwise, checkout applies PERPS when that offer is enabled.
− You can replace or remove the applied discount beside Checkout Code.
Account-size cards preview the list
price crossed out beside a discounted price and a code badge. Direct visitors
see PERPS; visitors with a valid affiliate-link selection or active referral
cookie see that affiliate's code and customer discount instead. The preview covers the base
account fee. It does not change your order total.
Use Add Code to replace the automatically applied discount with another
discount or affiliate code. Review the confirmed total.
PERPS resolves to the best eligible public promotion or its standing rate.
Only one discount or affiliate code applies. Available store credit is then
applied automatically. Promotion redemption limits still apply. If a code
is rejected, remove or correct it before payment. Removing the discount restores the price before that discount while keeping
automatic store credit; it does not apply PERPS automatically.
When the banner advertises a free case, it applies to qualifying purchases. The
banner drops the free case once that offer ends. Some promotional
codes include a reward case. When the applied code
unlocks one for your selected account size, the order summary shows the case
− under Checkout Code with the tier you will receive, and how many cases
the order earns when it includes more than one account. The sealed cases are
delivered to My Rewards when the order is paid.
Some promotions also apply automatically when you enter an eligible affiliate
code. Checkout then shows that promotion's discount, and any reward case it
includes, in place of the standard affiliate discount. The affiliate is still
credited for the purchase. Promotion limits still apply. Some promotions give a
larger discount on your first use and a smaller one on later uses; these stay
available on later purchases at the later-use discount, with any reward case,
as long as that discount is at least the standard affiliate discount. Once you
reach a promotion's limit otherwise, it is no longer offered and the standard
affiliate discount applies. When more than one
promotion matches, choose the one you want from the Choose your promotion
takes the place of any other discount or affiliate code on that order.
Partner links
Partner links use separate attribution. If you opened a valid partner link and
attribution cookies are permitted, purchases started within its seven-day window
are credited to that partner automatically. The most recent valid partner link
wins. This works with no checkout code or with a different affiliate or discount
code, and does not apply a discount or change affiliate commissions.
Attribution is saved when checkout starts, so a later payment confirmation keeps
it even if the cookie expires. See Partner Links
for consent, browser, and cookie-window details.
Review the final total after every code, add-on, or payment-method change.
Purchase limits
− Every customer can complete up to 30 challenge accounts in any rolling 24 hours, 75 in
− any rolling 7 days, and 200 in any rolling 30 days. Each individual challenge account counts, including every account in a multi-account checkout. The limits count every
− challenge plan, account size, and payment method together, and a purchase is
− accepted only if it stays within all three. Each window rolls from the time of
− a completed purchase rather than resetting at midnight, so you can buy again as
− earlier purchases age out. Failed or abandoned payments do not count.
− If you reach a limit, checkout shows a Purchase Limit Reached notice that
− shows your selected quantity, the quantity available now, and exactly how many accounts to remove. No payment is taken. If waiting can make the full quantity fit, the notice also shows when.
− Accounts under a stricter, individually applied purchase limit see that limit
− on the checkout page as well. The notice clears when the displayed wait ends;
− checkout checks your current limits again when you submit.
− An unfinished payment temporarily reserves a slot for each account in the order. You can resume a
− crypto checkout that already has a payment session, even if that reservation
− uses your last available slot. If a checkout expires before its payment session
− opens, start a new checkout.
4. Read the payment result
Checkout opens a fresh confirmation page after you submit payment. If your
session has ended, sign in again to return to the same order's payment status.
You do not need to submit another payment to view the result.
Result | What to do
− Payment Approved | The evaluation account, or every account in a multi-account order, has been added to the dashboard. Select it in the account switcher.
Payment Submitted | The payment is still processing. Keep the order number and wait for settlement. Do not start another payment for that order.
Payment Status Unavailable | Check the dashboard and Purchase History before attempting another payment. This prevents an unnecessary duplicate attempt when the result is uncertain.
The order also appears in
Purchase History
with its current paid, pending, failed, or refunded status.
5. Confirm the new account
Open the dashboard and choose the
new evaluation account in the account switcher. Confirm its plan, starting
balance, status, and rule card before trading.
Continue with Evaluation Progress.
After
The homepage shows whole-dollar prices. When PERPS is available, the cards
show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate @CODE link takes priority at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. Without either, checkout may automatically apply PERPS when the offer is enabled for you. Otherwise, enter a code and select Add Code. A valid code
discounts the list price once, including the 90/10 upgrade. There is no additional catalog discount. A percentage discount on a
whole-dollar total rounds down to the nearest whole dollar, so the discounted
price on a homepage card is the amount you pay and you never get less than
the stated percentage off.
The percentage comes from the current PERPS offer and can change with public
promotions. A different discount or affiliate code replaces PERPS; percentage discounts do
not stack. Available store credit is applied automatically after the discount.
A custom price that includes cents, or a discounted total under \$1, keeps
its exact cents, which checkout shows in full. The final order total is the
amount you will pay.
+ If you enter a free account or case gift code at checkout and select
+ Add Code, checkout opens Redeem Code on the Rewards page and redeems it
+ for you. Keep the gift prefix included when using checkout. Redeem older codes
+ without a prefix directly on Rewards. Gift codes do not discount an order.
PERPS can give a larger discount on your first purchase. The homepage cards
and banner show that first-purchase discount until you have bought an account,
then the standard PERPS discount. A refunded purchase still uses up the first-purchase
discount. Affiliate codes share the same first-purchase discount: on your first
purchase, an affiliate code gives you whichever is larger, the first-purchase
discount or the affiliate's standard discount. A promotion that applies to the
+ affiliate code uses its own discount instead, unless the first-purchase
+ discount is larger on your first purchase.
Some other codes also give a larger discount on your first purchase and a
standard discount on every purchase after it. These codes count every purchase
+ you have made, whichever code you used. When the homepage advertises one of
+ these codes, affiliate codes also match its first-purchase discount: your first
+ purchase with an affiliate code gets the largest of that discount, the PERPS
+ first-purchase discount, and the affiliate's standard discount. Checkout shows
+ the discount that applies to you before you pay. A failed or abandoned checkout does not use up the
first-purchase discount, but a completed purchase does, even if it is later
refunded. While one checkout with the first-purchase discount is still open,
other checkouts get the standard discount for up to 30 minutes.
Before email verification and profile setup, an affiliate-link visit shows the
selected code and the price before discounts. The code stays selected through
sign-in, and checkout validates its discount and eligibility afterward. Other
visits preview the current standing-code discount, including any selected
profit-split upgrade. The collapsed summary shows the same price as the expanded
summary. Use Back at the left of the checkout header, beside the logo,
to return to the challenge selector. This is a public price preview; enter the
code at payment and review the confirmed total.
Checkout shows the chosen plan and account size as the item in your order,
with its collector card, fee, and rules, beside the billing and payment form.
Use the Account Size control to move between the sizes the plan sells,
and the Challenge Type control to switch plans, without leaving checkout.
Each size shows its fee before you select it. A cell marked Coming Soon
is an unavailable placeholder with no announced account size or price and
cannot be selected. Switching plans keeps your account size when the new plan
sells it and otherwise moves to that plan's recommended size. The fee, rules,
+ and total update with every change. On a phone the whole order stays open above
+ the payment form: choose a plan from Choose a Challenge, pick an account
+ size, and open Trading Rules or Payouts and Perks to see the full rules.
+ Review Your Order shows the fee, the Discount or Affiliate Code field,
+ and the total.
Pay particular attention to:
- the single evaluation profit target;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
- the daily payout window and gross minimum;
- funded payout terms and purchased profit split;
- challenge fee, discount, optional add-ons, and final total.
Plan values can change. The terms displayed for the selected order are more
reliable than an older screenshot or example. If pricing changes while your
checkout is open, the payment is stopped so you can review the refreshed prices
and confirm the order again.
Buy more than one account
When multi-account checkout is available for your account, a **Number of
the payment provider confirms cancellation or expiry. Once funds are arriving or
processing, cancellation may be unavailable: check the status or contact support
with your order number before sending anything else. Closing the payment window
alone does not cancel the invoice. A closed invoice cannot be paid again; start
a new purchase to use released credit for a different challenge.
3. Apply a checkout code
Opening a valid affiliate @CODE link selects that code ahead of PERPS and
any older referral cookie. The selection follows your navigation and sign-in
even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Checkout validates the code
before applying its discount. Without a code selected in the URL, an active
referral cookie supplies the default when attribution consent permits it.
Otherwise, checkout applies PERPS when that offer is enabled.
+ You can replace or remove the applied discount beside Discount or Affiliate Code.
Account-size cards preview the list
price crossed out beside a discounted price and a code badge. Direct visitors
see PERPS; visitors with a valid affiliate-link selection or active referral
cookie see that affiliate's code and customer discount instead. The preview covers the base
account fee. It does not change your order total.
Use Add Code to replace the automatically applied discount with another
discount or affiliate code. Review the confirmed total.
PERPS resolves to the best eligible public promotion or its standing rate.
Only one discount or affiliate code applies. Available store credit is then
applied automatically. Promotion redemption limits still apply. If a code
is rejected, remove or correct it before payment. Removing the discount restores the price before that discount while keeping
automatic store credit; it does not apply PERPS automatically.
When the banner advertises a free case, it applies to qualifying purchases. The
banner drops the free case once that offer ends. Some promotional
codes include a reward case. When the applied code
unlocks one for your selected account size, the order summary shows the case
+ under Discount or Affiliate Code with the tier you will receive, and how many cases
the order earns when it includes more than one account. The sealed cases are
delivered to My Rewards when the order is paid.
Some promotions also apply automatically when you enter an eligible affiliate
code. Checkout then shows that promotion's discount, and any reward case it
includes, in place of the standard affiliate discount. The affiliate is still
credited for the purchase. Promotion limits still apply. Some promotions give a
larger discount on your first use and a smaller one on later uses; these stay
available on later purchases at the later-use discount, with any reward case,
as long as that discount is at least the standard affiliate discount. Once you
reach a promotion's limit otherwise, it is no longer offered and the standard
affiliate discount applies. When more than one
promotion matches, choose the one you want from the Choose your promotion
takes the place of any other discount or affiliate code on that order.
Partner links
Partner links use separate attribution. If you opened a valid partner link and
attribution cookies are permitted, purchases started within its seven-day window
are credited to that partner automatically. The most recent valid partner link
wins. This works with no checkout code or with a different affiliate or discount
code, and does not apply a discount or change affiliate commissions.
Attribution is saved when checkout starts, so a later payment confirmation keeps
it even if the cookie expires. See Partner Links
for consent, browser, and cookie-window details.
Review the final total after every code, add-on, or payment-method change.
Purchase limits
+ There is no limit on how many challenge accounts you can buy. You can place as
+ many orders as you like across every plan, account size, and payment method.
+ Only the number of accounts in a single order is limited; see
+ Buy more than one account.
+ If an individual purchase limit applies to your account, checkout shows a
+ Purchase Limit Reached notice when an order would exceed it. The notice
+ shows your selected quantity, the quantity available now, and how many accounts
+ to remove. No payment is taken. If waiting can make the full quantity fit, the
+ notice also shows when, and checkout checks the limit again when you submit.
4. Read the payment result
Checkout opens a fresh confirmation page after you submit payment. If your
session has ended, sign in again to return to the same order's payment status.
You do not need to submit another payment to view the result.
Result | What to do
+ Your Challenge Is Ready | The evaluation account, or every account in a multi-account order, has been added to the dashboard. The page shows the account card and its rules. Select Start Trading to open the new account, or Go to Dashboard.
Payment Submitted | The payment is still processing. Keep the order number and wait for settlement. Do not start another payment for that order.
Payment Status Unavailable | Check the dashboard and Purchase History before attempting another payment. This prevents an unnecessary duplicate attempt when the result is uncertain.
The order also appears in
Purchase History
with its current paid, pending, failed, or refunded status.
5. Confirm the new account
Open the dashboard and choose the
new evaluation account in the account switcher. Confirm its plan, starting
balance, status, and rule card before trading.
Continue with Evaluation Progress.
The homepage shows whole-dollar prices. When PERPS is available, the cards
show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate @CODE link takes priority at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. Without either, checkout may automatically apply PERPS when the offer is enabled for you. Otherwise, enter a code and select Add Code. A valid code
discounts the list price once, including the 90/10 upgrade. There is no additional catalog discount. A percentage discount on a
whole-dollar total rounds down to the nearest whole dollar, so the discounted
price on a homepage card is the amount you pay and you never get less than
the stated percentage off.
The percentage comes from the current PERPS offer and can change with public
promotions. A different discount or affiliate code replaces PERPS; percentage discounts do
not stack. Available store credit is applied automatically after the discount.
A custom price that includes cents, or a discounted total under \$1, keeps
its exact cents, which checkout shows in full. The final order total is the
amount you will pay.
+ If you enter a free account or case gift code at checkout and select
+ Add Code, checkout opens Redeem Code on the Rewards page and redeems it
+ for you. Keep the gift prefix included when using checkout. Redeem older codes
+ without a prefix directly on Rewards. Gift codes do not discount an order.
PERPS can give a larger discount on your first purchase. The homepage cards
and banner show that first-purchase discount until you have bought an account,
then the standard PERPS discount. A refunded purchase still uses up the first-purchase
discount. Affiliate codes share the same first-purchase discount: on your first
purchase, an affiliate code gives you whichever is larger, the first-purchase
discount or the affiliate's standard discount. A promotion that applies to the
− affiliate code uses its own discount instead.
+ affiliate code uses its own discount instead, unless the first-purchase
+ discount is larger on your first purchase.
Some other codes also give a larger discount on your first purchase and a
standard discount on every purchase after it. These codes count every purchase
− you have made, whichever code you used. Checkout shows the discount that applies
− to you before you pay. A failed or abandoned checkout does not use up the
+ you have made, whichever code you used. When the homepage advertises one of
+ these codes, affiliate codes also match its first-purchase discount: your first
+ purchase with an affiliate code gets the largest of that discount, the PERPS
+ first-purchase discount, and the affiliate's standard discount. Checkout shows
+ the discount that applies to you before you pay. A failed or abandoned checkout does not use up the
first-purchase discount, but a completed purchase does, even if it is later
refunded. While one checkout with the first-purchase discount is still open,
other checkouts get the standard discount for up to 30 minutes.
Before email verification and profile setup, an affiliate-link visit shows the
selected code and the price before discounts. The code stays selected through
sign-in, and checkout validates its discount and eligibility afterward. Other
visits preview the current standing-code discount, including any selected
profit-split upgrade. The collapsed summary shows the same price as the expanded
summary. Use Back at the left of the checkout header, beside the logo,
to return to the challenge selector. This is a public price preview; enter the
code at payment and review the confirmed total.
Checkout shows the chosen plan and account size as the item in your order,
with its collector card, fee, and rules, beside the billing and payment form.
Use the Account Size control to move between the sizes the plan sells,
and the Challenge Type control to switch plans, without leaving checkout.
Each size shows its fee before you select it. A cell marked Coming Soon
is an unavailable placeholder with no announced account size or price and
cannot be selected. Switching plans keeps your account size when the new plan
sells it and otherwise moves to that plan's recommended size. The fee, rules,
− and total update with every change. On a phone the order folds into a bar at
− the top of the page; tap it to open or close the order details.
+ and total update with every change. On a phone the whole order stays open above
+ the payment form: choose a plan from Choose a Challenge, pick an account
+ size, and open Trading Rules or Payouts and Perks to see the full rules.
+ Review Your Order shows the fee, the Discount or Affiliate Code field,
+ and the total.
Pay particular attention to:
- the single evaluation profit target;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
- the daily payout window and gross minimum;
- funded payout terms and purchased profit split;
- challenge fee, discount, optional add-ons, and final total.
Plan values can change. The terms displayed for the selected order are more
reliable than an older screenshot or example. If pricing changes while your
checkout is open, the payment is stopped so you can review the refreshed prices
and confirm the order again.
Buy more than one account
When multi-account checkout is available for your account, a **Number of
the payment provider confirms cancellation or expiry. Once funds are arriving or
processing, cancellation may be unavailable: check the status or contact support
with your order number before sending anything else. Closing the payment window
alone does not cancel the invoice. A closed invoice cannot be paid again; start
a new purchase to use released credit for a different challenge.
3. Apply a checkout code
Opening a valid affiliate @CODE link selects that code ahead of PERPS and
any older referral cookie. The selection follows your navigation and sign-in
even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Checkout validates the code
before applying its discount. Without a code selected in the URL, an active
referral cookie supplies the default when attribution consent permits it.
Otherwise, checkout applies PERPS when that offer is enabled.
− You can replace or remove the applied discount beside Checkout Code.
+ You can replace or remove the applied discount beside Discount or Affiliate Code.
Account-size cards preview the list
price crossed out beside a discounted price and a code badge. Direct visitors
see PERPS; visitors with a valid affiliate-link selection or active referral
cookie see that affiliate's code and customer discount instead. The preview covers the base
account fee. It does not change your order total.
Use Add Code to replace the automatically applied discount with another
discount or affiliate code. Review the confirmed total.
PERPS resolves to the best eligible public promotion or its standing rate.
Only one discount or affiliate code applies. Available store credit is then
applied automatically. Promotion redemption limits still apply. If a code
is rejected, remove or correct it before payment. Removing the discount restores the price before that discount while keeping
automatic store credit; it does not apply PERPS automatically.
When the banner advertises a free case, it applies to qualifying purchases. The
banner drops the free case once that offer ends. Some promotional
codes include a reward case. When the applied code
unlocks one for your selected account size, the order summary shows the case
− under Checkout Code with the tier you will receive, and how many cases
+ under Discount or Affiliate Code with the tier you will receive, and how many cases
the order earns when it includes more than one account. The sealed cases are
delivered to My Rewards when the order is paid.
Some promotions also apply automatically when you enter an eligible affiliate
code. Checkout then shows that promotion's discount, and any reward case it
includes, in place of the standard affiliate discount. The affiliate is still
credited for the purchase. Promotion limits still apply. Some promotions give a
larger discount on your first use and a smaller one on later uses; these stay
available on later purchases at the later-use discount, with any reward case,
as long as that discount is at least the standard affiliate discount. Once you
reach a promotion's limit otherwise, it is no longer offered and the standard
affiliate discount applies. When more than one
promotion matches, choose the one you want from the Choose your promotion
takes the place of any other discount or affiliate code on that order.
Partner links
Partner links use separate attribution. If you opened a valid partner link and
attribution cookies are permitted, purchases started within its seven-day window
are credited to that partner automatically. The most recent valid partner link
wins. This works with no checkout code or with a different affiliate or discount
code, and does not apply a discount or change affiliate commissions.
Attribution is saved when checkout starts, so a later payment confirmation keeps
it even if the cookie expires. See Partner Links
for consent, browser, and cookie-window details.
Review the final total after every code, add-on, or payment-method change.
Purchase limits
− Every customer can complete up to 30 challenge accounts in any rolling 24 hours, 75 in
− any rolling 7 days, and 200 in any rolling 30 days. Each individual challenge account counts, including every account in a multi-account checkout. The limits count every
− challenge plan, account size, and payment method together, and a purchase is
− accepted only if it stays within all three. Each window rolls from the time of
− a completed purchase rather than resetting at midnight, so you can buy again as
− earlier purchases age out. Failed or abandoned payments do not count.
− If you reach a limit, checkout shows a Purchase Limit Reached notice that
− shows your selected quantity, the quantity available now, and exactly how many accounts to remove. No payment is taken. If waiting can make the full quantity fit, the notice also shows when.
− Accounts under a stricter, individually applied purchase limit see that limit
− on the checkout page as well. The notice clears when the displayed wait ends;
− checkout checks your current limits again when you submit.
− An unfinished payment temporarily reserves a slot for each account in the order. You can resume a
− crypto checkout that already has a payment session, even if that reservation
− uses your last available slot. If a checkout expires before its payment session
− opens, start a new checkout.
+ There is no limit on how many challenge accounts you can buy. You can place as
+ many orders as you like across every plan, account size, and payment method.
+ Only the number of accounts in a single order is limited; see
+ Buy more than one account.
+ If an individual purchase limit applies to your account, checkout shows a
+ Purchase Limit Reached notice when an order would exceed it. The notice
+ shows your selected quantity, the quantity available now, and how many accounts
+ to remove. No payment is taken. If waiting can make the full quantity fit, the
+ notice also shows when, and checkout checks the limit again when you submit.
4. Read the payment result
Checkout opens a fresh confirmation page after you submit payment. If your
session has ended, sign in again to return to the same order's payment status.
You do not need to submit another payment to view the result.
Result | What to do
− Payment Approved | The evaluation account, or every account in a multi-account order, has been added to the dashboard. Select it in the account switcher.
+ Your Challenge Is Ready | The evaluation account, or every account in a multi-account order, has been added to the dashboard. The page shows the account card and its rules. Select Start Trading to open the new account, or Go to Dashboard.
Payment Submitted | The payment is still processing. Keep the order number and wait for settlement. Do not start another payment for that order.
Payment Status Unavailable | Check the dashboard and Purchase History before attempting another payment. This prevents an unnecessary duplicate attempt when the result is uncertain.
The order also appears in
Purchase History
with its current paid, pending, failed, or refunded status.
5. Confirm the new account
Open the dashboard and choose the
new evaluation account in the account switcher. Confirm its plan, starting
balance, status, and rule card before trading.
Continue with Evaluation Progress.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Breaches and Next StepsAdded clarification that positions in markets outside trading hours close at the last quote before market close.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Competition products with no evaluation rules are not subject to the
inactivity rules.
Review the account before acting
1. Select the failed account in the account switcher.
2. Read the Pass Progress summary and final constraint.
3. Review the rule card, equity chart, closed trades, and order history around
the decision.
4. Compare the result with the terms attached to that exact account.
Open positions, marked equity, fills, fees, and funding can affect the account
state. Use the recorded account data rather than reconstructing the outcome
from one order alone.
When an account ends, any remaining open positions are closed automatically.
Closes use top-of-book
bounded between the reference and the maximum slippage cap (see
How market orders fill), and
it appears in the order history as a close-out with the account's taker fee
for that market's asset category, including the reduced
Elite rate on NAS100, SP500, Gold, and WTI Oil. The source
venue and venue ticker format do not change the fee rate.
Written breach explanation
The failure report stays expanded on the dashboard while the failed account
is selected. It cannot be dismissed.
A rule-triggered failure automatically queues a written explanation. When
available, it uses the balances, equity, loss anchors, rule settings, and open
After
Competition products with no evaluation rules are not subject to the
inactivity rules.
Review the account before acting
1. Select the failed account in the account switcher.
2. Read the Pass Progress summary and final constraint.
3. Review the rule card, equity chart, closed trades, and order history around
the decision.
4. Compare the result with the terms attached to that exact account.
Open positions, marked equity, fills, fees, and funding can affect the account
state. Use the recorded account data rather than reconstructing the outcome
from one order alone.
When an account ends, any remaining open positions are closed automatically.
+ A position in a market that is outside its
+ trading hours closes at the last quote
+ before the close.
Closes use top-of-book
bounded between the reference and the maximum slippage cap (see
How market orders fill), and
it appears in the order history as a close-out with the account's taker fee
for that market's asset category, including the reduced
Elite rate on NAS100, SP500, Gold, and WTI Oil. The source
venue and venue ticker format do not change the fee rate.
Written breach explanation
The failure report stays expanded on the dashboard while the failed account
is selected. It cannot be dismissed.
A rule-triggered failure automatically queues a written explanation. When
available, it uses the balances, equity, loss anchors, rule settings, and open
Competition products with no evaluation rules are not subject to the
inactivity rules.
Review the account before acting
1. Select the failed account in the account switcher.
2. Read the Pass Progress summary and final constraint.
3. Review the rule card, equity chart, closed trades, and order history around
the decision.
4. Compare the result with the terms attached to that exact account.
Open positions, marked equity, fills, fees, and funding can affect the account
state. Use the recorded account data rather than reconstructing the outcome
from one order alone.
When an account ends, any remaining open positions are closed automatically.
+ A position in a market that is outside its
+ trading hours closes at the last quote
+ before the close.
Closes use top-of-book
bounded between the reference and the maximum slippage cap (see
How market orders fill), and
it appears in the order history as a close-out with the account's taker fee
for that market's asset category, including the reduced
Elite rate on NAS100, SP500, Gold, and WTI Oil. The source
venue and venue ticker format do not change the fee rate.
Written breach explanation
The failure report stays expanded on the dashboard while the failed account
is selected. It cannot be dismissed.
A rule-triggered failure automatically queues a written explanation. When
available, it uses the balances, equity, loss anchors, rule settings, and open
PremierMyFundedPerps · Billing and RewardsOptional competition entry step added; expiration time for early points changed from midnight ET December 10 to 11:00 PM EST December 9; checkout code redemption process expanded.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
button to open that account on X, then follow it there. Your assigned
account stays the same if you reload the page or reconnect X.
4. Select Post on X to open a prepared post about the free Trade Case,
then publish it on X.
5. Claim Free Trade Case becomes available after both waits finish:
15 seconds after selecting Follow and 10 seconds after selecting
Post on X. Select it to add the Trade Case to My Rewards. If the claim
says to join the Discord server, join it with your connected Discord
account and claim again. If you already joined, or the claim says your
Discord membership could not be checked, wait a minute and claim again.
Reloading the page keeps your completed steps and waiting time. The post and
Discord steps are required for claims that have not yet been completed.
While the October Competition is open for
registration, claiming also enters you into it automatically when you meet its
entry requirements. If you cannot be entered automatically, the confirmation
invites you to join instead.
Each MyFundedPerps account can claim one free Trade Case from this offer, and
each X account can be used for only one claim. The case is in addition to any
other Trade Case you received. Open it from My Rewards; opening it requires
the same completed account details as other cases. The offer ends once all
follow tasks have been handed out. If you already received a follow task by
then, you can still finish it and claim your case.
Claims are checked for fraud. A claim made from a browser or device that cannot
be verified is not accepted; claim again from your usual browser. Accepted
approval. An explicitly declined claim remains unavailable, and its X account
cannot be used for another claim. Contact support if you think a claim was
declined by mistake.
Affiliate milestone rewards
Affiliate sales milestones can grant sealed cases automatically. Each milestone
reward is issued once and remains yours after refunds. Open the granted case
on the Rewards page. Some milestones also issue a separate Prime evaluation
account; that account is independent of the case result. See the
Affiliate Program guide for the milestone rewards.
Redeem a free account or case code
Open Redeem Code, sign in, and complete
onboarding if prompted. Paste the full code and select Redeem Code. You can
− also reach this page from Rewards.
Each code can be used once and does not expire. An account code adds a free
evaluation account with the challenge size and profit split configured when
the code was issued. Normal challenge rules and funding requirements apply.
A case code adds one sealed case to Rewards; redeeming the code does not open
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that was issued to them to share
with their audience.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
are spendable immediately; you do not need to claim them or wait for identity
verification or funding approval. Mock accounts, retired Beta evaluations, and Beta Blitz do not qualify.
Older evaluation passes do not forfeit a first-pass bonus you have never
received. Once credited, later passes do not earn another first-pass bonus. Look for
First Account Pass in Points History.
To open a case with points, move the carousel to that case and select
Open. Opening spends the displayed FP Points cost, records a Case
Redemption entry in Points History, and reveals the reward immediately. When
your balance is below the cost, the control reads how many points you are
missing and cannot be selected.
FP Points expiry
FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned. For purchase points, that is
− 90 days after the purchase. Points earned before launch day (September 11, 2026) expire at midnight Eastern time on December 10, 2026, 90 days after
− launch day. The schedule shows each
expiry in your local time. Each purchase, bonus, grant, or other award is
tracked separately, so different parts of your balance can expire on different
dates. Opening a case always spends the points that expire soonest first.
To see when your points expire, open
Rewards, select
FP Points, then select Expiry Schedule beside Points History. The
schedule lists each expiry date, how many days remain, where the points came
from, and the amount.
Unspent points are removed from your balance shortly after their expiry date,
and the removal appears as Expired Points in Points History. If your balance
is negative after a refund, new points first cover the negative amount, and
only the remainder starts its own 90 days.
After
button to open that account on X, then follow it there. Your assigned
account stays the same if you reload the page or reconnect X.
4. Select Post on X to open a prepared post about the free Trade Case,
then publish it on X.
5. Claim Free Trade Case becomes available after both waits finish:
15 seconds after selecting Follow and 10 seconds after selecting
Post on X. Select it to add the Trade Case to My Rewards. If the claim
says to join the Discord server, join it with your connected Discord
account and claim again. If you already joined, or the claim says your
Discord membership could not be checked, wait a minute and claim again.
Reloading the page keeps your completed steps and waiting time. The post and
Discord steps are required for claims that have not yet been completed.
+ While a competition is open for
+ registration, an optional step before the claim lets you enter it with one
+ click. Select Enter Competition; entering means you agree to the
+ competition's rules and the Terms of Use shown under the button. Once you are
+ in, the step shows You're entered. with a link to the competition page.
+ The step is optional: you can claim your free Trade Case without entering.
While the October Competition is open for
registration, claiming also enters you into it automatically when you meet its
entry requirements. If you cannot be entered automatically, the confirmation
invites you to join instead.
Each MyFundedPerps account can claim one free Trade Case from this offer, and
each X account can be used for only one claim. The case is in addition to any
other Trade Case you received. Open it from My Rewards; opening it requires
the same completed account details as other cases. The offer ends once all
follow tasks have been handed out. If you already received a follow task by
then, you can still finish it and claim your case.
Claims are checked for fraud. A claim made from a browser or device that cannot
be verified is not accepted; claim again from your usual browser. Accepted
approval. An explicitly declined claim remains unavailable, and its X account
cannot be used for another claim. Contact support if you think a claim was
declined by mistake.
Affiliate milestone rewards
Affiliate sales milestones can grant sealed cases automatically. Each milestone
reward is issued once and remains yours after refunds. Open the granted case
on the Rewards page. Some milestones also issue a separate Prime evaluation
account; that account is independent of the case result. See the
Affiliate Program guide for the milestone rewards.
Redeem a free account or case code
Open Redeem Code, sign in, and complete
onboarding if prompted. Paste the full code and select Redeem Code. You can
+ also reach this page from Rewards. If you enter a free account or case code in
+ the checkout code field and select Add Code, checkout takes you to Redeem
+ Code and redeems it for you. Keep the gift prefix included when using checkout.
+ Redeem older codes without a prefix directly on Rewards.
Each code can be used once and does not expire. An account code adds a free
evaluation account with the challenge size and profit split configured when
the code was issued. Normal challenge rules and funding requirements apply.
A case code adds one sealed case to Rewards; redeeming the code does not open
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that was issued to them to share
with their audience.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
are spendable immediately; you do not need to claim them or wait for identity
verification or funding approval. Mock accounts, retired Beta evaluations, and Beta Blitz do not qualify.
Older evaluation passes do not forfeit a first-pass bonus you have never
received. Once credited, later passes do not earn another first-pass bonus. Look for
First Account Pass in Points History.
To open a case with points, move the carousel to that case and select
Open. Opening spends the displayed FP Points cost, records a Case
Redemption entry in Points History, and reveals the reward immediately. When
your balance is below the cost, the control reads how many points you are
missing and cannot be selected.
FP Points expiry
FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned. For purchase points, that is
+ 90 days after the purchase. Points earned before launch day (September 11, 2026) expire at 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, 2026
+ (04:00 UTC on December 10), exactly 90 days after launch day began. The schedule shows each
expiry in your local time. Each purchase, bonus, grant, or other award is
tracked separately, so different parts of your balance can expire on different
dates. Opening a case always spends the points that expire soonest first.
To see when your points expire, open
Rewards, select
FP Points, then select Expiry Schedule beside Points History. The
schedule lists each expiry date, how many days remain, where the points came
from, and the amount.
Unspent points are removed from your balance shortly after their expiry date,
and the removal appears as Expired Points in Points History. If your balance
is negative after a refund, new points first cover the negative amount, and
only the remainder starts its own 90 days.
button to open that account on X, then follow it there. Your assigned
account stays the same if you reload the page or reconnect X.
4. Select Post on X to open a prepared post about the free Trade Case,
then publish it on X.
5. Claim Free Trade Case becomes available after both waits finish:
15 seconds after selecting Follow and 10 seconds after selecting
Post on X. Select it to add the Trade Case to My Rewards. If the claim
says to join the Discord server, join it with your connected Discord
account and claim again. If you already joined, or the claim says your
Discord membership could not be checked, wait a minute and claim again.
Reloading the page keeps your completed steps and waiting time. The post and
Discord steps are required for claims that have not yet been completed.
+ While a competition is open for
+ registration, an optional step before the claim lets you enter it with one
+ click. Select Enter Competition; entering means you agree to the
+ competition's rules and the Terms of Use shown under the button. Once you are
+ in, the step shows You're entered. with a link to the competition page.
+ The step is optional: you can claim your free Trade Case without entering.
While the October Competition is open for
registration, claiming also enters you into it automatically when you meet its
entry requirements. If you cannot be entered automatically, the confirmation
invites you to join instead.
Each MyFundedPerps account can claim one free Trade Case from this offer, and
each X account can be used for only one claim. The case is in addition to any
other Trade Case you received. Open it from My Rewards; opening it requires
the same completed account details as other cases. The offer ends once all
follow tasks have been handed out. If you already received a follow task by
then, you can still finish it and claim your case.
Claims are checked for fraud. A claim made from a browser or device that cannot
be verified is not accepted; claim again from your usual browser. Accepted
approval. An explicitly declined claim remains unavailable, and its X account
cannot be used for another claim. Contact support if you think a claim was
declined by mistake.
Affiliate milestone rewards
Affiliate sales milestones can grant sealed cases automatically. Each milestone
reward is issued once and remains yours after refunds. Open the granted case
on the Rewards page. Some milestones also issue a separate Prime evaluation
account; that account is independent of the case result. See the
Affiliate Program guide for the milestone rewards.
Redeem a free account or case code
Open Redeem Code, sign in, and complete
onboarding if prompted. Paste the full code and select Redeem Code. You can
− also reach this page from Rewards.
+ also reach this page from Rewards. If you enter a free account or case code in
+ the checkout code field and select Add Code, checkout takes you to Redeem
+ Code and redeems it for you. Keep the gift prefix included when using checkout.
+ Redeem older codes without a prefix directly on Rewards.
Each code can be used once and does not expire. An account code adds a free
evaluation account with the challenge size and profit split configured when
the code was issued. Normal challenge rules and funding requirements apply.
A case code adds one sealed case to Rewards; redeeming the code does not open
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that was issued to them to share
with their audience.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
are spendable immediately; you do not need to claim them or wait for identity
verification or funding approval. Mock accounts, retired Beta evaluations, and Beta Blitz do not qualify.
Older evaluation passes do not forfeit a first-pass bonus you have never
received. Once credited, later passes do not earn another first-pass bonus. Look for
First Account Pass in Points History.
To open a case with points, move the carousel to that case and select
Open. Opening spends the displayed FP Points cost, records a Case
Redemption entry in Points History, and reveals the reward immediately. When
your balance is below the cost, the control reads how many points you are
missing and cannot be selected.
FP Points expiry
FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned. For purchase points, that is
− 90 days after the purchase. Points earned before launch day (September 11, 2026) expire at midnight Eastern time on December 10, 2026, 90 days after
− launch day. The schedule shows each
+ 90 days after the purchase. Points earned before launch day (September 11, 2026) expire at 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, 2026
+ (04:00 UTC on December 10), exactly 90 days after launch day began. The schedule shows each
expiry in your local time. Each purchase, bonus, grant, or other award is
tracked separately, so different parts of your balance can expire on different
dates. Opening a case always spends the points that expire soonest first.
To see when your points expire, open
Rewards, select
FP Points, then select Expiry Schedule beside Points History. The
schedule lists each expiry date, how many days remain, where the points came
from, and the amount.
Unspent points are removed from your balance shortly after their expiry date,
and the removal appears as Expired Points in Points History. If your balance
is negative after a refund, new points first cover the negative amount, and
only the remainder starts its own 90 days.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Asset Exposure LimitsAdded explanation of product and account size selection, default view, exposure limits, market group caps, and bookmarking functionality.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Asset Exposure Limits
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/asset-exposure-limits
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand how per-user open notional limits affect your orders.
Find Current Market Limits
Open Market Exposure Caps
for the current list of tradable markets, their categories, maximum leverage,
and exposure caps. Search by market name or symbol to find an asset.
The table uses the platform's market configuration. Check that page for
current values when planning a trade; this guide explains the rules without
copying limits that can change.
How Exposure Is Calculated
A market exposure cap limits the combined open notional across your own
accounts of the same challenge product and account size trading that market.
Your matching accounts share one allowance. Other users have separate
allowances, even when their accounts have the same product and size.
Elite accounts are the exception: each Elite account has its own allowance for
each market, counting only that account's position. Your other Elite accounts
of the same size do not use up its capacity, and a reduction frees capacity
on that account immediately rather than at the next refresh. See
If you type a size larger than that remaining capacity, a note under Size
shows how far over the cap the order is, with Use Max to fill in the largest
size that fits. When no capacity is left, the note says the cap is reached.
Because the remaining capacity is an estimate, you can still submit the order;
the engine rejects it at fill if it would exceed the cap.
A position keeps the same exposure group while it remains open,
including when you add, reduce, or reverse its size. Retiring a challenge
product does not move existing exposure into another group. After you fully
close the position, a new position uses the current product grouping.
Read the Cap Table
- Max Leverage is the market's maximum leverage. Your account's rules can
impose a lower limit. Elite accounts have higher leverage and their own
− exposure caps on indices, gold, and oil; see
Elite Accounts.
- Exposure Cap is the configured per-user notional ceiling, not the
remaining capacity available for your next order.
− - A range with an asterisk means the cap varies by challenge product and
− account size. The range shows the smallest and largest configured caps;
each value applies separately to each user’s matching accounts, or to each
Elite account on its own.
- No Cap means market exposure enforcement is disabled. Available margin,
account rules, and other order checks still apply.
For your account's configured Maximum Position Size, sign in, select an
account, and hover over the market's leverage badge. Read the
Trading Guide for how that ceiling
differs from your remaining buying power.
After
Asset Exposure Limits
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/asset-exposure-limits
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand how per-user open notional limits affect your orders.
Find Current Market Limits
Open Market Exposure Caps
for the current list of tradable markets, their categories, maximum leverage,
and exposure caps. Search by market name or symbol to find an asset.
+ By default the page shows All Products: each market's cap range across
+ every challenge product and account size. Choose a Product and an
+ Account Size to see the exact caps for that account. The page also shows
+ that account's Account Exposure Limit when one applies, and for Elite, its
+ Market Group Caps on indices, US30, gold, and oil. The selection is saved in the
+ page link, so you can bookmark or share the caps for one product and size.
The table uses the platform's market configuration. Check that page for
current values when planning a trade; this guide explains the rules without
copying limits that can change.
How Exposure Is Calculated
A market exposure cap limits the combined open notional across your own
accounts of the same challenge product and account size trading that market.
Your matching accounts share one allowance. Other users have separate
allowances, even when their accounts have the same product and size.
Elite accounts are the exception: each Elite account has its own allowance for
each market, counting only that account's position. Your other Elite accounts
of the same size do not use up its capacity, and a reduction frees capacity
on that account immediately rather than at the next refresh. See
If you type a size larger than that remaining capacity, a note under Size
shows how far over the cap the order is, with Use Max to fill in the largest
size that fits. When no capacity is left, the note says the cap is reached.
Because the remaining capacity is an estimate, you can still submit the order;
the engine rejects it at fill if it would exceed the cap.
A position keeps the same exposure group while it remains open,
including when you add, reduce, or reverse its size. Retiring a challenge
product does not move existing exposure into another group. After you fully
close the position, a new position uses the current product grouping.
Read the Cap Table
- Max Leverage is the market's maximum leverage. Your account's rules can
impose a lower limit. Elite accounts have higher leverage and their own
+ exposure caps on indices, US30, gold, and oil; with Elite selected, the column
+ shows the Elite leverage. See
Elite Accounts.
- Exposure Cap is the configured per-user notional ceiling, not the
remaining capacity available for your next order.
+ - With All Products selected, a range with an asterisk means the cap
+ varies by challenge product and account size. The range shows the smallest and largest configured caps;
each value applies separately to each user’s matching accounts, or to each
Elite account on its own.
- No Cap means market exposure enforcement is disabled. Available margin,
account rules, and other order checks still apply.
For your account's configured Maximum Position Size, sign in, select an
account, and hover over the market's leverage badge. Read the
Trading Guide for how that ceiling
differs from your remaining buying power.
Asset Exposure Limits
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/asset-exposure-limits
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand how per-user open notional limits affect your orders.
Find Current Market Limits
Open Market Exposure Caps
for the current list of tradable markets, their categories, maximum leverage,
and exposure caps. Search by market name or symbol to find an asset.
+ By default the page shows All Products: each market's cap range across
+ every challenge product and account size. Choose a Product and an
+ Account Size to see the exact caps for that account. The page also shows
+ that account's Account Exposure Limit when one applies, and for Elite, its
+ Market Group Caps on indices, US30, gold, and oil. The selection is saved in the
+ page link, so you can bookmark or share the caps for one product and size.
The table uses the platform's market configuration. Check that page for
current values when planning a trade; this guide explains the rules without
copying limits that can change.
How Exposure Is Calculated
A market exposure cap limits the combined open notional across your own
accounts of the same challenge product and account size trading that market.
Your matching accounts share one allowance. Other users have separate
allowances, even when their accounts have the same product and size.
Elite accounts are the exception: each Elite account has its own allowance for
each market, counting only that account's position. Your other Elite accounts
of the same size do not use up its capacity, and a reduction frees capacity
on that account immediately rather than at the next refresh. See
If you type a size larger than that remaining capacity, a note under Size
shows how far over the cap the order is, with Use Max to fill in the largest
size that fits. When no capacity is left, the note says the cap is reached.
Because the remaining capacity is an estimate, you can still submit the order;
the engine rejects it at fill if it would exceed the cap.
A position keeps the same exposure group while it remains open,
including when you add, reduce, or reverse its size. Retiring a challenge
product does not move existing exposure into another group. After you fully
close the position, a new position uses the current product grouping.
Read the Cap Table
- Max Leverage is the market's maximum leverage. Your account's rules can
impose a lower limit. Elite accounts have higher leverage and their own
− exposure caps on indices, gold, and oil; see
+ exposure caps on indices, US30, gold, and oil; with Elite selected, the column
+ shows the Elite leverage. See
Elite Accounts.
- Exposure Cap is the configured per-user notional ceiling, not the
remaining capacity available for your next order.
− - A range with an asterisk means the cap varies by challenge product and
− account size. The range shows the smallest and largest configured caps;
+ - With All Products selected, a range with an asterisk means the cap
+ varies by challenge product and account size. The range shows the smallest and largest configured caps;
each value applies separately to each user’s matching accounts, or to each
Elite account on its own.
- No Cap means market exposure enforcement is disabled. Available margin,
account rules, and other order checks still apply.
For your account's configured Maximum Position Size, sign in, select an
account, and hover over the market's leverage badge. Read the
Trading Guide for how that ceiling
differs from your remaining buying power.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Affiliate ProgramArticle added details about Boosted Commission banners during promotions, clarified first-purchase discount rules, homepage promo bar behavior, and new purchase email notifications.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Refunding the first purchase does not make a later purchase eligible again.
The base rate is the same for every affiliate; the team can assign different
standard and first-order rates to a specific affiliate.
- Commission promotions: the team may run a temporary commission
promotion for every affiliate. While it runs, a buyer's first paid purchase
on the platform earns 25%, and a later Elite purchase (any size or daily loss
limit option) earns 15%. Other later purchases keep your normal rate. A first
purchase of Elite earns 25%; the rates do not stack. First purchase here
means the buyer's first paid purchase with any code, affiliate, or plan, so
a returning customer never qualifies for 25% by switching to your code. If
your normal rate for a purchase is higher, you keep it. The rate is fixed
when the buyer pays, and ending a promotion does not change commission you
− already earned.
- Checkout credit: your affiliate code must be applied to the completed
purchase for a sale to count toward affiliate commission. Opening your
@CODE link carries the selected code through browsing and sign-in to
checkout, where it takes priority over PERPS or an older referral cookie.
This selection works even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Before
sign-in, checkout shows the selected code, and when your link set the
referral cookie it also previews the discounted price. The code's
eligibility and final price are still validated at payment. Buyers can
also enter your code manually. Replacing it with another code or removing
it earns you no commission. When the buyer came through your link and
checked out without any affiliate code, the purchase still appears in your
history as Did Not Use Code and counts toward your reward tiers. A
purchase that uses another affiliate's code belongs to that affiliate.
- First-purchase discount: a buyer's first purchase with your code gets
the larger of your standard customer discount and the platform's
− first-purchase discount, the same one PERPS gives. Later purchases use your
standard customer discount. A promotion on your code uses its own discount
− instead. The sale is credited to you either way.
- Referral link attribution: last click wins. Clicking your link sets a cookie for the
attribution window shown on your Share & Earn tab (30 days unless the
team set a different window for you). If the visitor clicks another
affiliate's link inside that window, the newer click replaces yours. There
is no grace period or lockout. Attribution cookies still require consent
where applicable. When there is no code selected in the URL, an active
referral cookie supplies the checkout default and account-size discount
− preview. A cookie alone does not establish commission eligibility: the code
must be applied to the completed purchase. Your link is saved with the
purchase when checkout starts, so a buyer who removes your code is still
recorded as Did Not Use Code. This also requires attribution cookies
where consent applies.
- Paid orders show their order amount and calculated commission as Pending.
The refund hold ends 48 hours after payment or when the purchased account
executes its first trade, whichever comes first. For an order with several
accounts, the first trade on any of them ends the hold, and commission is
calculated on the whole order total. Unfilled or cancelled orders do not end
the hold. Commission awaiting eligibility review remains pending
until the review is complete.
- Commission History shows a redacted Order ID beneath each product:
an ellipsis followed by the last eight characters. Use this reference to
distinguish purchases when discussing a commission with support. Each
order with a calculated commission also shows the rate it was calculated
at, including any promotion rate.
- Commission is approved when the refund hold ends, even if you have not
verified your identity yet. When you complete identity verification, earlier
approved commission is checked again, and commission on a purchase found to
be your own is removed.
- A refund or chargeback during the refund hold removes the order's
commission. A refund or chargeback after the hold ends does not: the
approved commission stays yours.
After
Refunding the first purchase does not make a later purchase eligible again.
The base rate is the same for every affiliate; the team can assign different
standard and first-order rates to a specific affiliate.
- Commission promotions: the team may run a temporary commission
promotion for every affiliate. While it runs, a buyer's first paid purchase
on the platform earns 25%, and a later Elite purchase (any size or daily loss
limit option) earns 15%. Other later purchases keep your normal rate. A first
purchase of Elite earns 25%; the rates do not stack. First purchase here
means the buyer's first paid purchase with any code, affiliate, or plan, so
a returning customer never qualifies for 25% by switching to your code. If
your normal rate for a purchase is higher, you keep it. The rate is fixed
when the buyer pays, and ending a promotion does not change commission you
+ already earned. While a promotion runs, a Boosted Commission banner at
+ the top of the Affiliates page shows both promotion rates; the banner
+ disappears when the promotion ends.
- Checkout credit: your affiliate code must be applied to the completed
purchase for a sale to count toward affiliate commission. Opening your
@CODE link carries the selected code through browsing and sign-in to
checkout, where it takes priority over PERPS or an older referral cookie.
This selection works even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Before
sign-in, checkout shows the selected code, and when your link set the
referral cookie it also previews the discounted price. The code's
eligibility and final price are still validated at payment. Buyers can
also enter your code manually. Replacing it with another code or removing
it earns you no commission. When the buyer came through your link and
checked out without any affiliate code, the purchase still appears in your
history as Did Not Use Code and counts toward your reward tiers. A
purchase that uses another affiliate's code belongs to that affiliate.
- First-purchase discount: a buyer's first purchase with your code gets
the larger of your standard customer discount and the platform's
+ first-purchase discount: the larger of the one PERPS gives and the one on
+ the code the homepage advertises, when it has one. Later purchases use your
standard customer discount. A promotion on your code uses its own discount
+ instead, except that a buyer's first purchase still gets the first-purchase
+ discount when it is larger. The sale is credited to you either way.
- Referral link attribution: last click wins. Clicking your link sets a cookie for the
attribution window shown on your Share & Earn tab (30 days unless the
team set a different window for you). If the visitor clicks another
affiliate's link inside that window, the newer click replaces yours. There
is no grace period or lockout. Attribution cookies still require consent
where applicable. When there is no code selected in the URL, an active
referral cookie supplies the checkout default and account-size discount
+ preview. While your code is selected or your referral cookie is active, the
+ homepage promo bar shows your code instead of the site-wide code. A cookie alone does not establish commission eligibility: the code
must be applied to the completed purchase. Your link is saved with the
purchase when checkout starts, so a buyer who removes your code is still
recorded as Did Not Use Code. This also requires attribution cookies
where consent applies.
- Paid orders show their order amount and calculated commission as Pending.
The refund hold ends 48 hours after payment or when the purchased account
executes its first trade, whichever comes first. For an order with several
accounts, the first trade on any of them ends the hold, and commission is
calculated on the whole order total. Unfilled or cancelled orders do not end
the hold. Commission awaiting eligibility review remains pending
until the review is complete.
+ - Purchase emails: when a purchase made with your code is credited to
+ you, we email the address on your account with the commission amount, the
+ code used, and a partially hidden email of the buyer. Each purchase sends
+ one email while notifications are enabled, including repeat purchases by
+ the same buyer. Historical purchases do not generate emails when their
+ commission is corrected or approved. For new purchases, commission held
+ for eligibility review is emailed once it is approved, and failed or
+ abandoned checkouts send nothing. "Earned" means the commission is recorded
+ on your affiliate balance, not that it has been paid out. Turn these emails
+ off or back on under
+ Notification settings.
- Commission History shows a redacted Order ID beneath each product:
an ellipsis followed by the last eight characters. Use this reference to
distinguish purchases when discussing a commission with support. Each
order with a calculated commission also shows the rate it was calculated
at, including any promotion rate.
- Commission is approved when the refund hold ends, even if you have not
verified your identity yet. When you complete identity verification, earlier
approved commission is checked again, and commission on a purchase found to
be your own is removed.
- A refund or chargeback during the refund hold removes the order's
commission. A refund or chargeback after the hold ends does not: the
approved commission stays yours.
Refunding the first purchase does not make a later purchase eligible again.
The base rate is the same for every affiliate; the team can assign different
standard and first-order rates to a specific affiliate.
- Commission promotions: the team may run a temporary commission
promotion for every affiliate. While it runs, a buyer's first paid purchase
on the platform earns 25%, and a later Elite purchase (any size or daily loss
limit option) earns 15%. Other later purchases keep your normal rate. A first
purchase of Elite earns 25%; the rates do not stack. First purchase here
means the buyer's first paid purchase with any code, affiliate, or plan, so
a returning customer never qualifies for 25% by switching to your code. If
your normal rate for a purchase is higher, you keep it. The rate is fixed
when the buyer pays, and ending a promotion does not change commission you
− already earned.
+ already earned. While a promotion runs, a Boosted Commission banner at
+ the top of the Affiliates page shows both promotion rates; the banner
+ disappears when the promotion ends.
- Checkout credit: your affiliate code must be applied to the completed
purchase for a sale to count toward affiliate commission. Opening your
@CODE link carries the selected code through browsing and sign-in to
checkout, where it takes priority over PERPS or an older referral cookie.
This selection works even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Before
sign-in, checkout shows the selected code, and when your link set the
referral cookie it also previews the discounted price. The code's
eligibility and final price are still validated at payment. Buyers can
also enter your code manually. Replacing it with another code or removing
it earns you no commission. When the buyer came through your link and
checked out without any affiliate code, the purchase still appears in your
history as Did Not Use Code and counts toward your reward tiers. A
purchase that uses another affiliate's code belongs to that affiliate.
- First-purchase discount: a buyer's first purchase with your code gets
the larger of your standard customer discount and the platform's
− first-purchase discount, the same one PERPS gives. Later purchases use your
+ first-purchase discount: the larger of the one PERPS gives and the one on
+ the code the homepage advertises, when it has one. Later purchases use your
standard customer discount. A promotion on your code uses its own discount
− instead. The sale is credited to you either way.
+ instead, except that a buyer's first purchase still gets the first-purchase
+ discount when it is larger. The sale is credited to you either way.
- Referral link attribution: last click wins. Clicking your link sets a cookie for the
attribution window shown on your Share & Earn tab (30 days unless the
team set a different window for you). If the visitor clicks another
affiliate's link inside that window, the newer click replaces yours. There
is no grace period or lockout. Attribution cookies still require consent
where applicable. When there is no code selected in the URL, an active
referral cookie supplies the checkout default and account-size discount
− preview. A cookie alone does not establish commission eligibility: the code
+ preview. While your code is selected or your referral cookie is active, the
+ homepage promo bar shows your code instead of the site-wide code. A cookie alone does not establish commission eligibility: the code
must be applied to the completed purchase. Your link is saved with the
purchase when checkout starts, so a buyer who removes your code is still
recorded as Did Not Use Code. This also requires attribution cookies
where consent applies.
- Paid orders show their order amount and calculated commission as Pending.
The refund hold ends 48 hours after payment or when the purchased account
executes its first trade, whichever comes first. For an order with several
accounts, the first trade on any of them ends the hold, and commission is
calculated on the whole order total. Unfilled or cancelled orders do not end
the hold. Commission awaiting eligibility review remains pending
until the review is complete.
+ - Purchase emails: when a purchase made with your code is credited to
+ you, we email the address on your account with the commission amount, the
+ code used, and a partially hidden email of the buyer. Each purchase sends
+ one email while notifications are enabled, including repeat purchases by
+ the same buyer. Historical purchases do not generate emails when their
+ commission is corrected or approved. For new purchases, commission held
+ for eligibility review is emailed once it is approved, and failed or
+ abandoned checkouts send nothing. "Earned" means the commission is recorded
+ on your affiliate balance, not that it has been paid out. Turn these emails
+ off or back on under
+ Notification settings.
- Commission History shows a redacted Order ID beneath each product:
an ellipsis followed by the last eight characters. Use this reference to
distinguish purchases when discussing a commission with support. Each
order with a calculated commission also shows the rate it was calculated
at, including any promotion rate.
- Commission is approved when the refund hold ends, even if you have not
verified your identity yet. When you complete identity verification, earlier
approved commission is checked again, and commission on a purchase found to
be your own is removed.
- A refund or chargeback during the refund hold removes the order's
commission. A refund or chargeback after the hold ends does not: the
approved commission stays yours.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Command-Line InterfaceMyFundedPerps changed CLI authentication from API key creation to browser-based sessions, with manual mode and API key options available.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
irm https://cli.myfundedperpetuals.com/install.ps1 | iex
The installer places fperp.exe in %LOCALAPPDATA%\Programs\fperp and adds
that directory to your user PATH (new terminals pick it up automatically).
Only x64 Windows builds are published.
Verifying a download
Every release ships a SHA256SUMS file and an Ed25519 signature
(SHA256SUMS.sig) alongside its artifacts at
https://cli.myfundedperpetuals.com/vX.Y.Z/. The installers verify the
checksum of what they download, and fperp upgrade additionally verifies the
signature against a public key embedded in the binary, so a tampered release
is never installed.
Authenticate
− Create an API key in
− API Key Settings,
− then run:
bash theme={null}
fperp login
− The key is stored in your operating system's credential store (macOS
Keychain, Windows Credential Manager, or the Linux Secret Service). Where no
− credential store is available, it falls back to a 0600 config file; see
fperp login --help for the --store options. FPERP_API_KEY and
− --api-key override the stored key for one-off use.
Stay up to date
bash theme={null}
fperp upgrade
fperp upgrade downloads the latest release, verifies the signed checksums,
and replaces the binary in place. Use fperp upgrade --check to see whether a
newer version exists without installing it, and
fperp upgrade --version vX.Y.Z to install a specific release.
The CLI also checks for new releases in the background at most once per day
and prints a one-line notice on stderr when one exists. It never installs
anything on its own. To disable the check entirely, set
FPERP_NO_UPDATE_CHECK=1; the check is also skipped automatically when the
CI environment variable is set.
Uninstall
− Run fperp logout first so no API key stays behind in your OS credential
store, then remove the binary (which fperp shows where it is) and delete the
~/.config/fperp directory.
After
irm https://cli.myfundedperpetuals.com/install.ps1 | iex
The installer places fperp.exe in %LOCALAPPDATA%\Programs\fperp and adds
that directory to your user PATH (new terminals pick it up automatically).
Only x64 Windows builds are published.
Verifying a download
Every release ships a SHA256SUMS file and an Ed25519 signature
(SHA256SUMS.sig) alongside its artifacts at
https://cli.myfundedperpetuals.com/vX.Y.Z/. The installers verify the
checksum of what they download, and fperp upgrade additionally verifies the
signature against a public key embedded in the binary, so a tampered release
is never installed.
Authenticate
bash theme={null}
fperp login
+ fperp login opens your browser to approve a new CLI session. After you
+ approve it, the CLI prints the session's expiry date and stores the
+ credential. The session expires on its own; run fperp login again to renew
+ it. Run fperp login status to see the current session.
+ On a remote or headless machine (for example over SSH), run
+ fperp login --manual. The CLI prints a sign-in link instead of waiting for
+ a browser on the same machine; open it anywhere, approve, and paste the code
+ the approval page shows.
+ To use a long-lived API key instead, create one in
+ API Key Settings
+ and run fperp login --with-api-key, which reads the key from stdin or a
+ prompt that does not echo it. fperp login --api-key also works, but
+ leaves the key in your shell history.
+ Credentials are stored in your operating system's credential store (macOS
Keychain, Windows Credential Manager, or the Linux Secret Service). Where no
+ credential store is available, they fall back to a 0600 config file; see
fperp login --help for the --store options. FPERP_API_KEY and
+ --api-key on any other command override the stored credential for one-off
+ use.
+ fperp logout revokes a browser-approved session and removes the stored
+ credential.
Stay up to date
bash theme={null}
fperp upgrade
fperp upgrade downloads the latest release, verifies the signed checksums,
and replaces the binary in place. Use fperp upgrade --check to see whether a
newer version exists without installing it, and
fperp upgrade --version vX.Y.Z to install a specific release.
The CLI also checks for new releases in the background at most once per day
and prints a one-line notice on stderr when one exists. It never installs
anything on its own. To disable the check entirely, set
FPERP_NO_UPDATE_CHECK=1; the check is also skipped automatically when the
CI environment variable is set.
Uninstall
+ Run fperp logout first so no credential stays behind in your OS credential
store, then remove the binary (which fperp shows where it is) and delete the
~/.config/fperp directory.
irm https://cli.myfundedperpetuals.com/install.ps1 | iex
The installer places fperp.exe in %LOCALAPPDATA%\Programs\fperp and adds
that directory to your user PATH (new terminals pick it up automatically).
Only x64 Windows builds are published.
Verifying a download
Every release ships a SHA256SUMS file and an Ed25519 signature
(SHA256SUMS.sig) alongside its artifacts at
https://cli.myfundedperpetuals.com/vX.Y.Z/. The installers verify the
checksum of what they download, and fperp upgrade additionally verifies the
signature against a public key embedded in the binary, so a tampered release
is never installed.
Authenticate
− Create an API key in
− API Key Settings,
− then run:
bash theme={null}
fperp login
− The key is stored in your operating system's credential store (macOS
+ fperp login opens your browser to approve a new CLI session. After you
+ approve it, the CLI prints the session's expiry date and stores the
+ credential. The session expires on its own; run fperp login again to renew
+ it. Run fperp login status to see the current session.
+ On a remote or headless machine (for example over SSH), run
+ fperp login --manual. The CLI prints a sign-in link instead of waiting for
+ a browser on the same machine; open it anywhere, approve, and paste the code
+ the approval page shows.
+ To use a long-lived API key instead, create one in
+ API Key Settings
+ and run fperp login --with-api-key, which reads the key from stdin or a
+ prompt that does not echo it. fperp login --api-key also works, but
+ leaves the key in your shell history.
+ Credentials are stored in your operating system's credential store (macOS
Keychain, Windows Credential Manager, or the Linux Secret Service). Where no
− credential store is available, it falls back to a 0600 config file; see
+ credential store is available, they fall back to a 0600 config file; see
fperp login --help for the --store options. FPERP_API_KEY and
− --api-key override the stored key for one-off use.
+ --api-key on any other command override the stored credential for one-off
+ use.
+ fperp logout revokes a browser-approved session and removes the stored
+ credential.
Stay up to date
bash theme={null}
fperp upgrade
fperp upgrade downloads the latest release, verifies the signed checksums,
and replaces the binary in place. Use fperp upgrade --check to see whether a
newer version exists without installing it, and
fperp upgrade --version vX.Y.Z to install a specific release.
The CLI also checks for new releases in the background at most once per day
and prints a one-line notice on stderr when one exists. It never installs
anything on its own. To disable the check entirely, set
FPERP_NO_UPDATE_CHECK=1; the check is also skipped automatically when the
CI environment variable is set.
Uninstall
− Run fperp logout first so no API key stays behind in your OS credential
+ Run fperp logout first so no credential stays behind in your OS credential
store, then remove the binary (which fperp shows where it is) and delete the
~/.config/fperp directory.
PremierMyFundedPerps · AuthenticationRestricted-countries endpoint changed from requiring a key to being public.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
when they attempt a trading request.
Copy trading follows the same account boundary. A lead order requires access to
its lead and every configured follower in the same environment. A key limited
to the lead account cannot place the lead trade while that copy group is
enabled. The request returns 404 with account_not_found before any order is
created; followers are never silently omitted. Use a key covering the complete
group or manage the trade on the website.
Modifications, cancellations, and protective-exit changes also require access
to every copied account they would affect. This includes outstanding copied
orders from a group that has since been disabled. A live key never grants
access to a sandbox follower, even when the website configuration includes it.
Keys created before scoped access was introduced retain read and trading access
− to every owned account until they are revoked. The API information and
− tradable-market catalog endpoints are public; account state, quotes, positions,
− and orders require a key.
Environments
Every key belongs to one environment, named by its prefix and served on its
own hostname:
Environment | Key prefix | Base URL | Reaches
Live | fp_live_ | https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com | Your challenge accounts
Test | fp_test_ | https://sandbox.myfundedperpetuals.com | Your sandbox accounts only
A key presented on the other environment's host returns 401 with a message
naming the correct host. Test keys and sandbox accounts are covered in
Sandbox and test keys.
CLI sessions
The fperp command-line tool can sign in without a manually created API key.
Running fperp login opens your browser to an approval page; approving mints
After
when they attempt a trading request.
Copy trading follows the same account boundary. A lead order requires access to
its lead and every configured follower in the same environment. A key limited
to the lead account cannot place the lead trade while that copy group is
enabled. The request returns 404 with account_not_found before any order is
created; followers are never silently omitted. Use a key covering the complete
group or manage the trade on the website.
Modifications, cancellations, and protective-exit changes also require access
to every copied account they would affect. This includes outstanding copied
orders from a group that has since been disabled. A live key never grants
access to a sandbox follower, even when the website configuration includes it.
Keys created before scoped access was introduced retain read and trading access
+ to every owned account until they are revoked. The API information,
+ tradable-market catalog, and restricted-countries endpoints are public; account
+ state, quotes, positions, and orders require a key.
Environments
Every key belongs to one environment, named by its prefix and served on its
own hostname:
Environment | Key prefix | Base URL | Reaches
Live | fp_live_ | https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com | Your challenge accounts
Test | fp_test_ | https://sandbox.myfundedperpetuals.com | Your sandbox accounts only
A key presented on the other environment's host returns 401 with a message
naming the correct host. Test keys and sandbox accounts are covered in
Sandbox and test keys.
CLI sessions
The fperp command-line tool can sign in without a manually created API key.
Running fperp login opens your browser to an approval page; approving mints
when they attempt a trading request.
Copy trading follows the same account boundary. A lead order requires access to
its lead and every configured follower in the same environment. A key limited
to the lead account cannot place the lead trade while that copy group is
enabled. The request returns 404 with account_not_found before any order is
created; followers are never silently omitted. Use a key covering the complete
group or manage the trade on the website.
Modifications, cancellations, and protective-exit changes also require access
to every copied account they would affect. This includes outstanding copied
orders from a group that has since been disabled. A live key never grants
access to a sandbox follower, even when the website configuration includes it.
Keys created before scoped access was introduced retain read and trading access
− to every owned account until they are revoked. The API information and
− tradable-market catalog endpoints are public; account state, quotes, positions,
− and orders require a key.
+ to every owned account until they are revoked. The API information,
+ tradable-market catalog, and restricted-countries endpoints are public; account
+ state, quotes, positions, and orders require a key.
Environments
Every key belongs to one environment, named by its prefix and served on its
own hostname:
Environment | Key prefix | Base URL | Reaches
Live | fp_live_ | https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com | Your challenge accounts
Test | fp_test_ | https://sandbox.myfundedperpetuals.com | Your sandbox accounts only
A key presented on the other environment's host returns 401 with a message
naming the correct host. Test keys and sandbox accounts are covered in
Sandbox and test keys.
CLI sessions
The fperp command-line tool can sign in without a manually created API key.
Running fperp login opens your browser to an approval page; approving mints
PremierMyFundedPerps · Set the position's extra isolated marginIsolated margin reductions on copy-trading leads now automatically apply scaled changes to each follower's matching position.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Set the position's extra isolated margin
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/positions/set-the-positions-extra-isolated-margin
/openapi.yaml put /v1/positions/{position_id}/isolated-margin
− Sets a desired total rather than applying a delta, making an identical retry safe. Reductions use a fresh authoritative book and reject when the new liquidation risk would be unsafe.
After
Set the position's extra isolated margin
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/positions/set-the-positions-extra-isolated-margin
/openapi.yaml put /v1/positions/{position_id}/isolated-margin
+ Sets a desired total rather than applying a delta, making an identical retry safe. Reductions use a fresh authoritative book and reject when the new liquidation risk would be unsafe. On a copy-trading lead, the change is also applied to each follower's matching isolated position, scaled to its size; follower accounts cannot call this endpoint.
Set the position's extra isolated margin
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/positions/set-the-positions-extra-isolated-margin
/openapi.yaml put /v1/positions/{position_id}/isolated-margin
− Sets a desired total rather than applying a delta, making an identical retry safe. Reductions use a fresh authoritative book and reject when the new liquidation risk would be unsafe.
+ Sets a desired total rather than applying a delta, making an identical retry safe. Reductions use a fresh authoritative book and reject when the new liquidation risk would be unsafe. On a copy-trading lead, the change is also applied to each follower's matching isolated position, scaled to its size; follower accounts cannot call this endpoint.
PremierMyFundedPerps · API capabilitiesCopy trading and trading policy permissions added; copy trading configuration inspection moved to API with access filtering clarified.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Account selection | List non-archived accounts accessible to the credential and read an account's risk snapshot.
Market discovery | List execution markets, inspect a market's availability, and request a current quote with an optional size estimate.
Standard orders | Market, limit, chase, stop-market, stop-limit, take-market, take-limit, take-profit, and external conditional orders.
Limit instructions | IOC, FOK, and GTD; omit time in force for GTC.
Entry protection | Attached TP/SL on market and non-reduce-only limit entries.
Order lifecycle | Read working orders and paginated history; modify supported working orders, cancel, and update attached exits.
Position lifecycle | Read open and closed positions; close fully or partially using market, limit, or external conditional orders.
Protective exits | Batch TP/SL placement, modification, cancellation, and OCO pairing, including price-capped exits.
Margin | Supply leverage and margin mode when placing orders; add or remove extra isolated margin by setting its target total.
Execution strategies | Create, inspect, and cancel TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders. Use the documented status filters when listing strategy parents.
Account-wide actions | Resumable cancel-all ordinary orders and close-all positions. Strategy parents require separate cancellation.
Reconciliation | Order IDs, caller-assigned IDs for ordinary and close orders, paginated fills, and partial-fill lineage.
Account events | A WebSocket stream of order, fill, position, and balance changes across the key's accounts.
See Trading with the API for behavior and examples and the
REST reference for request and response fields.
Features that require the website
The public REST contract has no endpoints for these website capabilities:
- Signup and onboarding, challenge purchases, identity verification, agreements,
payout requests, and billing or purchase-history management.
- API-key creation and management or sandbox-account creation and reset.
- Saved trading preferences, watchlists, and notifications.
- Journal notes and tags, performance dashboards, and account equity-history charts.
Existing copy-trading configurations still apply when an API request trades a
− lead account. Configure and inspect those groups on the website before running
− an automated strategy. Followers remain subject to the same manual-trading
− restrictions as in the terminal.
Browser-internal connections are not an API-key subscription contract.
REST reads return snapshots; for pushed changes on your accounts, use the
account stream instead of polling. Use bounded
reconciliation and respect the
shared request budgets.
MCP, CLI, and SDK coverage
The REST methods in the MCP server, CLI, and SDKs are
derived from the REST specification. They do not add website capabilities
missing from REST. The SDKs also provide price streaming
through the dedicated public market WebSocket feed.
MCP exposes the REST read and trading operations as tools. The REST
specification also contains two CLI authentication endpoints that MCP does not
After
Account selection | List non-archived accounts accessible to the credential and read an account's risk snapshot.
Market discovery | List execution markets, inspect a market's availability, and request a current quote with an optional size estimate.
Standard orders | Market, limit, chase, stop-market, stop-limit, take-market, take-limit, take-profit, and external conditional orders.
Limit instructions | IOC, FOK, and GTD; omit time in force for GTC.
Entry protection | Attached TP/SL on market and non-reduce-only limit entries.
Order lifecycle | Read working orders and paginated history; modify supported working orders, cancel, and update attached exits.
Position lifecycle | Read open and closed positions; close fully or partially using market, limit, or external conditional orders.
Protective exits | Batch TP/SL placement, modification, cancellation, and OCO pairing, including price-capped exits.
Margin | Supply leverage and margin mode when placing orders; add or remove extra isolated margin by setting its target total.
Execution strategies | Create, inspect, and cancel TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders. Use the documented status filters when listing strategy parents.
Account-wide actions | Resumable cancel-all ordinary orders and close-all positions. Strategy parents require separate cancellation.
Reconciliation | Order IDs, caller-assigned IDs for ordinary and close orders, paginated fills, and partial-fill lineage.
+ Copy trading | List, save, and disable copy-trading groups whose members the credential can access, and acknowledge a completed copy stop.
+ Trading policy | Read an account's effective rules, trading limits, restrictions, payout and copy locks, and trading halts.
Account events | A WebSocket stream of order, fill, position, and balance changes across the key's accounts.
See Trading with the API for behavior and examples and the
REST reference for request and response fields.
Features that require the website
The public REST contract has no endpoints for these website capabilities:
- Signup and onboarding, challenge purchases, identity verification, agreements,
payout requests, and billing or purchase-history management.
- API-key creation and management or sandbox-account creation and reset.
- Saved trading preferences, watchlists, and notifications.
- Journal notes and tags, performance dashboards, and account equity-history charts.
Existing copy-trading configurations still apply when an API request trades a
+ lead account. Inspect those groups through the API or on the website before
+ running an automated strategy. The API lists only groups whose lead and every
+ follower your credential can access, and saving never changes groups it does
+ not list. Followers remain subject to the same manual-trading restrictions as
+ in the terminal.
Browser-internal connections are not an API-key subscription contract.
REST reads return snapshots; for pushed changes on your accounts, use the
account stream instead of polling. Use bounded
reconciliation and respect the
shared request budgets.
MCP, CLI, and SDK coverage
The REST methods in the MCP server, CLI, and SDKs are
derived from the REST specification. They do not add website capabilities
missing from REST. The SDKs also provide price streaming
through the dedicated public market WebSocket feed.
MCP exposes the REST read and trading operations as tools. The REST
specification also contains two CLI authentication endpoints that MCP does not
Account selection | List non-archived accounts accessible to the credential and read an account's risk snapshot.
Market discovery | List execution markets, inspect a market's availability, and request a current quote with an optional size estimate.
Standard orders | Market, limit, chase, stop-market, stop-limit, take-market, take-limit, take-profit, and external conditional orders.
Limit instructions | IOC, FOK, and GTD; omit time in force for GTC.
Entry protection | Attached TP/SL on market and non-reduce-only limit entries.
Order lifecycle | Read working orders and paginated history; modify supported working orders, cancel, and update attached exits.
Position lifecycle | Read open and closed positions; close fully or partially using market, limit, or external conditional orders.
Protective exits | Batch TP/SL placement, modification, cancellation, and OCO pairing, including price-capped exits.
Margin | Supply leverage and margin mode when placing orders; add or remove extra isolated margin by setting its target total.
Execution strategies | Create, inspect, and cancel TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders. Use the documented status filters when listing strategy parents.
Account-wide actions | Resumable cancel-all ordinary orders and close-all positions. Strategy parents require separate cancellation.
Reconciliation | Order IDs, caller-assigned IDs for ordinary and close orders, paginated fills, and partial-fill lineage.
+ Copy trading | List, save, and disable copy-trading groups whose members the credential can access, and acknowledge a completed copy stop.
+ Trading policy | Read an account's effective rules, trading limits, restrictions, payout and copy locks, and trading halts.
Account events | A WebSocket stream of order, fill, position, and balance changes across the key's accounts.
See Trading with the API for behavior and examples and the
REST reference for request and response fields.
Features that require the website
The public REST contract has no endpoints for these website capabilities:
- Signup and onboarding, challenge purchases, identity verification, agreements,
payout requests, and billing or purchase-history management.
- API-key creation and management or sandbox-account creation and reset.
- Saved trading preferences, watchlists, and notifications.
- Journal notes and tags, performance dashboards, and account equity-history charts.
Existing copy-trading configurations still apply when an API request trades a
− lead account. Configure and inspect those groups on the website before running
− an automated strategy. Followers remain subject to the same manual-trading
− restrictions as in the terminal.
+ lead account. Inspect those groups through the API or on the website before
+ running an automated strategy. The API lists only groups whose lead and every
+ follower your credential can access, and saving never changes groups it does
+ not list. Followers remain subject to the same manual-trading restrictions as
+ in the terminal.
Browser-internal connections are not an API-key subscription contract.
REST reads return snapshots; for pushed changes on your accounts, use the
account stream instead of polling. Use bounded
reconciliation and respect the
shared request budgets.
MCP, CLI, and SDK coverage
The REST methods in the MCP server, CLI, and SDKs are
derived from the REST specification. They do not add website capabilities
missing from REST. The SDKs also provide price streaming
through the dedicated public market WebSocket feed.
MCP exposes the REST read and trading operations as tools. The REST
specification also contains two CLI authentication endpoints that MCP does not
PremierVest Markets · Perpetual Contract SpecificationsYM-PERP (E-mini Dow Jones) perpetual contract added with five contract codes and ±25 bps price limits.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Jan 1, 2026 | NQH6
Mar 17, 2026 | NQM6
Jun 16, 2026 | NQU6
Sep 15, 2026 | NQZ6
Dec 15, 2026 | NQH7
RTY-PERP (E-mini Russell 2000)
Effective Date | Contract Code
Jan 1, 2026 | RTYH6
Mar 17, 2026 | RTYM6
Jun 16, 2026 | RTYU6
Sep 15, 2026 | RTYZ6
Dec 15, 2026 | RTYH7
Energy
CL-PERP (Crude Oil)
Effective Date | Contract Code
April 14, 2026 | CLM6
May 12, 2026 | CLN6
Jun 11, 2026 | CLQ6
Jul 14, 2026 | CLU6
Aug 13, 2026 | CLV6
Sep 15, 2026 | CLX6
Oct 13, 2026 | CLZ6
Nov 12, 2026 | CLF7
Dec 14, 2026 | CLG7
Basis limits restrict how far a perpetual contract’s trading price can deviate from its Index Price. They function similarly to limit-up and limit-down rules, with upper and lower price boundaries defined relative to the Index Price.
The basis is the difference between the perpetual contract price and the Index Price, expressed in basis points:
Basis (bps) = ((Perpetual Price − Index Price) / Index Price) × 10,000
A positive basis means the perpetual is trading above the Index Price; a negative basis means it is trading below.
Each market has a specified basis limit. Trades cannot execute above the upper boundary or below the lower boundary. Trading within the permitted band can continue.
Basis limits help prevent excessive price dislocations during volatile or low-liquidity conditions.
Current Basis Limits
Basis limits currently apply to the following market:
Market | Limits
NQ-PERP | ±25 bps (±0.25%)
ES-PERP | ±25 bps (±0.25%)
RTY-PERP | ±25 bps (±0.25%)
BTC-PERP | ±50 bps (±0.50%)
ETH-PERP | ±50 bps (±0.50%)
After
Jan 1, 2026 | NQH6
Mar 17, 2026 | NQM6
Jun 16, 2026 | NQU6
Sep 15, 2026 | NQZ6
Dec 15, 2026 | NQH7
RTY-PERP (E-mini Russell 2000)
Effective Date | Contract Code
Jan 1, 2026 | RTYH6
Mar 17, 2026 | RTYM6
Jun 16, 2026 | RTYU6
Sep 15, 2026 | RTYZ6
Dec 15, 2026 | RTYH7
+ YM-PERP (E-mini Dow Jones)
+ Effective Date | Contract Code
+ Jan 1, 2026 | YMH6
+ Mar 17, 2026 | YMM6
+ Jun 16, 2026 | YMU6
+ Sep 15, 2026 | YMZ6
+ Dec 15, 2026 | YMH7
Energy
CL-PERP (Crude Oil)
Effective Date | Contract Code
April 14, 2026 | CLM6
May 12, 2026 | CLN6
Jun 11, 2026 | CLQ6
Jul 14, 2026 | CLU6
Aug 13, 2026 | CLV6
Sep 15, 2026 | CLX6
Oct 13, 2026 | CLZ6
Nov 12, 2026 | CLF7
Dec 14, 2026 | CLG7
Basis limits restrict how far a perpetual contract’s trading price can deviate from its Index Price. They function similarly to limit-up and limit-down rules, with upper and lower price boundaries defined relative to the Index Price.
The basis is the difference between the perpetual contract price and the Index Price, expressed in basis points:
Basis (bps) = ((Perpetual Price − Index Price) / Index Price) × 10,000
A positive basis means the perpetual is trading above the Index Price; a negative basis means it is trading below.
Each market has a specified basis limit. Trades cannot execute above the upper boundary or below the lower boundary. Trading within the permitted band can continue.
Basis limits help prevent excessive price dislocations during volatile or low-liquidity conditions.
Current Basis Limits
Basis limits currently apply to the following market:
Market | Limits
NQ-PERP | ±25 bps (±0.25%)
ES-PERP | ±25 bps (±0.25%)
RTY-PERP | ±25 bps (±0.25%)
+ YM-PERP | ±25 bps (±0.25%)
BTC-PERP | ±50 bps (±0.50%)
ETH-PERP | ±50 bps (±0.50%)
Jan 1, 2026 | NQH6
Mar 17, 2026 | NQM6
Jun 16, 2026 | NQU6
Sep 15, 2026 | NQZ6
Dec 15, 2026 | NQH7
RTY-PERP (E-mini Russell 2000)
Effective Date | Contract Code
Jan 1, 2026 | RTYH6
Mar 17, 2026 | RTYM6
Jun 16, 2026 | RTYU6
Sep 15, 2026 | RTYZ6
Dec 15, 2026 | RTYH7
+ YM-PERP (E-mini Dow Jones)
+ Effective Date | Contract Code
+ Jan 1, 2026 | YMH6
+ Mar 17, 2026 | YMM6
+ Jun 16, 2026 | YMU6
+ Sep 15, 2026 | YMZ6
+ Dec 15, 2026 | YMH7
Energy
CL-PERP (Crude Oil)
Effective Date | Contract Code
April 14, 2026 | CLM6
May 12, 2026 | CLN6
Jun 11, 2026 | CLQ6
Jul 14, 2026 | CLU6
Aug 13, 2026 | CLV6
Sep 15, 2026 | CLX6
Oct 13, 2026 | CLZ6
Nov 12, 2026 | CLF7
Dec 14, 2026 | CLG7
Basis limits restrict how far a perpetual contract’s trading price can deviate from its Index Price. They function similarly to limit-up and limit-down rules, with upper and lower price boundaries defined relative to the Index Price.
The basis is the difference between the perpetual contract price and the Index Price, expressed in basis points:
Basis (bps) = ((Perpetual Price − Index Price) / Index Price) × 10,000
A positive basis means the perpetual is trading above the Index Price; a negative basis means it is trading below.
Each market has a specified basis limit. Trades cannot execute above the upper boundary or below the lower boundary. Trading within the permitted band can continue.
Basis limits help prevent excessive price dislocations during volatile or low-liquidity conditions.
Current Basis Limits
Basis limits currently apply to the following market:
Market | Limits
NQ-PERP | ±25 bps (±0.25%)
ES-PERP | ±25 bps (±0.25%)
RTY-PERP | ±25 bps (±0.25%)
+ YM-PERP | ±25 bps (±0.25%)
BTC-PERP | ±50 bps (±0.50%)
ETH-PERP | ±50 bps (±0.50%)
PremierVest Markets · Cross Margin & LeverageYM-PERP leverage entry added at 50x, and GC-PERP and HG-PERP leverage reduced from 25x to 5x.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
FX | AUD-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | CAD-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | CHF-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | EUR-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | GBP-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | JPY-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | NOK-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | NZD-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | SEK-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
INDEX | NQ-PERP | 50x | 50x
INDEX | RTY-PERP | 50x | 50x
INDEX | ES-PERP | 75x | 75x
METAL | GC-PERP | 25x | 5x
METAL | HG-PERP | 25x | 5x
METAL | PL-PERP | 25x | 5x
METAL | SI-PERP | 25x | 5x
BTC and ETH have a 15x maximum on Funded Accounts. ES has a 75x maximum on both Primary and Funded Accounts. NQ and RTY have a 50x maximum on both Primary and Funded Accounts. HYPE and XRP are unavailable to trade on Funded Accounts.
Changing your leverage
Leverage is set per market from the trading view.
1. Open the market you want to trade.
2. Click the leverage indicator near the top of the order form (shows your current multiplier, e.g. "5x").
3. Use the slider or preset buttons to choose a new leverage level, up to that market's maximum.
4. Confirm the change.
The order-form leverage setting controls sizing for new orders. Effective portfolio leverage is a separate measure: total notional exposure divided by current portfolio equity.
After
FX | AUD-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | CAD-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | CHF-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | EUR-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | GBP-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | JPY-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | NOK-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | NZD-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | SEK-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
INDEX | NQ-PERP | 50x | 50x
INDEX | RTY-PERP | 50x | 50x
INDEX | ES-PERP | 75x | 75x
+ INDEX | YM-PERP | 50x | 50x
METAL | GC-PERP | 25x | 5x
METAL | HG-PERP | 25x | 5x
METAL | PL-PERP | 25x | 5x
METAL | SI-PERP | 25x | 5x
BTC and ETH have a 15x maximum on Funded Accounts. ES has a 75x maximum on both Primary and Funded Accounts. NQ and RTY have a 50x maximum on both Primary and Funded Accounts. HYPE and XRP are unavailable to trade on Funded Accounts.
Changing your leverage
Leverage is set per market from the trading view.
1. Open the market you want to trade.
2. Click the leverage indicator near the top of the order form (shows your current multiplier, e.g. "5x").
3. Use the slider or preset buttons to choose a new leverage level, up to that market's maximum.
4. Confirm the change.
The order-form leverage setting controls sizing for new orders. Effective portfolio leverage is a separate measure: total notional exposure divided by current portfolio equity.
FX | AUD-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | CAD-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | CHF-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | EUR-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | GBP-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | JPY-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | NOK-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | NZD-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
FX | SEK-USD-PERP | 100x | 5x
INDEX | NQ-PERP | 50x | 50x
INDEX | RTY-PERP | 50x | 50x
INDEX | ES-PERP | 75x | 75x
+ INDEX | YM-PERP | 50x | 50x
METAL | GC-PERP | 25x | 5x
METAL | HG-PERP | 25x | 5x
METAL | PL-PERP | 25x | 5x
METAL | SI-PERP | 25x | 5x
BTC and ETH have a 15x maximum on Funded Accounts. ES has a 75x maximum on both Primary and Funded Accounts. NQ and RTY have a 50x maximum on both Primary and Funded Accounts. HYPE and XRP are unavailable to trade on Funded Accounts.
Changing your leverage
Leverage is set per market from the trading view.
1. Open the market you want to trade.
2. Click the leverage indicator near the top of the order form (shows your current multiplier, e.g. "5x").
3. Use the slider or preset buttons to choose a new leverage level, up to that market's maximum.
4. Confirm the change.
The order-form leverage setting controls sizing for new orders. Effective portfolio leverage is a separate measure: total notional exposure divided by current portfolio equity.
PremierVest Markets · MarketsYM added to indices with 0.0025% taker fee; ES, NQ, RTY description changed from specific listing to "Indices and commodities.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Every market on Vest trades on cross margin with USDC as collateral, settles instantly, and uses mark price for liquidations. What differs by asset class is the underlying being tracked and the trading schedule.
|
Indices | Major indices as perpetual futures. Trade broad market moves like the S&P 500 (ES) and Nasdaq 100 (NQ).
Stocks | Hundreds of NYSE and NASDAQ listed stocks. Trade the same tickers you'd find on traditional exchanges without holding the underlying.
Crypto | Major tokens and altcoins. BTC, ETH, and a growing list of pairs.
Commodities | Metals, energy, and agricultural commodities as perpetuals. Gold, silver, oil, and more.
Forex | Major and minor currency pairs.
Trading Hours
Markets follow schedules tied to their underlying.
Asset Class | Schedule
Crypto | Trades continuously, including through weekends
Single stocks | Regular, Pre-Market, Extended, and Overnight sessions Monday–Friday. Locked from Friday 8:00 PM ET to Sunday 8:00 PM ET
− Index & Commodity Futures | ES, NQ, RTY and commodities remain tradable through 5:00–6:00 PM ET CME maintenance. Locked from Friday 5:00 PM ET to Sunday 6:00 PM ET.
FX | Regular Hours Monday–Friday. Locked over the weekend.
Positions held into a weekend lock remain open. They cannot be adjusted, added to, or closed until the market resumes.
Leverage
Leverage is set per market and displayed on each market’s page. See Cross Margin & Leverage for the full table of Primary and Funded Account caps.
- Primary Accounts — up to 100x, market-dependent
- Funded Accounts — up to 50x, market-dependent
Higher exposure relative to account equity magnifies gains and losses relative to that equity. Changing leverage alone does not change dollar PnL for an unchanged position size. See Cross Margin & Leverage for details.
Fees
Maker fees are always 0 bps (0%) across all markets and trading sessions. Taker fees vary by market.
− ES, NQ and RTY carry a flat taker fee of 0.0025% (0.25 bps), in every session.
A flat taker fee of 0.01% (1 bp) applies across all other markets, in every session. The same maker and taker rates apply to API transactions.
Finding Markets
Use the Markets tab in the platform to browse the full list, search by ticker or name, or filter by asset class. Add markets to your Watchlist for quick access from the trading view.
To browse live, visit next.vestmarkets.com/markets.
Restrictions on Funded Accounts
Vest Capital restrictions: XRP and HYPE are not available on Evaluation Accounts or Live Funded Accounts. API trading is not available on any Funded Account. All other listed markets trade normally.
After
Every market on Vest trades on cross margin with USDC as collateral, settles instantly, and uses mark price for liquidations. What differs by asset class is the underlying being tracked and the trading schedule.
|
Indices | Major indices as perpetual futures. Trade broad market moves like the S&P 500 (ES) and Nasdaq 100 (NQ).
Stocks | Hundreds of NYSE and NASDAQ listed stocks. Trade the same tickers you'd find on traditional exchanges without holding the underlying.
Crypto | Major tokens and altcoins. BTC, ETH, and a growing list of pairs.
Commodities | Metals, energy, and agricultural commodities as perpetuals. Gold, silver, oil, and more.
Forex | Major and minor currency pairs.
Trading Hours
Markets follow schedules tied to their underlying.
Asset Class | Schedule
Crypto | Trades continuously, including through weekends
Single stocks | Regular, Pre-Market, Extended, and Overnight sessions Monday–Friday. Locked from Friday 8:00 PM ET to Sunday 8:00 PM ET
+ Index & Commodity Futures | Indices and commodities remain tradable through 5:00–6:00 PM ET CME maintenance. Locked from Friday 5:00 PM ET to Sunday 6:00 PM ET.
FX | Regular Hours Monday–Friday. Locked over the weekend.
Positions held into a weekend lock remain open. They cannot be adjusted, added to, or closed until the market resumes.
Leverage
Leverage is set per market and displayed on each market’s page. See Cross Margin & Leverage for the full table of Primary and Funded Account caps.
- Primary Accounts — up to 100x, market-dependent
- Funded Accounts — up to 50x, market-dependent
Higher exposure relative to account equity magnifies gains and losses relative to that equity. Changing leverage alone does not change dollar PnL for an unchanged position size. See Cross Margin & Leverage for details.
Fees
Maker fees are always 0 bps (0%) across all markets and trading sessions. Taker fees vary by market.
+ ES, NQ, RTY, and YM carry a flat taker fee of 0.0025% (0.25 bps), in every session.
A flat taker fee of 0.01% (1 bp) applies across all other markets, in every session. The same maker and taker rates apply to API transactions.
Finding Markets
Use the Markets tab in the platform to browse the full list, search by ticker or name, or filter by asset class. Add markets to your Watchlist for quick access from the trading view.
To browse live, visit next.vestmarkets.com/markets.
Restrictions on Funded Accounts
Vest Capital restrictions: XRP and HYPE are not available on Evaluation Accounts or Live Funded Accounts. API trading is not available on any Funded Account. All other listed markets trade normally.
Every market on Vest trades on cross margin with USDC as collateral, settles instantly, and uses mark price for liquidations. What differs by asset class is the underlying being tracked and the trading schedule.
|
Indices | Major indices as perpetual futures. Trade broad market moves like the S&P 500 (ES) and Nasdaq 100 (NQ).
Stocks | Hundreds of NYSE and NASDAQ listed stocks. Trade the same tickers you'd find on traditional exchanges without holding the underlying.
Crypto | Major tokens and altcoins. BTC, ETH, and a growing list of pairs.
Commodities | Metals, energy, and agricultural commodities as perpetuals. Gold, silver, oil, and more.
Forex | Major and minor currency pairs.
Trading Hours
Markets follow schedules tied to their underlying.
Asset Class | Schedule
Crypto | Trades continuously, including through weekends
Single stocks | Regular, Pre-Market, Extended, and Overnight sessions Monday–Friday. Locked from Friday 8:00 PM ET to Sunday 8:00 PM ET
− Index & Commodity Futures | ES, NQ, RTY and commodities remain tradable through 5:00–6:00 PM ET CME maintenance. Locked from Friday 5:00 PM ET to Sunday 6:00 PM ET.
+ Index & Commodity Futures | Indices and commodities remain tradable through 5:00–6:00 PM ET CME maintenance. Locked from Friday 5:00 PM ET to Sunday 6:00 PM ET.
FX | Regular Hours Monday–Friday. Locked over the weekend.
Positions held into a weekend lock remain open. They cannot be adjusted, added to, or closed until the market resumes.
Leverage
Leverage is set per market and displayed on each market’s page. See Cross Margin & Leverage for the full table of Primary and Funded Account caps.
- Primary Accounts — up to 100x, market-dependent
- Funded Accounts — up to 50x, market-dependent
Higher exposure relative to account equity magnifies gains and losses relative to that equity. Changing leverage alone does not change dollar PnL for an unchanged position size. See Cross Margin & Leverage for details.
Fees
Maker fees are always 0 bps (0%) across all markets and trading sessions. Taker fees vary by market.
− ES, NQ and RTY carry a flat taker fee of 0.0025% (0.25 bps), in every session.
+ ES, NQ, RTY, and YM carry a flat taker fee of 0.0025% (0.25 bps), in every session.
A flat taker fee of 0.01% (1 bp) applies across all other markets, in every session. The same maker and taker rates apply to API transactions.
Finding Markets
Use the Markets tab in the platform to browse the full list, search by ticker or name, or filter by asset class. Add markets to your Watchlist for quick access from the trading view.
To browse live, visit next.vestmarkets.com/markets.
Restrictions on Funded Accounts
Vest Capital restrictions: XRP and HYPE are not available on Evaluation Accounts or Live Funded Accounts. API trading is not available on any Funded Account. All other listed markets trade normally.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Tradable AssetsNew page published.Oct 13
PremierE8 Markets Perps · Winter Arc promotion | E8 Markets Help CenterFree reset changed to free account for purchases made with promo code during promotion period.Oct 12
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Winter is here. Time to lock in.
Use code E8ARC at checkout and start your winter arc with us. Focus, build the reps, come out of it a sharper trader - plus an extra free account on top if you're able to secure payout.
Discount structure:
- Classic markets(E8 Signature/ E8 Pro/E8 One): 30% discount (All purchases) + ARC
- Perpetual futures (E8 Pro /E8 One): 50% discount (All purchases) + ARC
"ARC" structure (After Reward Challenge)
- When you buy an account with any of our codes between October 5 and October 25 and receive a payout, you will receive a free challenge. (You can receive 1 challenge per purchase.
- A free account is obtained after the first payout when it's approved by our team (same size, same rules, phase 1).
Section: "ARC" structure (After Reward Challenge)
− - You won't receive another free challenge on the bonus challenge. If you have purchased the account with a promo code during this period, you can get a free reset, even after the promo ends.
Discount code "E8ARC"
After
Winter is here. Time to lock in.
Use code E8ARC at checkout and start your winter arc with us. Focus, build the reps, come out of it a sharper trader - plus an extra free account on top if you're able to secure payout.
Discount structure:
- Classic markets(E8 Signature/ E8 Pro/E8 One): 30% discount (All purchases) + ARC
- Perpetual futures (E8 Pro /E8 One): 50% discount (All purchases) + ARC
"ARC" structure (After Reward Challenge)
- When you buy an account with any of our codes between October 5 and October 25 and receive a payout, you will receive a free challenge. (You can receive 1 challenge per purchase.
- A free account is obtained after the first payout when it's approved by our team (same size, same rules, phase 1).
Section: "ARC" structure (After Reward Challenge)
+ - You won't receive another free challenge on the bonus challenge. If you have purchased the account with a promo code during this period, you can get a free account, even after the promo ends.
Discount code "E8ARC"
Winter is here. Time to lock in.
Use code E8ARC at checkout and start your winter arc with us. Focus, build the reps, come out of it a sharper trader - plus an extra free account on top if you're able to secure payout.
Discount structure:
- Classic markets(E8 Signature/ E8 Pro/E8 One): 30% discount (All purchases) + ARC
- Perpetual futures (E8 Pro /E8 One): 50% discount (All purchases) + ARC
"ARC" structure (After Reward Challenge)
- When you buy an account with any of our codes between October 5 and October 25 and receive a payout, you will receive a free challenge. (You can receive 1 challenge per purchase.
- A free account is obtained after the first payout when it's approved by our team (same size, same rules, phase 1).
Section: "ARC" structure (After Reward Challenge)
− - You won't receive another free challenge on the bonus challenge. If you have purchased the account with a promo code during this period, you can get a free reset, even after the promo ends.
+ - You won't receive another free challenge on the bonus challenge. If you have purchased the account with a promo code during this period, you can get a free account, even after the promo ends.
Discount code "E8ARC"
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading SettingsRemoved Forex-specific default slider range (up to 1 lot) and Forex Position Sizing setting; updated Order Size Unit description to clarify futures-equivalent markets use separate setting; removed Forex Lot Slider Range setting row.Oct 12
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
chart and make sure Hide marks on bars is unchecked. That chart option does
not affect Trade Arrows.
Bid/Ask Lines is off by default. Turn it on to draw the best bid as a
dashed green line tagged Bid and the best ask as a dashed red line tagged
Ask, each with its price on the price scale. They follow the market's order
book as it updates. On very liquid markets
the spread is often smaller than one pixel at normal zoom, so the two lines can
look like a single line until you zoom in.
Order Defaults
Unless you have saved a different preference, new order tickets start with
Isolated margin, USD sizing for all markets, Percent TP/SL gain and
loss inputs, and Clear Size After Order enabled. The default slider ranges
− are up to 100% for order size, up to 1 lot for Forex, and **up to 10
− contracts** for futures-equivalent sizing. Your saved choices take precedence
− over these defaults.
Setting | Options | Effect
Margin Mode | Isolated or Cross | Sets the starting mode for a newly opened position. Existing positions keep their mode.
− Order Size Unit | USD or Asset | Sets the default quantity unit for non-Forex order tickets.
− Forex Position Sizing | USD or Lots | Sets how Forex order tickets express size. One standard lot is 100,000 base-currency units.
Futures-Equivalent Position Sizing | USD, Asset, Minis, or Micros | Sets how supported Oil, Gold, Silver, NAS100, and SP500 tickets express size, using CME/COMEX contract multipliers.
Order Size Slider Range | 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, or 100% | Sets the largest account-percentage shortcut shown for opening orders. Reduce-only orders still allow 100%.
− Forex Lot Slider Range | 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, or 100 lots | Sets the largest lot shortcut shown for opening Forex orders. You can still type another valid size.
Futures Contract Slider Range | 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, or 100 contracts | Sets the largest contract shortcut shown for supported index and commodity orders. Direct entry can exceed the chosen range.
TP/SL Gain and Loss Unit | Percent or USD | Changes how Take Profit and Stop Loss gain/loss inputs are displayed.
TP/SL Preset | Gain, Loss, and Percent or USD | Starts every order ticket with this Take Profit gain and Stop Loss loss. Leave both empty to turn the preset off.
Clear Size After Order | On or off | Clears quantity, including the size saved for that market, after an order is accepted to reduce accidental repeats.
TP/SL Preset
A TP/SL preset saves a gain and a loss, not prices. For example, a preset of
\$150 gain and \$50 loss fills the Gain and Loss fields on every market's
order ticket and turns on Take Profit / Stop Loss. When you enter a size,
the ticket calculates the Take Profit and Stop Loss prices that match those
amounts for that market, side, leverage, and entry price. Changing the size
recalculates them. A USD preset needs a size before it can show prices; a
Percent preset is a return on margin, so it can show prices before you enter a
ticket, labeled Long or Short, and size the order as a USD notional amount. Open
sizes default to values matched to the account's balance tier and remain
editable. Close buttons appear when you hold a position in the selected market
and send a reduce-only order on the opposing side for that share of the
position; the ticket then returns to the side you had selected. If the ticket
cannot place the order as it stands, such as a limit order with no price or one
that needs a review, the button fills the ticket instead so you can finish it
yourself. Select the edit icon beside Quick Size to change the open amounts
and close percentages. To hide Quick Size from the order ticket, turn off
Show Quick Size under Order Defaults. The choice follows your account
across devices.
Open amounts can also be set for one market at a time, in any unit the ticket
− offers for that market: the asset itself (such as 0.05 BTC), lots on Forex, or
− mini and micro contracts on supported index and commodity markets. In the Quick
Size editor, choose the market's Only option, pick a unit, and enter three
amounts. That market then uses those buttons on every venue, while all other
markets keep your USD amounts. Contract amounts are whole numbers. Choosing
All Markets for that market removes its own amounts. You can save amounts
for up to 50 markets. Review, change, or remove them under **Quick Size by
Market in Order Defaults**. These amounts also follow your account across
devices; the USD amounts and close percentages stay on the device where you set
them.
Order presets save a complete recipe: side, order type, size, leverage, margin
mode, attached Take Profit and Stop Loss, slippage, and reduce-only intent. Six
stable slots map to the number keys 1 through 6 on the trade page.
Order presets are in a limited early release and may not be available on your
After
chart and make sure Hide marks on bars is unchecked. That chart option does
not affect Trade Arrows.
Bid/Ask Lines is off by default. Turn it on to draw the best bid as a
dashed green line tagged Bid and the best ask as a dashed red line tagged
Ask, each with its price on the price scale. They follow the market's order
book as it updates. On very liquid markets
the spread is often smaller than one pixel at normal zoom, so the two lines can
look like a single line until you zoom in.
Order Defaults
Unless you have saved a different preference, new order tickets start with
Isolated margin, USD sizing for all markets, Percent TP/SL gain and
loss inputs, and Clear Size After Order enabled. The default slider ranges
+ are up to 100% for order size and up to 10 contracts for
+ futures-equivalent sizing. Your saved choices take precedence over these
+ defaults.
Setting | Options | Effect
Margin Mode | Isolated or Cross | Sets the starting mode for a newly opened position. Existing positions keep their mode.
+ Order Size Unit | USD or Asset | Sets the default quantity unit for order tickets. Futures-equivalent markets use the setting below.
Futures-Equivalent Position Sizing | USD, Asset, Minis, or Micros | Sets how supported Oil, Gold, Silver, NAS100, and SP500 tickets express size, using CME/COMEX contract multipliers.
Order Size Slider Range | 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, or 100% | Sets the largest account-percentage shortcut shown for opening orders. Reduce-only orders still allow 100%.
Futures Contract Slider Range | 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, or 100 contracts | Sets the largest contract shortcut shown for supported index and commodity orders. Direct entry can exceed the chosen range.
TP/SL Gain and Loss Unit | Percent or USD | Changes how Take Profit and Stop Loss gain/loss inputs are displayed.
TP/SL Preset | Gain, Loss, and Percent or USD | Starts every order ticket with this Take Profit gain and Stop Loss loss. Leave both empty to turn the preset off.
Clear Size After Order | On or off | Clears quantity, including the size saved for that market, after an order is accepted to reduce accidental repeats.
TP/SL Preset
A TP/SL preset saves a gain and a loss, not prices. For example, a preset of
\$150 gain and \$50 loss fills the Gain and Loss fields on every market's
order ticket and turns on Take Profit / Stop Loss. When you enter a size,
the ticket calculates the Take Profit and Stop Loss prices that match those
amounts for that market, side, leverage, and entry price. Changing the size
recalculates them. A USD preset needs a size before it can show prices; a
Percent preset is a return on margin, so it can show prices before you enter a
ticket, labeled Long or Short, and size the order as a USD notional amount. Open
sizes default to values matched to the account's balance tier and remain
editable. Close buttons appear when you hold a position in the selected market
and send a reduce-only order on the opposing side for that share of the
position; the ticket then returns to the side you had selected. If the ticket
cannot place the order as it stands, such as a limit order with no price or one
that needs a review, the button fills the ticket instead so you can finish it
yourself. Select the edit icon beside Quick Size to change the open amounts
and close percentages. To hide Quick Size from the order ticket, turn off
Show Quick Size under Order Defaults. The choice follows your account
across devices.
Open amounts can also be set for one market at a time, in any unit the ticket
+ offers for that market: the asset itself (such as 0.05 BTC, or 10,000 EUR on
+ EUR/USD) or mini and micro contracts on supported index and commodity markets. In the Quick
Size editor, choose the market's Only option, pick a unit, and enter three
amounts. That market then uses those buttons on every venue, while all other
markets keep your USD amounts. Contract amounts are whole numbers. Choosing
All Markets for that market removes its own amounts. You can save amounts
for up to 50 markets. Review, change, or remove them under **Quick Size by
Market in Order Defaults**. These amounts also follow your account across
devices; the USD amounts and close percentages stay on the device where you set
them.
Order presets save a complete recipe: side, order type, size, leverage, margin
mode, attached Take Profit and Stop Loss, slippage, and reduce-only intent. Six
stable slots map to the number keys 1 through 6 on the trade page.
Order presets are in a limited early release and may not be available on your
chart and make sure Hide marks on bars is unchecked. That chart option does
not affect Trade Arrows.
Bid/Ask Lines is off by default. Turn it on to draw the best bid as a
dashed green line tagged Bid and the best ask as a dashed red line tagged
Ask, each with its price on the price scale. They follow the market's order
book as it updates. On very liquid markets
the spread is often smaller than one pixel at normal zoom, so the two lines can
look like a single line until you zoom in.
Order Defaults
Unless you have saved a different preference, new order tickets start with
Isolated margin, USD sizing for all markets, Percent TP/SL gain and
loss inputs, and Clear Size After Order enabled. The default slider ranges
− are up to 100% for order size, up to 1 lot for Forex, and **up to 10
− contracts** for futures-equivalent sizing. Your saved choices take precedence
− over these defaults.
+ are up to 100% for order size and up to 10 contracts for
+ futures-equivalent sizing. Your saved choices take precedence over these
+ defaults.
Setting | Options | Effect
Margin Mode | Isolated or Cross | Sets the starting mode for a newly opened position. Existing positions keep their mode.
− Order Size Unit | USD or Asset | Sets the default quantity unit for non-Forex order tickets.
− Forex Position Sizing | USD or Lots | Sets how Forex order tickets express size. One standard lot is 100,000 base-currency units.
+ Order Size Unit | USD or Asset | Sets the default quantity unit for order tickets. Futures-equivalent markets use the setting below.
Futures-Equivalent Position Sizing | USD, Asset, Minis, or Micros | Sets how supported Oil, Gold, Silver, NAS100, and SP500 tickets express size, using CME/COMEX contract multipliers.
Order Size Slider Range | 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, or 100% | Sets the largest account-percentage shortcut shown for opening orders. Reduce-only orders still allow 100%.
− Forex Lot Slider Range | 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, or 100 lots | Sets the largest lot shortcut shown for opening Forex orders. You can still type another valid size.
Futures Contract Slider Range | 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, or 100 contracts | Sets the largest contract shortcut shown for supported index and commodity orders. Direct entry can exceed the chosen range.
TP/SL Gain and Loss Unit | Percent or USD | Changes how Take Profit and Stop Loss gain/loss inputs are displayed.
TP/SL Preset | Gain, Loss, and Percent or USD | Starts every order ticket with this Take Profit gain and Stop Loss loss. Leave both empty to turn the preset off.
Clear Size After Order | On or off | Clears quantity, including the size saved for that market, after an order is accepted to reduce accidental repeats.
TP/SL Preset
A TP/SL preset saves a gain and a loss, not prices. For example, a preset of
\$150 gain and \$50 loss fills the Gain and Loss fields on every market's
order ticket and turns on Take Profit / Stop Loss. When you enter a size,
the ticket calculates the Take Profit and Stop Loss prices that match those
amounts for that market, side, leverage, and entry price. Changing the size
recalculates them. A USD preset needs a size before it can show prices; a
Percent preset is a return on margin, so it can show prices before you enter a
ticket, labeled Long or Short, and size the order as a USD notional amount. Open
sizes default to values matched to the account's balance tier and remain
editable. Close buttons appear when you hold a position in the selected market
and send a reduce-only order on the opposing side for that share of the
position; the ticket then returns to the side you had selected. If the ticket
cannot place the order as it stands, such as a limit order with no price or one
that needs a review, the button fills the ticket instead so you can finish it
yourself. Select the edit icon beside Quick Size to change the open amounts
and close percentages. To hide Quick Size from the order ticket, turn off
Show Quick Size under Order Defaults. The choice follows your account
across devices.
Open amounts can also be set for one market at a time, in any unit the ticket
− offers for that market: the asset itself (such as 0.05 BTC), lots on Forex, or
− mini and micro contracts on supported index and commodity markets. In the Quick
+ offers for that market: the asset itself (such as 0.05 BTC, or 10,000 EUR on
+ EUR/USD) or mini and micro contracts on supported index and commodity markets. In the Quick
Size editor, choose the market's Only option, pick a unit, and enter three
amounts. That market then uses those buttons on every venue, while all other
markets keep your USD amounts. Contract amounts are whole numbers. Choosing
All Markets for that market removes its own amounts. You can save amounts
for up to 50 markets. Review, change, or remove them under **Quick Size by
Market in Order Defaults**. These amounts also follow your account across
devices; the USD amounts and close percentages stay on the device where you set
them.
Order presets save a complete recipe: side, order type, size, leverage, margin
mode, attached Take Profit and Stop Loss, slippage, and reduce-only intent. Six
stable slots map to the number keys 1 through 6 on the trade page.
Order presets are in a limited early release and may not be available on your
PremierMyFundedPerps · Troubleshooting and FAQElite 3% DLL accounts now follow daily loss limit reset; added daily loss limit options to Elite account features; removed Elite purchase limit details.Oct 12
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/troubleshooting-and-faq
Find commission rates, daily reset times, and payout options, and diagnose common trading, account, and billing problems.
Start with the message shown in the app. MyFundedPerps attaches a specific
reason or support reference when an operation cannot be completed.
What are the trading commissions?
Commissions are execution fees on each fill, including entry and exit. The rate
is 0.03% for crypto, 0.0025% for forex, and 0.005% for stocks, commodities, and
indices. Maker and taker rates are the same. Read
Commissions and Fees for examples and the
separate hourly swap fees.
What time does the daily loss limit reset?
At 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time, with daylight saving time applied.
− Elite has none. Read Daily Loss Reset Time
for UTC equivalents and what the reset changes.
What time do payout requests reset?
Each funded account's daily request allowance resets at **12:00 a.m.
(midnight) New York time**. Elite accounts have no daily limit. A pending
request must finish before another can be submitted. Read Daily Payout Window
for the full rules.
Where are the Elite rules?
− Elite has its own sizes, prices, static loss limit, leverage and exposure caps,
− purchase and funded allocation limits, and payout minimums. Read
Elite Accounts.
Is there a lifetime payout limit?
Yes. Each user may receive a maximum of \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts
across all MyFundedPerps accounts. This limit applies to the actual payout
amount received after the profit split. Purchasing new accounts or resetting
existing accounts does not reset the lifetime cap. Read
Lifetime Payout Cap.
Can I redeem a payout for store credit?
Yes. You can convert all or part of a funded payout to store credit with a
10% boost. Converting \$100 grants \$110 in store credit when the payout is
paid. That credit cannot be withdrawn as cash and expires 45 days after it is
added. Read
files within the size accepted by the uploader.
App installation is unavailable
Install support depends on the browser and device. On iPhone or iPad, use the
in-app instructions to add MyFundedPerps to the Home Screen. Other browsers
may show a native install prompt or an install action in their own menu.
Checkout says I reached a purchase limit
Purchases are limited to 30 in any rolling 24 hours, 75 in any rolling 7 days,
and 200 in any rolling 30 days across all plans and payment methods. The notice
on the checkout page names the window you reached and the time you can
purchase again; no payment was taken. Wait until that time, then try again.
Read Buying a Challenge for
how the rolling windows work.
− Elite orders also count toward the \$200,000 Elite purchase limit. If an Elite
− order would exceed it, the notice shows how much Elite account size remains.
− Read Elite purchase limit.
A purchase or invoice is missing
Open Purchase History,
clear search and status filters, and load older rows if needed. Invoices appear
only on purchases for which the invoice action is available. Pending, failed,
and refunded orders remain visible with their current status.
Still need help?
Open Support. Before You Contact Us
shows the published FAQ first. Search the questions and answers, filter by topic,
and expand answers in place. You can also browse the full
FAQ.
If you still need help, use Message Support below the FAQ to contact our
team. Select View Conversations to return to your Intercom conversations.
After
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/troubleshooting-and-faq
Find commission rates, daily reset times, and payout options, and diagnose common trading, account, and billing problems.
Start with the message shown in the app. MyFundedPerps attaches a specific
reason or support reference when an operation cannot be completed.
What are the trading commissions?
Commissions are execution fees on each fill, including entry and exit. The rate
is 0.03% for crypto, 0.0025% for forex, and 0.005% for stocks, commodities, and
indices. Maker and taker rates are the same. Read
Commissions and Fees for examples and the
separate hourly swap fees.
What time does the daily loss limit reset?
At 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time, with daylight saving time applied.
+ Elite 3% DLL accounts follow it; No DLL accounts have none. Read Daily Loss Reset Time
for UTC equivalents and what the reset changes.
What time do payout requests reset?
Each funded account's daily request allowance resets at **12:00 a.m.
(midnight) New York time**. Elite accounts have no daily limit. A pending
request must finish before another can be submitted. Read Daily Payout Window
for the full rules.
Where are the Elite rules?
+ Elite has its own sizes, prices, daily loss limit options, static loss limit,
+ leverage and exposure caps, funded allocation limit, and payout minimums. Read
Elite Accounts.
Is there a lifetime payout limit?
Yes. Each user may receive a maximum of \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts
across all MyFundedPerps accounts. This limit applies to the actual payout
amount received after the profit split. Purchasing new accounts or resetting
existing accounts does not reset the lifetime cap. Read
Lifetime Payout Cap.
Can I redeem a payout for store credit?
Yes. You can convert all or part of a funded payout to store credit with a
10% boost. Converting \$100 grants \$110 in store credit when the payout is
paid. That credit cannot be withdrawn as cash and expires 45 days after it is
added. Read
files within the size accepted by the uploader.
App installation is unavailable
Install support depends on the browser and device. On iPhone or iPad, use the
in-app instructions to add MyFundedPerps to the Home Screen. Other browsers
may show a native install prompt or an install action in their own menu.
Checkout says I reached a purchase limit
Purchases are limited to 30 in any rolling 24 hours, 75 in any rolling 7 days,
and 200 in any rolling 30 days across all plans and payment methods. The notice
on the checkout page names the window you reached and the time you can
purchase again; no payment was taken. Wait until that time, then try again.
Read Buying a Challenge for
how the rolling windows work.
A purchase or invoice is missing
Open Purchase History,
clear search and status filters, and load older rows if needed. Invoices appear
only on purchases for which the invoice action is available. Pending, failed,
and refunded orders remain visible with their current status.
Still need help?
Open Support. Before You Contact Us
shows the published FAQ first. Search the questions and answers, filter by topic,
and expand answers in place. You can also browse the full
FAQ.
If you still need help, use Message Support below the FAQ to contact our
team. Select View Conversations to return to your Intercom conversations.
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/troubleshooting-and-faq
Find commission rates, daily reset times, and payout options, and diagnose common trading, account, and billing problems.
Start with the message shown in the app. MyFundedPerps attaches a specific
reason or support reference when an operation cannot be completed.
What are the trading commissions?
Commissions are execution fees on each fill, including entry and exit. The rate
is 0.03% for crypto, 0.0025% for forex, and 0.005% for stocks, commodities, and
indices. Maker and taker rates are the same. Read
Commissions and Fees for examples and the
separate hourly swap fees.
What time does the daily loss limit reset?
At 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time, with daylight saving time applied.
− Elite has none. Read Daily Loss Reset Time
+ Elite 3% DLL accounts follow it; No DLL accounts have none. Read Daily Loss Reset Time
for UTC equivalents and what the reset changes.
What time do payout requests reset?
Each funded account's daily request allowance resets at **12:00 a.m.
(midnight) New York time**. Elite accounts have no daily limit. A pending
request must finish before another can be submitted. Read Daily Payout Window
for the full rules.
Where are the Elite rules?
− Elite has its own sizes, prices, static loss limit, leverage and exposure caps,
− purchase and funded allocation limits, and payout minimums. Read
+ Elite has its own sizes, prices, daily loss limit options, static loss limit,
+ leverage and exposure caps, funded allocation limit, and payout minimums. Read
Elite Accounts.
Is there a lifetime payout limit?
Yes. Each user may receive a maximum of \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts
across all MyFundedPerps accounts. This limit applies to the actual payout
amount received after the profit split. Purchasing new accounts or resetting
existing accounts does not reset the lifetime cap. Read
Lifetime Payout Cap.
Can I redeem a payout for store credit?
Yes. You can convert all or part of a funded payout to store credit with a
10% boost. Converting \$100 grants \$110 in store credit when the payout is
paid. That credit cannot be withdrawn as cash and expires 45 days after it is
added. Read
files within the size accepted by the uploader.
App installation is unavailable
Install support depends on the browser and device. On iPhone or iPad, use the
in-app instructions to add MyFundedPerps to the Home Screen. Other browsers
may show a native install prompt or an install action in their own menu.
Checkout says I reached a purchase limit
Purchases are limited to 30 in any rolling 24 hours, 75 in any rolling 7 days,
and 200 in any rolling 30 days across all plans and payment methods. The notice
on the checkout page names the window you reached and the time you can
purchase again; no payment was taken. Wait until that time, then try again.
Read Buying a Challenge for
how the rolling windows work.
− Elite orders also count toward the \$200,000 Elite purchase limit. If an Elite
− order would exceed it, the notice shows how much Elite account size remains.
− Read Elite purchase limit.
A purchase or invoice is missing
Open Purchase History,
clear search and status filters, and load older rows if needed. Invoices appear
only on purchases for which the invoice action is available. Pending, failed,
and refunded orders remain visible with their current status.
Still need help?
Open Support. Before You Contact Us
shows the published FAQ first. Search the questions and answers, filter by topic,
and expand answers in place. You can also browse the full
FAQ.
If you still need help, use Message Support below the FAQ to contact our
team. Select View Conversations to return to your Intercom conversations.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading GuideClarified that Forex asset units are base currency units equivalent to standard lots.Oct 12
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
limit orders fill at exactly the limit price once both the opposing top of
book and the mark reference reach it. A limit placed through the market fills as a market order under this same
schedule, never worse than its limit.
Understand trading fees
Commissions apply to each fill's notional when you enter or exit a position.
Maker and taker fills use the same rate within each asset class. Open positions
also incur an hourly swap fee.
Elite accounts pay reduced rates on NAS100,
SP500, Gold, and WTI Oil only.
Read Commissions and Fees for the rate tables,
entry and exit examples, and how hourly holding costs are calculated.
Size the order
− You can start order tickets in USD or asset units. Forex markets can also use
− standard lots, where one lot represents 100,000 base-currency units. The size
− slider range changes the shortcuts shown in the ticket; it does not prevent you
− from typing another otherwise-valid size.
For USD sizing, Estimated Size shows the corresponding asset quantity and
symbol, rounded to the market's supported size increment. Margin Required
appears for every sizing unit and shows the estimated additional margin needed
for the order, excluding the separately listed fees. It shows zero when the
order only releases margin, and is highlighted when it exceeds your available
balance. These estimates update with the ticket and are checked again at execution.
Each market remembers the size you last entered on its ticket, in the unit
you entered it, so switching to another market and back, or reloading the
page, keeps it. The size is saved in this browser only. Reduce-only sizes are
not saved. With Clear Size After Order on, an accepted order also clears
the saved size for that market.
The percentage slider's maximum reflects the smaller of the size your
After
limit orders fill at exactly the limit price once both the opposing top of
book and the mark reference reach it. A limit placed through the market fills as a market order under this same
schedule, never worse than its limit.
Understand trading fees
Commissions apply to each fill's notional when you enter or exit a position.
Maker and taker fills use the same rate within each asset class. Open positions
also incur an hourly swap fee.
Elite accounts pay reduced rates on NAS100,
SP500, Gold, and WTI Oil only.
Read Commissions and Fees for the rate tables,
entry and exit examples, and how hourly holding costs are calculated.
Size the order
+ You can start order tickets in USD or asset units. On Forex markets, asset
+ units are the base currency, so 100,000 EUR on EUR/USD is the same exposure as
+ one standard lot. The size slider range changes the shortcuts shown in the
+ ticket; it does not prevent you from typing another otherwise-valid size.
For USD sizing, Estimated Size shows the corresponding asset quantity and
symbol, rounded to the market's supported size increment. Margin Required
appears for every sizing unit and shows the estimated additional margin needed
for the order, excluding the separately listed fees. It shows zero when the
order only releases margin, and is highlighted when it exceeds your available
balance. These estimates update with the ticket and are checked again at execution.
Each market remembers the size you last entered on its ticket, in the unit
you entered it, so switching to another market and back, or reloading the
page, keeps it. The size is saved in this browser only. Reduce-only sizes are
not saved. With Clear Size After Order on, an accepted order also clears
the saved size for that market.
The percentage slider's maximum reflects the smaller of the size your
limit orders fill at exactly the limit price once both the opposing top of
book and the mark reference reach it. A limit placed through the market fills as a market order under this same
schedule, never worse than its limit.
Understand trading fees
Commissions apply to each fill's notional when you enter or exit a position.
Maker and taker fills use the same rate within each asset class. Open positions
also incur an hourly swap fee.
Elite accounts pay reduced rates on NAS100,
SP500, Gold, and WTI Oil only.
Read Commissions and Fees for the rate tables,
entry and exit examples, and how hourly holding costs are calculated.
Size the order
− You can start order tickets in USD or asset units. Forex markets can also use
− standard lots, where one lot represents 100,000 base-currency units. The size
− slider range changes the shortcuts shown in the ticket; it does not prevent you
− from typing another otherwise-valid size.
+ You can start order tickets in USD or asset units. On Forex markets, asset
+ units are the base currency, so 100,000 EUR on EUR/USD is the same exposure as
+ one standard lot. The size slider range changes the shortcuts shown in the
+ ticket; it does not prevent you from typing another otherwise-valid size.
For USD sizing, Estimated Size shows the corresponding asset quantity and
symbol, rounded to the market's supported size increment. Margin Required
appears for every sizing unit and shows the estimated additional margin needed
for the order, excluding the separately listed fees. It shows zero when the
order only releases margin, and is highlighted when it exceeds your available
balance. These estimates update with the ticket and are checked again at execution.
Each market remembers the size you last entered on its ticket, in the unit
you entered it, so switching to another market and back, or reloading the
page, keeps it. The size is saved in this browser only. Reduce-only sizes are
not saved. With Clear Size After Order on, an accepted order also clears
the saved size for that market.
The percentage slider's maximum reflects the smaller of the size your
PremierMyFundedPerps · GuidesElite plan rules and purchase limits replaced with plan sizes and daily loss limit options.Oct 12
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Task-oriented guides for starting, trading, completing challenges, using copy trading, and solving common problems.
Use these guides to buy a challenge, place trades, manage risk, and resolve
common problems. For a field-by-field explanation of account preferences, use
the Settings reference.
Go from sign-in to your first simulated trade.
Place and manage orders, set exits, and configure risk controls.
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand shared
limits.
Check execution commissions, entry and exit examples, and hourly swap fees.
Estimate position size, drawdown, holding costs, and payout splits with
clearly defined scenarios.
Read your plan terms and understand account progression.
− Elite plan rules, purchase limits, boosted leverage, and payouts.
Follow purchase, evaluation, funding, payouts, billing, and rewards from
start to finish.
Coordinate trades across challenge accounts you own.
Diagnose common trading, settings, copy, and billing problems.
Look up trading and MyFundedPerps terminology.
After
Task-oriented guides for starting, trading, completing challenges, using copy trading, and solving common problems.
Use these guides to buy a challenge, place trades, manage risk, and resolve
common problems. For a field-by-field explanation of account preferences, use
the Settings reference.
Go from sign-in to your first simulated trade.
Place and manage orders, set exits, and configure risk controls.
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand shared
limits.
Check execution commissions, entry and exit examples, and hourly swap fees.
Estimate position size, drawdown, holding costs, and payout splits with
clearly defined scenarios.
Read your plan terms and understand account progression.
+ Elite plan sizes, daily loss limit options, boosted leverage, and payouts.
Follow purchase, evaluation, funding, payouts, billing, and rewards from
start to finish.
Coordinate trades across challenge accounts you own.
Diagnose common trading, settings, copy, and billing problems.
Look up trading and MyFundedPerps terminology.
Task-oriented guides for starting, trading, completing challenges, using copy trading, and solving common problems.
Use these guides to buy a challenge, place trades, manage risk, and resolve
common problems. For a field-by-field explanation of account preferences, use
the Settings reference.
Go from sign-in to your first simulated trade.
Place and manage orders, set exits, and configure risk controls.
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand shared
limits.
Check execution commissions, entry and exit examples, and hourly swap fees.
Estimate position size, drawdown, holding costs, and payout splits with
clearly defined scenarios.
Read your plan terms and understand account progression.
− Elite plan rules, purchase limits, boosted leverage, and payouts.
+ Elite plan sizes, daily loss limit options, boosted leverage, and payouts.
Follow purchase, evaluation, funding, payouts, billing, and rewards from
start to finish.
Coordinate trades across challenge accounts you own.
Diagnose common trading, settings, copy, and billing problems.
Look up trading and MyFundedPerps terminology.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Elite AccountsElite accounts added $50K size, introduced 3% DLL and No DLL pricing options, adjusted pricing and daily loss limits, and removed separate purchase limit section.Oct 12
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
− Elite plan sizes and prices, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, purchase and funded allocation limits, and payouts.
− Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no daily loss
− limit, no consistency rule, and boosted leverage on indices, gold, and oil. It
− comes in \$5K, \$10K, and \$25K account sizes. Passing leads to a Sim Funded
− Elite account with the same rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
Elite Perps tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
− Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K
− Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000
− One-time price | \$100 | \$200 | \$500
− Price per \$1,000 of account size | \$20 | \$20 | \$20
− Evaluations at the purchase limit | 40 | 20 | 8
− Cost of a full purchase limit | \$4,000 | \$4,000 | \$4,000
− Funded accounts at the funded cap | 20 | 10 | 4
These are list prices. Checkout shows the current price and any discount before
− you pay. The two count rows assume every account is the same size; see
− Purchase limit and
− Funded allocation for mixed sizes.
Elite prize accounts
Elite accounts can also be won in giveaways. A won Elite account follows the
− same Elite rules as a bought account of its size. Giveaways can also award a
\$1K Elite account, which cannot be bought. On a \$1K Elite account the profit
target is \$100, the maximum loss limit is \$50, and the minimum payout
request is \$250 before the split.
Evaluation rules
− Rule | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K
− Profit target (10%) | \$500 | \$1,000 | \$2,500
− Maximum loss limit (5%) | \$250 | \$500 | \$1,250
− Static loss threshold | \$4,750 | \$9,500 | \$23,750
− Drawdown model | Static | Static | Static
− Daily loss limit | None | None | None
− Consistency rule | None | None | None
The profit target and the maximum loss limit (MLL) use account equity,
including open-position profit or loss. There is no minimum trading-day count
or evaluation time limit.
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, gold, and oil. Each cap is a
multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
− Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure
− NAS100, SP500 | 40x | \$200,000 | \$400,000 | \$1,000,000
− Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000
− Oil (CL, BRENTOIL) | 10x | \$50,000 | \$100,000 | \$250,000
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, and CL and BRENTOIL share the
oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD market count toward the
gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
starting balance.
- Every other market keeps its normal maximum leverage, shown on the
Market Exposure Caps page.
- Market exposure caps still apply on top of
the Elite caps. Each Elite account has its own market exposure cap: your
other Elite accounts of the same size do not share or use up its capacity.
The order ticket shows the limit for the selected market as **Account
Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Elite commission per fill | Elite daily swap rate | Standard commission | Standard daily swap rate
NAS100, SP500 | 0.001% | 0.01% | 0.005% | 0.015%
Gold, WTI Oil | 0.001% | 0.015% | 0.005% | 0.015%
- On a \$10,000 fill in NAS100, SP500, Gold, or WTI Oil, the Elite commission
is \$0.10 instead of \$0.50.
- A NAS100 or SP500 position worth \$10,000 pays \$1.00 in swap fees over 24
hourly charges, instead of \$1.50.
- Every other market, including other indices, other commodities such as
silver and Brent, crypto, forex, and stocks, uses the standard rates.
Read Commissions and Fees for how commissions
and hourly swap fees are calculated.
− Purchase limit
− Each customer can buy up to \$200,000 of Elite evaluation allocation in
− total. Allocation is the sum of the starting account sizes you buy, not the
− fees you pay or the account's equity. The limit is shared across all three
− sizes in any mix, rather than applying to each size separately. For example:
− - 40 × \$5K, 20 × \$10K, or 8 × \$25K each reach the limit exactly.
− - 4 × \$25K, 5 × \$10K, and 10 × \$5K also total \$200,000.
− - After 8 × \$25K, a ninth Elite evaluation of any size is blocked.
− Paid and refunded orders count toward the limit. A payment that is still in
− progress reserves its allocation for up to 30 minutes; a failed or abandoned
− payment releases it. Passing, failing, or closing an evaluation does not
− release allocation, and the limit does not reset over time. If an order would
− go over the limit, checkout shows how much Elite allocation remains and takes
− no payment.
− One order can include up to 10 accounts at \$5K or \$10K, or up to 4 at \$25K.
− The general purchase limits
also apply.
Sim Funded
Passing the evaluation leads to a Sim Funded Elite account. It keeps the same
rules as the evaluation, without the profit target:
- the same starting balance;
- the same 5% static MLL and loss threshold, which does not move after a
withdrawal;
- the same leverage and exposure caps;
− - no daily loss limit and no consistency rule.
Sim Funded accounts use simulated capital and simulated execution, like every
funded account.
High-impact news restriction
The high-impact news restriction applies to Sim Funded Elite accounts. During
the evaluation, news trading is not restricted.
Time from the release | What you can do
More than 10 minutes before | Trade normally. A position already open can be held through the release.
10 minutes to 2 minutes before | No new exposure in the affected market: no new positions, no adding, and no reversing.
2 minutes before to 2 minutes after | No manual trades of any kind. Close or reduce a position before this window if you want to be flat.
Restricted events are every event classified as high impact (red folder) on
the economic calendar, including FOMC decisions and statements, CPI, PPI,
Non-Farm Payrolls, GDP, Retail Sales, employment reports, PCE inflation, and
ECB, BOE, and BOJ rate decisions. For individual stocks and equity perpetuals,
the company's earnings announcements are restricted too. Read the full policy
in the FAQ under
Is news trading allowed on funded?.
Profit from trades that break the restriction can be excluded during payout
review.
No Live stage
Elite has no Live stage and no promotion to live trading. Elite accounts
remain Sim Funded.
Funded allocation
Each customer can hold up to **\$100,000 of active Sim Funded Elite
allocation**, summed by the original starting size of each funded Elite
− account across all three sizes. That allows 20 × \$5K, 10 × \$10K, 4 × \$25K, or
− any mix that totals \$100,000 or less. Profits, losses, and withdrawals do not
change the allocation an account uses. A funded account that fails or is
closed stops using allocation.
Elite is its own model type, so Elite allocation also counts toward the
\$300K maximum funded allocation
across all models.
− The purchase limit is twice the funded cap, so you can pass more Elite
evaluations than can be funded at once. When a passed evaluation would take
your Elite funded allocation above \$100,000, or your total above \$300,000,
it keeps its Passed status and enters Funding Review after identity
verification and agreement signing, instead of being funded automatically.
Review does not guarantee funding, and any approval must still fit within both
limits. See Becoming Funded.
Payouts
− Payout term | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K
− Profit split | 80% you, 20% firm | 80% you, 20% firm | 80% you, 20% firm
− When you can request | On demand | On demand | On demand
− Profit you can request | All profit | All profit | All profit
− Minimum, before the split | \$50 | \$100 | \$250
− Minimum you receive | \$40 | \$80 | \$200
- On demand: you can request from your first day funded. Elite has no
waiting period, minimum trading days, consistency requirement, or profit
target before a request, and no daily request limit: you can request again
as soon as your previous request finishes. The account must be flat with no
pending request. See Payouts.
- Requesting is not payment: every request is reviewed, and trading on the
account is locked while it is pending. Review and delivery take time, so a
request does not mean an immediate transfer.
- All profit: you can request all of the profit in the current payout
cycle. Profit you leave in the account when a payout is approved becomes a
balance buffer and cannot be withdrawn later.
- Minimum: the minimum is measured before the split, as the gross amount
deducted from the account. On \$25K, a \$250 gross minimum pays you \$200.
− - No 90/10 upgrade: Elite uses the 80/20 split only.
Payouts remain subject to plan terms, eligibility, and review.
Withdrawals and your loss cushion
A payout deducts its full gross amount from the balance, which reduces the room
above the loss threshold by the same amount. The threshold itself does not
move.
For example, an Elite \$25K account at \$27,000 equity with no open positions
has \$2,000 of profit and \$3,250 of room above its \$23,750 threshold.
− Requesting all of it deducts \$2,000 gross and pays you \$1,600. The balance
returns to \$25,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, and the room above it
returns to the original \$1,250.
Select, Prime, and Signature work differently: their loss threshold locks to
the starting balance on the first withdrawal. Elite never has that lock.
Lifetime payout cap
Elite payouts count toward the
\$100,000 lifetime payout cap
per user, combined across every plan and counted after the profit split. This
is separate from the \$100,000 Elite funded allocation cap: the payout cap
limits the money you can receive, while the funded cap limits the total
starting size of your active Sim Funded Elite accounts.
After
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
+ Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
+ Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
+ rule, and boosted leverage on indices, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
+ \$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
+ which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
+ daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
+ rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
Elite Perps tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
+ Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
+ Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000
+ One-time price, 3% DLL | \$49 | \$95 | \$249 | \$495
+ One-time price, No DLL | \$89 | \$175 | \$449 | \$889
+ With 90/10 upgrade, 3% DLL | \$59 | \$114 | \$299 | \$594
+ With 90/10 upgrade, No DLL | \$107 | \$210 | \$539 | \$1,067
+ Funded accounts at the funded cap | 20 | 10 | 4 | 2
These are list prices. Checkout shows the current price and any discount before
+ you pay. The 90/10 upgrade is optional and chosen at checkout; its rows show the
+ total price with the upgrade. The funded count row assumes every account is the
+ same size; see Funded allocation for mixed sizes.
+ There is no limit on the total Elite account size you can buy. You can buy any
+ number and mix of Elite sizes and options, within the per-order and rolling
+ purchase limits
+ that apply to every plan. Only funded Elite accounts are capped; see
+ Funded allocation.
+ DLL options
+ Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at checkout. The two options
+ are identical except for the daily loss limit:
+ Option | Daily loss limit | Everything else
+ 3% DLL | 3% of starting balance, measured from the day's starting equity | Same Elite rules on this page
+ No DLL | None | Same Elite rules on this page
+ A 3% DLL account follows the same 3% rule as Select, Prime, and Signature:
+ - The floor is the day's starting equity, including open-position profit or
+ loss, minus 3% of the starting balance. On an Elite \$50K account the
+ allowance is \$1,500.
+ - Equity that reaches the floor breaches the account, fails it, and closes its
+ positions.
+ - The day boundary matches the other plans; see
+ Challenges and Rules.
+ - The rule applies in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages, together with
+ the static maximum loss limit.
+ The option is part of the account you buy. You cannot add or remove the daily
+ loss limit after purchase.
Elite prize accounts
Elite accounts can also be won in giveaways. A won Elite account follows the
+ same Elite rules as a bought No DLL account of its size, with no daily loss
+ limit. Giveaways can also award a
\$1K Elite account, which cannot be bought. On a \$1K Elite account the profit
target is \$100, the maximum loss limit is \$50, and the minimum payout
request is \$250 before the split.
Evaluation rules
+ Rule | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
+ Profit target (10%) | \$500 | \$1,000 | \$2,500 | \$5,000
+ Maximum loss limit (5%) | \$250 | \$500 | \$1,250 | \$2,500
+ Static loss threshold | \$4,750 | \$9,500 | \$23,750 | \$47,500
+ Drawdown model | Static | Static | Static | Static
+ Daily loss limit, 3% DLL | \$150 | \$300 | \$750 | \$1,500
+ Daily loss limit, No DLL | None | None | None | None
+ Consistency rule | None | None | None | None
The profit target and the maximum loss limit (MLL) use account equity,
including open-position profit or loss. There is no minimum trading-day count
or evaluation time limit.
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, gold, and oil. Each cap is a
multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
+ Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure
+ NAS100, SP500 | 40x | \$200,000 | \$400,000 | \$1,000,000 | \$2,000,000
+ Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000
+ Oil (CL, BRENTOIL) | 10x | \$50,000 | \$100,000 | \$250,000 | \$500,000
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, and CL and BRENTOIL share the
oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD market count toward the
gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
starting balance.
- Every other market keeps its normal maximum leverage, shown on the
Market Exposure Caps page.
- Market exposure caps still apply on top of
the Elite caps. Each Elite account has its own market exposure cap: your
other Elite accounts of the same size do not share or use up its capacity.
The order ticket shows the limit for the selected market as **Account
Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Elite commission per fill | Elite daily swap rate | Standard commission | Standard daily swap rate
NAS100, SP500 | 0.001% | 0.01% | 0.005% | 0.015%
Gold, WTI Oil | 0.001% | 0.015% | 0.005% | 0.015%
- On a \$10,000 fill in NAS100, SP500, Gold, or WTI Oil, the Elite commission
is \$0.10 instead of \$0.50.
- A NAS100 or SP500 position worth \$10,000 pays \$1.00 in swap fees over 24
hourly charges, instead of \$1.50.
- Every other market, including other indices, other commodities such as
silver and Brent, crypto, forex, and stocks, uses the standard rates.
Read Commissions and Fees for how commissions
and hourly swap fees are calculated.
+ Accounts per order
+ One order can include up to 10 accounts at \$5K or \$10K, up to 4 at \$25K, or
+ up to 2 at \$50K, all of the same size and option. The general
+ purchase limits
also apply.
Sim Funded
Passing the evaluation leads to a Sim Funded Elite account. It keeps the same
rules as the evaluation, without the profit target:
- the same starting balance;
- the same 5% static MLL and loss threshold, which does not move after a
withdrawal;
- the same leverage and exposure caps;
+ - the same daily loss limit option: a 3% daily loss limit on a 3% DLL
+ account, or none on a No DLL account;
+ - no consistency rule.
Sim Funded accounts use simulated capital and simulated execution, like every
funded account.
High-impact news restriction
The high-impact news restriction applies to Sim Funded Elite accounts. During
the evaluation, news trading is not restricted.
Time from the release | What you can do
More than 10 minutes before | Trade normally. A position already open can be held through the release.
10 minutes to 2 minutes before | No new exposure in the affected market: no new positions, no adding, and no reversing.
2 minutes before to 2 minutes after | No manual trades of any kind. Close or reduce a position before this window if you want to be flat.
Restricted events are every event classified as high impact (red folder) on
the economic calendar, including FOMC decisions and statements, CPI, PPI,
Non-Farm Payrolls, GDP, Retail Sales, employment reports, PCE inflation, and
ECB, BOE, and BOJ rate decisions. For individual stocks and equity perpetuals,
the company's earnings announcements are restricted too. Read the full policy
in the FAQ under
Is news trading allowed on funded?.
Profit from trades that break the restriction can be excluded during payout
review.
No Live stage
Elite has no Live stage and no promotion to live trading. Elite accounts
remain Sim Funded.
Funded allocation
Each customer can hold up to **\$100,000 of active Sim Funded Elite
allocation**, summed by the original starting size of each funded Elite
+ account across every size and both options. That allows 20 × \$5K,
+ 10 × \$10K, 4 × \$25K, 2 × \$50K, or any mix that totals \$100,000 or less. Profits, losses, and withdrawals do not
change the allocation an account uses. A funded account that fails or is
closed stops using allocation.
Elite is its own model type, so Elite allocation also counts toward the
\$300K maximum funded allocation
across all models.
+ Elite purchases have no total size limit, so you can pass more Elite
evaluations than can be funded at once. When a passed evaluation would take
your Elite funded allocation above \$100,000, or your total above \$300,000,
it keeps its Passed status and enters Funding Review after identity
verification and agreement signing, instead of being funded automatically.
Review does not guarantee funding, and any approval must still fit within both
limits. See Becoming Funded.
Payouts
+ Payout term | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
+ Profit split | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10
+ When you can request | On demand | On demand | On demand | On demand
+ Profit you can request | All profit | All profit | All profit | All profit
+ Minimum, before the split | \$50 | \$100 | \$250 | \$500
+ Minimum you receive | \$40 (\$45 on 90/10) | \$80 (\$90 on 90/10) | \$200 (\$225 on 90/10) | \$400 (\$450 on 90/10)
+ These payout terms are the same for the 3% DLL and No DLL options. The split is
+ 80% to you and 20% to MyFundedPerps, or 90% to you with the 90/10 upgrade.
- On demand: you can request from your first day funded. Elite has no
waiting period, minimum trading days, consistency requirement, or profit
target before a request, and no daily request limit: you can request again
as soon as your previous request finishes. The account must be flat with no
pending request. See Payouts.
- Requesting is not payment: every request is reviewed, and trading on the
account is locked while it is pending. Review and delivery take time, so a
request does not mean an immediate transfer.
- All profit: you can request all of the profit in the current payout
cycle. Profit you leave in the account when a payout is approved becomes a
balance buffer and cannot be withdrawn later.
- Minimum: the minimum is measured before the split, as the gross amount
deducted from the account. On \$25K, a \$250 gross minimum pays you \$200.
+ - 90/10 upgrade: choose it at checkout to receive 90% of each payout
+ instead of 80%. It is part of the account you buy and cannot be added to an
+ existing account.
Payouts remain subject to plan terms, eligibility, and review.
Withdrawals and your loss cushion
A payout deducts its full gross amount from the balance, which reduces the room
above the loss threshold by the same amount. The threshold itself does not
move.
For example, an Elite \$25K account at \$27,000 equity with no open positions
has \$2,000 of profit and \$3,250 of room above its \$23,750 threshold.
+ Requesting all of it deducts \$2,000 gross and pays you \$1,600 (\$1,800 with
+ the 90/10 upgrade). The balance
returns to \$25,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, and the room above it
returns to the original \$1,250.
Select, Prime, and Signature work differently: their loss threshold locks to
the starting balance on the first withdrawal. Elite never has that lock.
Lifetime payout cap
Elite payouts count toward the
\$100,000 lifetime payout cap
per user, combined across every plan and counted after the profit split. This
is separate from the \$100,000 Elite funded allocation cap: the payout cap
limits the money you can receive, while the funded cap limits the total
starting size of your active Sim Funded Elite accounts.
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
− Elite plan sizes and prices, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, purchase and funded allocation limits, and payouts.
− Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no daily loss
− limit, no consistency rule, and boosted leverage on indices, gold, and oil. It
− comes in \$5K, \$10K, and \$25K account sizes. Passing leads to a Sim Funded
− Elite account with the same rules. Open the
+ Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
+ Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
+ rule, and boosted leverage on indices, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
+ \$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
+ which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
+ daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
+ rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
Elite Perps tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
− Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K
− Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000
− One-time price | \$100 | \$200 | \$500
− Price per \$1,000 of account size | \$20 | \$20 | \$20
− Evaluations at the purchase limit | 40 | 20 | 8
− Cost of a full purchase limit | \$4,000 | \$4,000 | \$4,000
− Funded accounts at the funded cap | 20 | 10 | 4
+ Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
+ Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000
+ One-time price, 3% DLL | \$49 | \$95 | \$249 | \$495
+ One-time price, No DLL | \$89 | \$175 | \$449 | \$889
+ With 90/10 upgrade, 3% DLL | \$59 | \$114 | \$299 | \$594
+ With 90/10 upgrade, No DLL | \$107 | \$210 | \$539 | \$1,067
+ Funded accounts at the funded cap | 20 | 10 | 4 | 2
These are list prices. Checkout shows the current price and any discount before
− you pay. The two count rows assume every account is the same size; see
− Purchase limit and
− Funded allocation for mixed sizes.
+ you pay. The 90/10 upgrade is optional and chosen at checkout; its rows show the
+ total price with the upgrade. The funded count row assumes every account is the
+ same size; see Funded allocation for mixed sizes.
+ There is no limit on the total Elite account size you can buy. You can buy any
+ number and mix of Elite sizes and options, within the per-order and rolling
+ purchase limits
+ that apply to every plan. Only funded Elite accounts are capped; see
+ Funded allocation.
+ DLL options
+ Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at checkout. The two options
+ are identical except for the daily loss limit:
+ Option | Daily loss limit | Everything else
+ 3% DLL | 3% of starting balance, measured from the day's starting equity | Same Elite rules on this page
+ No DLL | None | Same Elite rules on this page
+ A 3% DLL account follows the same 3% rule as Select, Prime, and Signature:
+ - The floor is the day's starting equity, including open-position profit or
+ loss, minus 3% of the starting balance. On an Elite \$50K account the
+ allowance is \$1,500.
+ - Equity that reaches the floor breaches the account, fails it, and closes its
+ positions.
+ - The day boundary matches the other plans; see
+ Challenges and Rules.
+ - The rule applies in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages, together with
+ the static maximum loss limit.
+ The option is part of the account you buy. You cannot add or remove the daily
+ loss limit after purchase.
Elite prize accounts
Elite accounts can also be won in giveaways. A won Elite account follows the
− same Elite rules as a bought account of its size. Giveaways can also award a
+ same Elite rules as a bought No DLL account of its size, with no daily loss
+ limit. Giveaways can also award a
\$1K Elite account, which cannot be bought. On a \$1K Elite account the profit
target is \$100, the maximum loss limit is \$50, and the minimum payout
request is \$250 before the split.
Evaluation rules
− Rule | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K
− Profit target (10%) | \$500 | \$1,000 | \$2,500
− Maximum loss limit (5%) | \$250 | \$500 | \$1,250
− Static loss threshold | \$4,750 | \$9,500 | \$23,750
− Drawdown model | Static | Static | Static
− Daily loss limit | None | None | None
− Consistency rule | None | None | None
+ Rule | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
+ Profit target (10%) | \$500 | \$1,000 | \$2,500 | \$5,000
+ Maximum loss limit (5%) | \$250 | \$500 | \$1,250 | \$2,500
+ Static loss threshold | \$4,750 | \$9,500 | \$23,750 | \$47,500
+ Drawdown model | Static | Static | Static | Static
+ Daily loss limit, 3% DLL | \$150 | \$300 | \$750 | \$1,500
+ Daily loss limit, No DLL | None | None | None | None
+ Consistency rule | None | None | None | None
The profit target and the maximum loss limit (MLL) use account equity,
including open-position profit or loss. There is no minimum trading-day count
or evaluation time limit.
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, gold, and oil. Each cap is a
multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
− Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure
− NAS100, SP500 | 40x | \$200,000 | \$400,000 | \$1,000,000
− Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000
− Oil (CL, BRENTOIL) | 10x | \$50,000 | \$100,000 | \$250,000
+ Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure
+ NAS100, SP500 | 40x | \$200,000 | \$400,000 | \$1,000,000 | \$2,000,000
+ Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000
+ Oil (CL, BRENTOIL) | 10x | \$50,000 | \$100,000 | \$250,000 | \$500,000
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, and CL and BRENTOIL share the
oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD market count toward the
gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
starting balance.
- Every other market keeps its normal maximum leverage, shown on the
Market Exposure Caps page.
- Market exposure caps still apply on top of
the Elite caps. Each Elite account has its own market exposure cap: your
other Elite accounts of the same size do not share or use up its capacity.
The order ticket shows the limit for the selected market as **Account
Sim Funded stages:
Markets | Elite commission per fill | Elite daily swap rate | Standard commission | Standard daily swap rate
NAS100, SP500 | 0.001% | 0.01% | 0.005% | 0.015%
Gold, WTI Oil | 0.001% | 0.015% | 0.005% | 0.015%
- On a \$10,000 fill in NAS100, SP500, Gold, or WTI Oil, the Elite commission
is \$0.10 instead of \$0.50.
- A NAS100 or SP500 position worth \$10,000 pays \$1.00 in swap fees over 24
hourly charges, instead of \$1.50.
- Every other market, including other indices, other commodities such as
silver and Brent, crypto, forex, and stocks, uses the standard rates.
Read Commissions and Fees for how commissions
and hourly swap fees are calculated.
− Purchase limit
− Each customer can buy up to \$200,000 of Elite evaluation allocation in
− total. Allocation is the sum of the starting account sizes you buy, not the
− fees you pay or the account's equity. The limit is shared across all three
− sizes in any mix, rather than applying to each size separately. For example:
− - 40 × \$5K, 20 × \$10K, or 8 × \$25K each reach the limit exactly.
− - 4 × \$25K, 5 × \$10K, and 10 × \$5K also total \$200,000.
− - After 8 × \$25K, a ninth Elite evaluation of any size is blocked.
− Paid and refunded orders count toward the limit. A payment that is still in
− progress reserves its allocation for up to 30 minutes; a failed or abandoned
− payment releases it. Passing, failing, or closing an evaluation does not
− release allocation, and the limit does not reset over time. If an order would
− go over the limit, checkout shows how much Elite allocation remains and takes
− no payment.
− One order can include up to 10 accounts at \$5K or \$10K, or up to 4 at \$25K.
− The general purchase limits
+ Accounts per order
+ One order can include up to 10 accounts at \$5K or \$10K, up to 4 at \$25K, or
+ up to 2 at \$50K, all of the same size and option. The general
+ purchase limits
also apply.
Sim Funded
Passing the evaluation leads to a Sim Funded Elite account. It keeps the same
rules as the evaluation, without the profit target:
- the same starting balance;
- the same 5% static MLL and loss threshold, which does not move after a
withdrawal;
- the same leverage and exposure caps;
− - no daily loss limit and no consistency rule.
+ - the same daily loss limit option: a 3% daily loss limit on a 3% DLL
+ account, or none on a No DLL account;
+ - no consistency rule.
Sim Funded accounts use simulated capital and simulated execution, like every
funded account.
High-impact news restriction
The high-impact news restriction applies to Sim Funded Elite accounts. During
the evaluation, news trading is not restricted.
Time from the release | What you can do
More than 10 minutes before | Trade normally. A position already open can be held through the release.
10 minutes to 2 minutes before | No new exposure in the affected market: no new positions, no adding, and no reversing.
2 minutes before to 2 minutes after | No manual trades of any kind. Close or reduce a position before this window if you want to be flat.
Restricted events are every event classified as high impact (red folder) on
the economic calendar, including FOMC decisions and statements, CPI, PPI,
Non-Farm Payrolls, GDP, Retail Sales, employment reports, PCE inflation, and
ECB, BOE, and BOJ rate decisions. For individual stocks and equity perpetuals,
the company's earnings announcements are restricted too. Read the full policy
in the FAQ under
Is news trading allowed on funded?.
Profit from trades that break the restriction can be excluded during payout
review.
No Live stage
Elite has no Live stage and no promotion to live trading. Elite accounts
remain Sim Funded.
Funded allocation
Each customer can hold up to **\$100,000 of active Sim Funded Elite
allocation**, summed by the original starting size of each funded Elite
− account across all three sizes. That allows 20 × \$5K, 10 × \$10K, 4 × \$25K, or
− any mix that totals \$100,000 or less. Profits, losses, and withdrawals do not
+ account across every size and both options. That allows 20 × \$5K,
+ 10 × \$10K, 4 × \$25K, 2 × \$50K, or any mix that totals \$100,000 or less. Profits, losses, and withdrawals do not
change the allocation an account uses. A funded account that fails or is
closed stops using allocation.
Elite is its own model type, so Elite allocation also counts toward the
\$300K maximum funded allocation
across all models.
− The purchase limit is twice the funded cap, so you can pass more Elite
+ Elite purchases have no total size limit, so you can pass more Elite
evaluations than can be funded at once. When a passed evaluation would take
your Elite funded allocation above \$100,000, or your total above \$300,000,
it keeps its Passed status and enters Funding Review after identity
verification and agreement signing, instead of being funded automatically.
Review does not guarantee funding, and any approval must still fit within both
limits. See Becoming Funded.
Payouts
− Payout term | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K
− Profit split | 80% you, 20% firm | 80% you, 20% firm | 80% you, 20% firm
− When you can request | On demand | On demand | On demand
− Profit you can request | All profit | All profit | All profit
− Minimum, before the split | \$50 | \$100 | \$250
− Minimum you receive | \$40 | \$80 | \$200
+ Payout term | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K
+ Profit split | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10
+ When you can request | On demand | On demand | On demand | On demand
+ Profit you can request | All profit | All profit | All profit | All profit
+ Minimum, before the split | \$50 | \$100 | \$250 | \$500
+ Minimum you receive | \$40 (\$45 on 90/10) | \$80 (\$90 on 90/10) | \$200 (\$225 on 90/10) | \$400 (\$450 on 90/10)
+ These payout terms are the same for the 3% DLL and No DLL options. The split is
+ 80% to you and 20% to MyFundedPerps, or 90% to you with the 90/10 upgrade.
- On demand: you can request from your first day funded. Elite has no
waiting period, minimum trading days, consistency requirement, or profit
target before a request, and no daily request limit: you can request again
as soon as your previous request finishes. The account must be flat with no
pending request. See Payouts.
- Requesting is not payment: every request is reviewed, and trading on the
account is locked while it is pending. Review and delivery take time, so a
request does not mean an immediate transfer.
- All profit: you can request all of the profit in the current payout
cycle. Profit you leave in the account when a payout is approved becomes a
balance buffer and cannot be withdrawn later.
- Minimum: the minimum is measured before the split, as the gross amount
deducted from the account. On \$25K, a \$250 gross minimum pays you \$200.
− - No 90/10 upgrade: Elite uses the 80/20 split only.
+ - 90/10 upgrade: choose it at checkout to receive 90% of each payout
+ instead of 80%. It is part of the account you buy and cannot be added to an
+ existing account.
Payouts remain subject to plan terms, eligibility, and review.
Withdrawals and your loss cushion
A payout deducts its full gross amount from the balance, which reduces the room
above the loss threshold by the same amount. The threshold itself does not
move.
For example, an Elite \$25K account at \$27,000 equity with no open positions
has \$2,000 of profit and \$3,250 of room above its \$23,750 threshold.
− Requesting all of it deducts \$2,000 gross and pays you \$1,600. The balance
+ Requesting all of it deducts \$2,000 gross and pays you \$1,600 (\$1,800 with
+ the 90/10 upgrade). The balance
returns to \$25,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, and the room above it
returns to the original \$1,250.
Select, Prime, and Signature work differently: their loss threshold locks to
the starting balance on the first withdrawal. Elite never has that lock.
Lifetime payout cap
Elite payouts count toward the
\$100,000 lifetime payout cap
per user, combined across every plan and counted after the profit split. This
is separate from the \$100,000 Elite funded allocation cap: the payout cap
limits the money you can receive, while the funded cap limits the total
starting size of your active Sim Funded Elite accounts.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Challenges and RulesElite now offers a choice between 3% daily loss limit or no daily loss limit at purchase, and a new Elite account size of $50K was added.Oct 12
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Challenges and Rules
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenges-and-rules
Understand evaluation stages, profit targets, loss and drawdown rules, account states, funded progression, and payout-specific requirements.
Every sold challenge is a 1-Step evaluation. Select, Prime, and Signature use
one profit target, a 3% daily loss limit, and static maximum drawdown. Elite
− uses one profit target and static maximum drawdown with no daily loss limit,
− and has its own leverage, exposure, allocation, and payout terms; see
Elite Accounts. There is no minimum trading-day count
or evaluation time limit. All percentages use starting balance, never current
equity.
Evaluation rules
Plan | Profit target | Daily loss limit | Static maximum drawdown
1-Step Select | 9% | 3% | 3%
1-Step Prime | 12% | 3% | 5%
1-Step Signature | 10% | 3% | 6%
− Elite | 10% | None | 5%
The profit target and loss rules use account equity, including
open-position profit or loss. On plans with a daily loss limit, daily loss is
measured from start-of-day equity at midnight America/New_York, including
daylight saving time, with a dollar allowance of 3% of starting balance.
Select prize accounts
\$1K and \$2.5K Select accounts are prizes from giveaways and promotions. They
cannot be bought. They follow the 1-Step Select rules above. On a \$2.5K
account, for example, the profit target is \$2,725 and the drawdown floor is
\$2,425. Funded payouts on these accounts use a 90/10 split and are paid
entirely as store credit. See
Payouts for
their minimum request.
Daily loss reset time
− On Select, Prime, and Signature, the daily loss limit resets at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time
(America/New_York) every day. This is **04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight
Time (EDT) and 05:00 UTC during Eastern Standard Time (EST)**. The reset
follows New York's daylight saving changes, so it is not a fixed UTC time.
The new trading day's equity, including open-position profit or loss, becomes
the daily-loss reference. The dollar loss allowance remains a percentage of
starting balance. A daily reset does not reopen a failed account or reset the
maximum loss limit.
Static drawdown and the withdrawal lock
The initial MLL floor is starting balance minus the static drawdown allowance.
It does not follow intraday or end-of-day highs. On the first withdrawal from
a Select, Prime, or Signature funded account, the floor locks permanently to
starting balance. It never moves again, including after later withdrawals.
either limit enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement
completion instead of receiving automatic funding.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
Another \$100K Prime account requires Funding Review.
See Becoming Funded.
Funded accounts and payouts
The dashboard's Constraints panel shows Payout Rules only for funded accounts.
Evaluation and other non-funded accounts show their applicable trading rules
without the Payout Rules section.
A funded account can submit one payout request per Eastern calendar day, except
on Elite, which has no daily limit. The
minimum is \$100 before the profit split (\$80 to the trader on 80/20, or \$90
− on 90/10). Elite minimums are \$50, \$100, and \$250 before the split on its
− \$5K, \$10K, and \$25K sizes; see Elite Accounts.
A rejected request restores the allowance, and submitted requests
cannot be cancelled. Each account has its own allowance, even when one trader holds
several accounts.
Each user can receive at most \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts, combined
across all accounts and model types and counted after the profit split. New
purchases and resets do not reset this cap. Read
Lifetime Payout Cap.
Payout requests require a flat account and temporarily lock trading while the
request is pending. Read Payouts for the
window, gross deduction, and the permanent MLL lock on Select, Prime, and
Signature.
Read the Challenge Lifecycle for the steps from
After
Challenges and Rules
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenges-and-rules
Understand evaluation stages, profit targets, loss and drawdown rules, account states, funded progression, and payout-specific requirements.
Every sold challenge is a 1-Step evaluation. Select, Prime, and Signature use
one profit target, a 3% daily loss limit, and static maximum drawdown. Elite
+ uses one profit target and static maximum drawdown, with a choice of a 3% daily
+ loss limit (3% DLL) or no daily loss limit (No DLL) when you buy, and has its
+ own leverage, exposure, allocation, and payout terms; see
Elite Accounts. There is no minimum trading-day count
or evaluation time limit. All percentages use starting balance, never current
equity.
Evaluation rules
Plan | Profit target | Daily loss limit | Static maximum drawdown
1-Step Select | 9% | 3% | 3%
1-Step Prime | 12% | 3% | 5%
1-Step Signature | 10% | 3% | 6%
+ Elite, 3% DLL | 10% | 3% | 5%
+ Elite, No DLL | 10% | None | 5%
The profit target and loss rules use account equity, including
open-position profit or loss. On plans with a daily loss limit, daily loss is
measured from start-of-day equity at midnight America/New_York, including
daylight saving time, with a dollar allowance of 3% of starting balance.
Select prize accounts
\$1K and \$2.5K Select accounts are prizes from giveaways and promotions. They
cannot be bought. They follow the 1-Step Select rules above. On a \$2.5K
account, for example, the profit target is \$2,725 and the drawdown floor is
\$2,425. Funded payouts on these accounts use a 90/10 split and are paid
entirely as store credit. See
Payouts for
their minimum request.
Daily loss reset time
+ On Select, Prime, Signature, and 3% DLL Elite accounts, the daily loss limit resets at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time
(America/New_York) every day. This is **04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight
Time (EDT) and 05:00 UTC during Eastern Standard Time (EST)**. The reset
follows New York's daylight saving changes, so it is not a fixed UTC time.
The new trading day's equity, including open-position profit or loss, becomes
the daily-loss reference. The dollar loss allowance remains a percentage of
starting balance. A daily reset does not reopen a failed account or reset the
maximum loss limit.
Static drawdown and the withdrawal lock
The initial MLL floor is starting balance minus the static drawdown allowance.
It does not follow intraday or end-of-day highs. On the first withdrawal from
a Select, Prime, or Signature funded account, the floor locks permanently to
starting balance. It never moves again, including after later withdrawals.
either limit enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement
completion instead of receiving automatic funding.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
Another \$100K Prime account requires Funding Review.
See Becoming Funded.
Funded accounts and payouts
The dashboard's Constraints panel shows Payout Rules only for funded accounts.
Evaluation and other non-funded accounts show their applicable trading rules
without the Payout Rules section.
A funded account can submit one payout request per Eastern calendar day, except
on Elite, which has no daily limit. The
minimum is \$100 before the profit split (\$80 to the trader on 80/20, or \$90
+ on 90/10). Elite minimums are \$50, \$100, \$250, and \$500 before the split
+ on its \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and \$50K sizes; see Elite Accounts.
A rejected request restores the allowance, and submitted requests
cannot be cancelled. Each account has its own allowance, even when one trader holds
several accounts.
Each user can receive at most \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts, combined
across all accounts and model types and counted after the profit split. New
purchases and resets do not reset this cap. Read
Lifetime Payout Cap.
Payout requests require a flat account and temporarily lock trading while the
request is pending. Read Payouts for the
window, gross deduction, and the permanent MLL lock on Select, Prime, and
Signature.
Read the Challenge Lifecycle for the steps from
Challenges and Rules
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenges-and-rules
Understand evaluation stages, profit targets, loss and drawdown rules, account states, funded progression, and payout-specific requirements.
Every sold challenge is a 1-Step evaluation. Select, Prime, and Signature use
one profit target, a 3% daily loss limit, and static maximum drawdown. Elite
− uses one profit target and static maximum drawdown with no daily loss limit,
− and has its own leverage, exposure, allocation, and payout terms; see
+ uses one profit target and static maximum drawdown, with a choice of a 3% daily
+ loss limit (3% DLL) or no daily loss limit (No DLL) when you buy, and has its
+ own leverage, exposure, allocation, and payout terms; see
Elite Accounts. There is no minimum trading-day count
or evaluation time limit. All percentages use starting balance, never current
equity.
Evaluation rules
Plan | Profit target | Daily loss limit | Static maximum drawdown
1-Step Select | 9% | 3% | 3%
1-Step Prime | 12% | 3% | 5%
1-Step Signature | 10% | 3% | 6%
− Elite | 10% | None | 5%
+ Elite, 3% DLL | 10% | 3% | 5%
+ Elite, No DLL | 10% | None | 5%
The profit target and loss rules use account equity, including
open-position profit or loss. On plans with a daily loss limit, daily loss is
measured from start-of-day equity at midnight America/New_York, including
daylight saving time, with a dollar allowance of 3% of starting balance.
Select prize accounts
\$1K and \$2.5K Select accounts are prizes from giveaways and promotions. They
cannot be bought. They follow the 1-Step Select rules above. On a \$2.5K
account, for example, the profit target is \$2,725 and the drawdown floor is
\$2,425. Funded payouts on these accounts use a 90/10 split and are paid
entirely as store credit. See
Payouts for
their minimum request.
Daily loss reset time
− On Select, Prime, and Signature, the daily loss limit resets at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time
+ On Select, Prime, Signature, and 3% DLL Elite accounts, the daily loss limit resets at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time
(America/New_York) every day. This is **04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight
Time (EDT) and 05:00 UTC during Eastern Standard Time (EST)**. The reset
follows New York's daylight saving changes, so it is not a fixed UTC time.
The new trading day's equity, including open-position profit or loss, becomes
the daily-loss reference. The dollar loss allowance remains a percentage of
starting balance. A daily reset does not reopen a failed account or reset the
maximum loss limit.
Static drawdown and the withdrawal lock
The initial MLL floor is starting balance minus the static drawdown allowance.
It does not follow intraday or end-of-day highs. On the first withdrawal from
a Select, Prime, or Signature funded account, the floor locks permanently to
starting balance. It never moves again, including after later withdrawals.
either limit enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement
completion instead of receiving automatic funding.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
Another \$100K Prime account requires Funding Review.
See Becoming Funded.
Funded accounts and payouts
The dashboard's Constraints panel shows Payout Rules only for funded accounts.
Evaluation and other non-funded accounts show their applicable trading rules
without the Payout Rules section.
A funded account can submit one payout request per Eastern calendar day, except
on Elite, which has no daily limit. The
minimum is \$100 before the profit split (\$80 to the trader on 80/20, or \$90
− on 90/10). Elite minimums are \$50, \$100, and \$250 before the split on its
− \$5K, \$10K, and \$25K sizes; see Elite Accounts.
+ on 90/10). Elite minimums are \$50, \$100, \$250, and \$500 before the split
+ on its \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and \$50K sizes; see Elite Accounts.
A rejected request restores the allowance, and submitted requests
cannot be cancelled. Each account has its own allowance, even when one trader holds
several accounts.
Each user can receive at most \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts, combined
across all accounts and model types and counted after the profit split. New
purchases and resets do not reset this cap. Read
Lifetime Payout Cap.
Payout requests require a flat account and temporarily lock trading while the
request is pending. Read Payouts for the
window, gross deduction, and the permanent MLL lock on Select, Prime, and
Signature.
Read the Challenge Lifecycle for the steps from
PremierMyFundedPerps · PayoutsElite accounts now offer 90/10 split option with upgrade, and added $50K account tier with corresponding payouts.Oct 12
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
before you can submit another one.
Submitted requests cannot be cancelled. If a request is rejected, that day's
allowance is restored, so you can submit a new request right away once all
eligibility gates are clear. Review and delivery can take longer than the
request window.
Minimum and profit split
On Select, Prime, and Signature, the minimum is **\$100 of gross profit before
the split**. This pays \$80 with an 80/20 split or \$90 with a 90/10 split. The request form accepts your net share
and shows the gross account deduction before you confirm.
\$1K and \$2.5K Select prize accounts use their own terms: a 90/10 profit split
and a minimum request of \$30 on \$1K or \$50 on \$2.5K. Payout Terms on
the account shows the split and minimum that apply.
− Elite accounts use an 80/20 split and a minimum of 1% of the account size
− before the split: \$50 on \$5K, \$100 on \$10K, and \$250 on \$25K
− (\$40, \$80, and \$200 to you). See
Elite Accounts.
Select, Prime, Signature, and Elite have no minimum trading-day or
qualifying-day requirement, consistency gate, or payout count cap per account.
The lifetime payout cap below still applies.
Lifetime payout cap
Each user can receive at most \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts across
all MyFundedPerps accounts. The cap is per user, combined across every
account and model type (Select, Prime, Signature, and Elite), not per account.
The cap counts the payout amount you actually receive after the profit split,
not the gross amount deducted from the account. Purchasing new accounts or
resetting existing accounts does not reset it.
The lifetime cap is separate from the per-request rules on this page. The
After
before you can submit another one.
Submitted requests cannot be cancelled. If a request is rejected, that day's
allowance is restored, so you can submit a new request right away once all
eligibility gates are clear. Review and delivery can take longer than the
request window.
Minimum and profit split
On Select, Prime, and Signature, the minimum is **\$100 of gross profit before
the split**. This pays \$80 with an 80/20 split or \$90 with a 90/10 split. The request form accepts your net share
and shows the gross account deduction before you confirm.
\$1K and \$2.5K Select prize accounts use their own terms: a 90/10 profit split
and a minimum request of \$30 on \$1K or \$50 on \$2.5K. Payout Terms on
the account shows the split and minimum that apply.
+ Elite accounts use an 80/20 split, or 90/10 with the upgrade, and a minimum of
+ 1% of the account size before the split: \$50 on \$5K, \$100 on \$10K,
+ \$250 on \$25K, and \$500 on \$50K (\$40, \$80, \$200, and \$400 to you
+ on 80/20, or \$45, \$90, \$225, and \$450 on 90/10). See
Elite Accounts.
Select, Prime, Signature, and Elite have no minimum trading-day or
qualifying-day requirement, consistency gate, or payout count cap per account.
The lifetime payout cap below still applies.
Lifetime payout cap
Each user can receive at most \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts across
all MyFundedPerps accounts. The cap is per user, combined across every
account and model type (Select, Prime, Signature, and Elite), not per account.
The cap counts the payout amount you actually receive after the profit split,
not the gross amount deducted from the account. Purchasing new accounts or
resetting existing accounts does not reset it.
The lifetime cap is separate from the per-request rules on this page. The
before you can submit another one.
Submitted requests cannot be cancelled. If a request is rejected, that day's
allowance is restored, so you can submit a new request right away once all
eligibility gates are clear. Review and delivery can take longer than the
request window.
Minimum and profit split
On Select, Prime, and Signature, the minimum is **\$100 of gross profit before
the split**. This pays \$80 with an 80/20 split or \$90 with a 90/10 split. The request form accepts your net share
and shows the gross account deduction before you confirm.
\$1K and \$2.5K Select prize accounts use their own terms: a 90/10 profit split
and a minimum request of \$30 on \$1K or \$50 on \$2.5K. Payout Terms on
the account shows the split and minimum that apply.
− Elite accounts use an 80/20 split and a minimum of 1% of the account size
− before the split: \$50 on \$5K, \$100 on \$10K, and \$250 on \$25K
− (\$40, \$80, and \$200 to you). See
+ Elite accounts use an 80/20 split, or 90/10 with the upgrade, and a minimum of
+ 1% of the account size before the split: \$50 on \$5K, \$100 on \$10K,
+ \$250 on \$25K, and \$500 on \$50K (\$40, \$80, \$200, and \$400 to you
+ on 80/20, or \$45, \$90, \$225, and \$450 on 90/10). See
Elite Accounts.
Select, Prime, Signature, and Elite have no minimum trading-day or
qualifying-day requirement, consistency gate, or payout count cap per account.
The lifetime payout cap below still applies.
Lifetime payout cap
Each user can receive at most \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts across
all MyFundedPerps accounts. The cap is per user, combined across every
account and model type (Select, Prime, Signature, and Elite), not per account.
The cap counts the payout amount you actually receive after the profit split,
not the gross amount deducted from the account. Purchasing new accounts or
resetting existing accounts does not reset it.
The lifetime cap is separate from the per-request rules on this page. The
PremierMyFundedPerps · Evaluation ProgressSelect, Prime, and Signature daily loss limit unchanged at 3%; Elite accounts now differentiated by DLL option availability.Oct 12
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Read the dashboard, track pass requirements, complete a 1-Step evaluation, and understand when an account passes.
Select the correct account
Use the account switcher on the
dashboard or
trading workspace. Confirm the account
number, evaluation stage, and active status before placing an
order.
Each evaluation account keeps its own balance, positions, orders, progress,
and rule history.
Read the Pass Progress Card
The dashboard's Pass Progress card combines the requirements for the selected
account. Every evaluation has one profit target and a static maximum drawdown.
− Select, Prime, and Signature also have a 3% daily loss limit; Elite has none
(see Elite Accounts). There is no minimum trading-day count or deadline
for reaching the profit target, but every evaluation must record an executed
trade at least once every 30 consecutive calendar days (the 30-Day
Inactivity Rule). See
Inactivity rules.
The dashboard marks each requirement as clear, partial, pending, warning, or
failed. Open profit and loss count toward account equity and rule headroom.
Reaching the profit target does not cancel the loss limits or other pass
requirements. Keep every requirement clear until the account is recorded as
passed.
Monitor rule headroom
Use the rule card and equity chart to watch the effective daily-loss and
After
Read the dashboard, track pass requirements, complete a 1-Step evaluation, and understand when an account passes.
Select the correct account
Use the account switcher on the
dashboard or
trading workspace. Confirm the account
number, evaluation stage, and active status before placing an
order.
Each evaluation account keeps its own balance, positions, orders, progress,
and rule history.
Read the Pass Progress Card
The dashboard's Pass Progress card combines the requirements for the selected
account. Every evaluation has one profit target and a static maximum drawdown.
+ Select, Prime, and Signature also have a 3% daily loss limit. Elite accounts
+ bought with the 3% DLL option have the same 3% daily loss limit, and No DLL
+ Elite accounts have none
(see Elite Accounts). There is no minimum trading-day count or deadline
for reaching the profit target, but every evaluation must record an executed
trade at least once every 30 consecutive calendar days (the 30-Day
Inactivity Rule). See
Inactivity rules.
The dashboard marks each requirement as clear, partial, pending, warning, or
failed. Open profit and loss count toward account equity and rule headroom.
Reaching the profit target does not cancel the loss limits or other pass
requirements. Keep every requirement clear until the account is recorded as
passed.
Monitor rule headroom
Use the rule card and equity chart to watch the effective daily-loss and
Read the dashboard, track pass requirements, complete a 1-Step evaluation, and understand when an account passes.
Select the correct account
Use the account switcher on the
dashboard or
trading workspace. Confirm the account
number, evaluation stage, and active status before placing an
order.
Each evaluation account keeps its own balance, positions, orders, progress,
and rule history.
Read the Pass Progress Card
The dashboard's Pass Progress card combines the requirements for the selected
account. Every evaluation has one profit target and a static maximum drawdown.
− Select, Prime, and Signature also have a 3% daily loss limit; Elite has none
+ Select, Prime, and Signature also have a 3% daily loss limit. Elite accounts
+ bought with the 3% DLL option have the same 3% daily loss limit, and No DLL
+ Elite accounts have none
(see Elite Accounts). There is no minimum trading-day count or deadline
for reaching the profit target, but every evaluation must record an executed
trade at least once every 30 consecutive calendar days (the 30-Day
Inactivity Rule). See
Inactivity rules.
The dashboard marks each requirement as clear, partial, pending, warning, or
failed. Open profit and loss count toward account equity and rule headroom.
Reaching the profit target does not cancel the loss limits or other pass
requirements. Keep every requirement clear until the account is recorded as
passed.
Monitor rule headroom
Use the rule card and equity chart to watch the effective daily-loss and
PremierMyFundedPerps · Buying a ChallengeElite account sizes expanded to include $50K, pricing changed across all tiers with new 3% DLL and No DLL options, purchase limit removed, and 90/10 upgrade now available on Elite.Oct 12
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Buying a Challenge
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/buying-a-challenge
Compare challenge terms, complete checkout, understand payment states, and find the evaluation account after purchase.
1. Compare the plan terms
Open the challenge selector. Select a
plan and account size, then review the complete order summary before checkout.
Every plan is a 1-Step evaluation. Select, Prime, and Signature each offer
− \$10K, \$25K, \$50K, and \$100K accounts. Elite offers \$5K, \$10K, and \$25K
− accounts at list prices of \$100, \$200, and \$500, with a \$200,000 limit on the total Elite account size each customer
− can buy; see Elite Accounts. \$200K
accounts are not available at checkout.
The homepage shows whole-dollar prices. When PERPS is available, the cards
show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate @CODE link takes priority at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. Without either, checkout may automatically apply PERPS when the offer is enabled for you. Otherwise, enter a code and select Add Code. A valid code
discounts the list price once, including the 90/10 upgrade. There is no additional catalog discount. A percentage discount on a
whole-dollar total rounds down to the nearest whole dollar, so the discounted
price on a homepage card is the amount you pay and you never get less than
the stated percentage off.
The percentage comes from the current PERPS offer and can change with public
promotions. A different discount or affiliate code replaces PERPS; percentage discounts do
not stack. Available store credit is applied automatically after the discount.
A custom price that includes cents, or a discounted total under \$1, keeps
its exact cents, which checkout shows in full. The final order total is the
amount you will pay.
PERPS can give a larger discount on your first purchase. The homepage cards
and banner show that first-purchase discount until you have bought an account,
then the standard PERPS discount. A refunded purchase still uses up the first-purchase
discount. Affiliate codes share the same first-purchase discount: on your first
purchase, an affiliate code gives you whichever is larger, the first-purchase
discount or the affiliate's standard discount. A promotion that applies to the
affiliate code uses its own discount instead.
Before email verification and profile setup, an affiliate-link visit shows the
selected code and the price before discounts. The code stays selected through
sign-in, and checkout validates its discount and eligibility afterward. Other
visits preview the current standing-code discount, including any selected
profit-split upgrade. The collapsed summary shows the same price as the expanded
summary. Use Back at the left of the checkout header, beside the logo,
to return to the challenge selector. This is a public price preview; enter the
code at payment and review the confirmed total.
Checkout shows the chosen plan and account size as the item in your order,
with its collector card, fee, and rules, beside the billing and payment form.
Use the Account Size control to move between the sizes the plan sells,
and the Challenge Type control to switch plans, without leaving checkout.
\$100K | 1
Changing to a size with a lower limit reduces the number of accounts to that
limit. The order is one payment for every account in it:
- The fee, any profit-split upgrade, and the total reflect every account.
A discount or affiliate code applies once to the whole order, and
store credit is applied to the order total.
- Promotions that require a minimum purchase amount count the whole order
total after discounts. For example, two accounts that total more than a
promotion's threshold qualify even when one account alone would not.
- Winning trade offers apply only to an order for one account.
- A promotion that includes a reward case gives one case for each account in
the order, up to any per-customer limit the promotion has.
- Each account is a separate evaluation with its own account number, rules,
and progress. All of them appear in the dashboard account switcher after
payment.
Use the Trading Calculators to compare scenarios
before buying. Their example inputs and optional rules do not define the
terms of the challenge you select.
Challenge cards show “Up to 90%” when the optional profit-split upgrade is
available. Select the info icon beside the split to see the standard share and
upgrade terms. The upgrade costs extra; the displayed challenge price does not
include it.
The standard profit split is 80% to you and 20% to MyFundedPerps. You can choose
− the 90/10 upgrade only during checkout, and Elite does not offer it. It cannot be added to an existing
account. Each size and plan has an explicit upgrade price; use the final total
shown at checkout rather than calculating a percentage surcharge yourself.
Funded allocation before you buy
The maximum is \$300K total funded allocation, with a maximum of **\$100K
per model type** across active funded accounts. Elite is its own model type.
− Its \$200,000 purchase limit is higher than its \$100K funded limit, so you can
− pass more Elite evaluations than can be funded at once. Buying or passing
another
challenge does not guarantee automatic funding. An account that would exceed
either limit enters Funding Review after identity and agreement completion.
Read Becoming Funded for examples.
Your residence country must be eligible for purchases. An approved country
exception applies only to that country on your account. It does not change
payment-provider restrictions or make every payment method available.
2. Complete checkout
Checkout pre-fills your name, billing address, and country from the details
you entered at signup. You can edit these billing fields for the current order.
As you type a street address, checkout suggests matching addresses. Choosing
one fills in the city, state or province, postal code, and country, which you
code, and does not apply a discount or change affiliate commissions.
Attribution is saved when checkout starts, so a later payment confirmation keeps
it even if the cookie expires. See Partner Links
for consent, browser, and cookie-window details.
Review the final total after every code, add-on, or payment-method change.
Purchase limits
Every customer can complete up to 30 challenge accounts in any rolling 24 hours, 75 in
any rolling 7 days, and 200 in any rolling 30 days. Each individual challenge account counts, including every account in a multi-account checkout. The limits count every
challenge plan, account size, and payment method together, and a purchase is
accepted only if it stays within all three. Each window rolls from the time of
a completed purchase rather than resetting at midnight, so you can buy again as
earlier purchases age out. Failed or abandoned payments do not count.
− Elite also has a separate limit on the total account size each customer can
− buy; see Elite Accounts.
If you reach a limit, checkout shows a Purchase Limit Reached notice that
shows your selected quantity, the quantity available now, and exactly how many accounts to remove. No payment is taken. If waiting can make the full quantity fit, the notice also shows when.
Accounts under a stricter, individually applied purchase limit see that limit
on the checkout page as well. The notice clears when the displayed wait ends;
checkout checks your current limits again when you submit.
An unfinished payment temporarily reserves a slot for each account in the order. You can resume a
crypto checkout that already has a payment session, even if that reservation
uses your last available slot. If a checkout expires before its payment session
opens, start a new checkout.
4. Read the payment result
Checkout opens a fresh confirmation page after you submit payment. If your
session has ended, sign in again to return to the same order's payment status.
After
Buying a Challenge
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/buying-a-challenge
Compare challenge terms, complete checkout, understand payment states, and find the evaluation account after purchase.
1. Compare the plan terms
Open the challenge selector. Select a
plan and account size, then review the complete order summary before checkout.
Every plan is a 1-Step evaluation. Select, Prime, and Signature each offer
+ \$10K, \$25K, \$50K, and \$100K accounts. Elite offers \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and
+ \$50K accounts, each with a choice of a 3% daily loss limit (3% DLL) or no
+ daily loss limit (No DLL). Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at
+ checkout; it cannot be changed after purchase. List prices are \$49, \$95,
+ \$249, and \$495 with 3% DLL, and \$89, \$175, \$449, and \$889 with No DLL.
+ See Elite Accounts. \$200K
accounts are not available at checkout.
+ Every Elite account includes an Elite Case,
+ whose tier depends on the size and DLL option. The Elite pricing card and the
+ checkout order summary show the case your selection includes, and the sealed
+ case is added to Rewards when the order is paid.
The homepage shows whole-dollar prices. When PERPS is available, the cards
show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate @CODE link takes priority at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. Without either, checkout may automatically apply PERPS when the offer is enabled for you. Otherwise, enter a code and select Add Code. A valid code
discounts the list price once, including the 90/10 upgrade. There is no additional catalog discount. A percentage discount on a
whole-dollar total rounds down to the nearest whole dollar, so the discounted
price on a homepage card is the amount you pay and you never get less than
the stated percentage off.
The percentage comes from the current PERPS offer and can change with public
promotions. A different discount or affiliate code replaces PERPS; percentage discounts do
not stack. Available store credit is applied automatically after the discount.
A custom price that includes cents, or a discounted total under \$1, keeps
its exact cents, which checkout shows in full. The final order total is the
amount you will pay.
PERPS can give a larger discount on your first purchase. The homepage cards
and banner show that first-purchase discount until you have bought an account,
then the standard PERPS discount. A refunded purchase still uses up the first-purchase
discount. Affiliate codes share the same first-purchase discount: on your first
purchase, an affiliate code gives you whichever is larger, the first-purchase
discount or the affiliate's standard discount. A promotion that applies to the
affiliate code uses its own discount instead.
+ Some other codes also give a larger discount on your first purchase and a
+ standard discount on every purchase after it. These codes count every purchase
+ you have made, whichever code you used. Checkout shows the discount that applies
+ to you before you pay. A failed or abandoned checkout does not use up the
+ first-purchase discount, but a completed purchase does, even if it is later
+ refunded. While one checkout with the first-purchase discount is still open,
+ other checkouts get the standard discount for up to 30 minutes.
Before email verification and profile setup, an affiliate-link visit shows the
selected code and the price before discounts. The code stays selected through
sign-in, and checkout validates its discount and eligibility afterward. Other
visits preview the current standing-code discount, including any selected
profit-split upgrade. The collapsed summary shows the same price as the expanded
summary. Use Back at the left of the checkout header, beside the logo,
to return to the challenge selector. This is a public price preview; enter the
code at payment and review the confirmed total.
Checkout shows the chosen plan and account size as the item in your order,
with its collector card, fee, and rules, beside the billing and payment form.
Use the Account Size control to move between the sizes the plan sells,
and the Challenge Type control to switch plans, without leaving checkout.
\$100K | 1
Changing to a size with a lower limit reduces the number of accounts to that
limit. The order is one payment for every account in it:
- The fee, any profit-split upgrade, and the total reflect every account.
A discount or affiliate code applies once to the whole order, and
store credit is applied to the order total.
- Promotions that require a minimum purchase amount count the whole order
total after discounts. For example, two accounts that total more than a
promotion's threshold qualify even when one account alone would not.
- Winning trade offers apply only to an order for one account.
- A promotion that includes a reward case gives one case for each account in
the order, up to any per-customer limit the promotion has.
+ - An Elite order gives one Elite Case for each account, in addition to any
+ promotion case.
- Each account is a separate evaluation with its own account number, rules,
and progress. All of them appear in the dashboard account switcher after
payment.
Use the Trading Calculators to compare scenarios
before buying. Their example inputs and optional rules do not define the
terms of the challenge you select.
Challenge cards show “Up to 90%” when the optional profit-split upgrade is
available. Select the info icon beside the split to see the standard share and
upgrade terms. The upgrade costs extra; the displayed challenge price does not
include it.
The standard profit split is 80% to you and 20% to MyFundedPerps. You can choose
+ the 90/10 upgrade only during checkout, on every plan including Elite. It cannot be added to an existing
account. Each size and plan has an explicit upgrade price; use the final total
shown at checkout rather than calculating a percentage surcharge yourself.
Funded allocation before you buy
The maximum is \$300K total funded allocation, with a maximum of **\$100K
per model type** across active funded accounts. Elite is its own model type.
+ Elite has no limit on the total account size you can buy, so you can pass
+ more Elite evaluations than its \$100K funded limit allows at once. Buying or passing
another
challenge does not guarantee automatic funding. An account that would exceed
either limit enters Funding Review after identity and agreement completion.
Read Becoming Funded for examples.
Your residence country must be eligible for purchases. An approved country
exception applies only to that country on your account. It does not change
payment-provider restrictions or make every payment method available.
2. Complete checkout
Checkout pre-fills your name, billing address, and country from the details
you entered at signup. You can edit these billing fields for the current order.
As you type a street address, checkout suggests matching addresses. Choosing
one fills in the city, state or province, postal code, and country, which you
code, and does not apply a discount or change affiliate commissions.
Attribution is saved when checkout starts, so a later payment confirmation keeps
it even if the cookie expires. See Partner Links
for consent, browser, and cookie-window details.
Review the final total after every code, add-on, or payment-method change.
Purchase limits
Every customer can complete up to 30 challenge accounts in any rolling 24 hours, 75 in
any rolling 7 days, and 200 in any rolling 30 days. Each individual challenge account counts, including every account in a multi-account checkout. The limits count every
challenge plan, account size, and payment method together, and a purchase is
accepted only if it stays within all three. Each window rolls from the time of
a completed purchase rather than resetting at midnight, so you can buy again as
earlier purchases age out. Failed or abandoned payments do not count.
If you reach a limit, checkout shows a Purchase Limit Reached notice that
shows your selected quantity, the quantity available now, and exactly how many accounts to remove. No payment is taken. If waiting can make the full quantity fit, the notice also shows when.
Accounts under a stricter, individually applied purchase limit see that limit
on the checkout page as well. The notice clears when the displayed wait ends;
checkout checks your current limits again when you submit.
An unfinished payment temporarily reserves a slot for each account in the order. You can resume a
crypto checkout that already has a payment session, even if that reservation
uses your last available slot. If a checkout expires before its payment session
opens, start a new checkout.
4. Read the payment result
Checkout opens a fresh confirmation page after you submit payment. If your
session has ended, sign in again to return to the same order's payment status.
Buying a Challenge
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/buying-a-challenge
Compare challenge terms, complete checkout, understand payment states, and find the evaluation account after purchase.
1. Compare the plan terms
Open the challenge selector. Select a
plan and account size, then review the complete order summary before checkout.
Every plan is a 1-Step evaluation. Select, Prime, and Signature each offer
− \$10K, \$25K, \$50K, and \$100K accounts. Elite offers \$5K, \$10K, and \$25K
− accounts at list prices of \$100, \$200, and \$500, with a \$200,000 limit on the total Elite account size each customer
− can buy; see Elite Accounts. \$200K
+ \$10K, \$25K, \$50K, and \$100K accounts. Elite offers \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and
+ \$50K accounts, each with a choice of a 3% daily loss limit (3% DLL) or no
+ daily loss limit (No DLL). Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at
+ checkout; it cannot be changed after purchase. List prices are \$49, \$95,
+ \$249, and \$495 with 3% DLL, and \$89, \$175, \$449, and \$889 with No DLL.
+ See Elite Accounts. \$200K
accounts are not available at checkout.
+ Every Elite account includes an Elite Case,
+ whose tier depends on the size and DLL option. The Elite pricing card and the
+ checkout order summary show the case your selection includes, and the sealed
+ case is added to Rewards when the order is paid.
The homepage shows whole-dollar prices. When PERPS is available, the cards
show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate @CODE link takes priority at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. Without either, checkout may automatically apply PERPS when the offer is enabled for you. Otherwise, enter a code and select Add Code. A valid code
discounts the list price once, including the 90/10 upgrade. There is no additional catalog discount. A percentage discount on a
whole-dollar total rounds down to the nearest whole dollar, so the discounted
price on a homepage card is the amount you pay and you never get less than
the stated percentage off.
The percentage comes from the current PERPS offer and can change with public
promotions. A different discount or affiliate code replaces PERPS; percentage discounts do
not stack. Available store credit is applied automatically after the discount.
A custom price that includes cents, or a discounted total under \$1, keeps
its exact cents, which checkout shows in full. The final order total is the
amount you will pay.
PERPS can give a larger discount on your first purchase. The homepage cards
and banner show that first-purchase discount until you have bought an account,
then the standard PERPS discount. A refunded purchase still uses up the first-purchase
discount. Affiliate codes share the same first-purchase discount: on your first
purchase, an affiliate code gives you whichever is larger, the first-purchase
discount or the affiliate's standard discount. A promotion that applies to the
affiliate code uses its own discount instead.
+ Some other codes also give a larger discount on your first purchase and a
+ standard discount on every purchase after it. These codes count every purchase
+ you have made, whichever code you used. Checkout shows the discount that applies
+ to you before you pay. A failed or abandoned checkout does not use up the
+ first-purchase discount, but a completed purchase does, even if it is later
+ refunded. While one checkout with the first-purchase discount is still open,
+ other checkouts get the standard discount for up to 30 minutes.
Before email verification and profile setup, an affiliate-link visit shows the
selected code and the price before discounts. The code stays selected through
sign-in, and checkout validates its discount and eligibility afterward. Other
visits preview the current standing-code discount, including any selected
profit-split upgrade. The collapsed summary shows the same price as the expanded
summary. Use Back at the left of the checkout header, beside the logo,
to return to the challenge selector. This is a public price preview; enter the
code at payment and review the confirmed total.
Checkout shows the chosen plan and account size as the item in your order,
with its collector card, fee, and rules, beside the billing and payment form.
Use the Account Size control to move between the sizes the plan sells,
and the Challenge Type control to switch plans, without leaving checkout.
\$100K | 1
Changing to a size with a lower limit reduces the number of accounts to that
limit. The order is one payment for every account in it:
- The fee, any profit-split upgrade, and the total reflect every account.
A discount or affiliate code applies once to the whole order, and
store credit is applied to the order total.
- Promotions that require a minimum purchase amount count the whole order
total after discounts. For example, two accounts that total more than a
promotion's threshold qualify even when one account alone would not.
- Winning trade offers apply only to an order for one account.
- A promotion that includes a reward case gives one case for each account in
the order, up to any per-customer limit the promotion has.
+ - An Elite order gives one Elite Case for each account, in addition to any
+ promotion case.
- Each account is a separate evaluation with its own account number, rules,
and progress. All of them appear in the dashboard account switcher after
payment.
Use the Trading Calculators to compare scenarios
before buying. Their example inputs and optional rules do not define the
terms of the challenge you select.
Challenge cards show “Up to 90%” when the optional profit-split upgrade is
available. Select the info icon beside the split to see the standard share and
upgrade terms. The upgrade costs extra; the displayed challenge price does not
include it.
The standard profit split is 80% to you and 20% to MyFundedPerps. You can choose
− the 90/10 upgrade only during checkout, and Elite does not offer it. It cannot be added to an existing
+ the 90/10 upgrade only during checkout, on every plan including Elite. It cannot be added to an existing
account. Each size and plan has an explicit upgrade price; use the final total
shown at checkout rather than calculating a percentage surcharge yourself.
Funded allocation before you buy
The maximum is \$300K total funded allocation, with a maximum of **\$100K
per model type** across active funded accounts. Elite is its own model type.
− Its \$200,000 purchase limit is higher than its \$100K funded limit, so you can
− pass more Elite evaluations than can be funded at once. Buying or passing
+ Elite has no limit on the total account size you can buy, so you can pass
+ more Elite evaluations than its \$100K funded limit allows at once. Buying or passing
another
challenge does not guarantee automatic funding. An account that would exceed
either limit enters Funding Review after identity and agreement completion.
Read Becoming Funded for examples.
Your residence country must be eligible for purchases. An approved country
exception applies only to that country on your account. It does not change
payment-provider restrictions or make every payment method available.
2. Complete checkout
Checkout pre-fills your name, billing address, and country from the details
you entered at signup. You can edit these billing fields for the current order.
As you type a street address, checkout suggests matching addresses. Choosing
one fills in the city, state or province, postal code, and country, which you
code, and does not apply a discount or change affiliate commissions.
Attribution is saved when checkout starts, so a later payment confirmation keeps
it even if the cookie expires. See Partner Links
for consent, browser, and cookie-window details.
Review the final total after every code, add-on, or payment-method change.
Purchase limits
Every customer can complete up to 30 challenge accounts in any rolling 24 hours, 75 in
any rolling 7 days, and 200 in any rolling 30 days. Each individual challenge account counts, including every account in a multi-account checkout. The limits count every
challenge plan, account size, and payment method together, and a purchase is
accepted only if it stays within all three. Each window rolls from the time of
a completed purchase rather than resetting at midnight, so you can buy again as
earlier purchases age out. Failed or abandoned payments do not count.
− Elite also has a separate limit on the total account size each customer can
− buy; see Elite Accounts.
If you reach a limit, checkout shows a Purchase Limit Reached notice that
shows your selected quantity, the quantity available now, and exactly how many accounts to remove. No payment is taken. If waiting can make the full quantity fit, the notice also shows when.
Accounts under a stricter, individually applied purchase limit see that limit
on the checkout page as well. The notice clears when the displayed wait ends;
checkout checks your current limits again when you submit.
An unfinished payment temporarily reserves a slot for each account in the order. You can resume a
crypto checkout that already has a payment session, even if that reservation
uses your last available slot. If a checkout expires before its payment session
opens, start a new checkout.
4. Read the payment result
Checkout opens a fresh confirmation page after you submit payment. If your
session has ended, sign in again to return to the same order's payment status.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Billing and RewardsNumber of ticket prizes reduced from 12 to 11; Challenge account prize options simplified; FP Points and Elite Cases added as new prize types; discount code range changed from 30-75% to 35-40%.Oct 12
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Prize-account issuance is confirmed in the app and does not send the standard
account-issued email.
For accounts currently sold in the challenge selector, the reward's displayed
value follows the plan, account size, and profit split's catalog list price
before checkout codes. PERPS and other purchase discounts do not change a
reward account's displayed value. Price changes can change displayed reward
values without changing the published drop rates or store-credit amounts.
Matt's Golden Ticket
Matt's Golden Ticket is awarded through giveaways and events. It cannot be
bought with FP Points, so its carousel slide shows Giveaways and Events Only
until you hold one. A ticket you hold is listed first under My Rewards, and the
carousel shows Open with the number of tickets you hold.
− Every ticket pays one of 12 prizes:
Prize type | Possible prizes
− Challenge account | 100K Select, 100K Prime, or 100K Signature account; 100K Select + 100K Prime; 100K Prime + 100K Signature; or Max Allocation (100K Select, Prime, and Signature)
Store credit | \$250, \$500, or \$1,000
Merch Cases | 3, 5, or 10 sealed Merch Cases
Select Drop Rates on a ticket, or the info icon on its carousel slide, to
see the exact rate of each prize. The rates add up to 100%, and they are the
same rates the server uses when it opens the ticket.
Opening a ticket has the same onboarding and eligibility requirements as
opening a case. Your prize is decided and recorded the moment the ticket
opens. The 3D show that follows lets you snap the ticket off its cord, pick a
side, and choose how to tear it. Those choices are for fun and do not change
the prize. After the tear, select Skip to go straight to the result. If you leave early,
the prize is already in pull history. When you hold another ticket, select
Open Another to open it.
With 3D Scenes turned off, or on a device that cannot run the show, the
ticket opens straight to a still result showing your prize.
Each prize is delivered the same way as the matching case prize:
- Accounts are issued as evaluation accounts, like any other
− account prize. A combination prize issues each of its accounts separately.
- Store credit is added to your balance like credit won from a case.
- Merch Cases are added to My Rewards as sealed cases. Open each one
separately.
Opened tickets appear in pull history with the prize they paid. Tickets do not
have a share card.
Birthday Cases
After completing identity verification, you receive one automatic Birthday Case
each year on your verified birthday. The birthday is based on your verified
identity document, not the date entered in your profile. Awards use UTC and
normally arrive within an hour. You'll receive an email when your annual case
is added, with a link to open Rewards. February 29 birthdays are celebrated on February 28 in
non-leap years. Verification must remain valid and your account must not be
banned. Birthdays before you become eligible are not awarded retroactively.
Birthday Cases can also be awarded through giveaways and events. They cannot be bought
with FP Points and does not appear in the case carousel. A Birthday Case you
hold is listed under My Rewards. Open it to lift the cake's top tier and
release a fountain of coins and reward cards, followed by the same prize spin
used by other cases. With reduced motion enabled, the fountain is skipped.
Use the sound control in the opening dialog to mute or unmute the birthday
music.
A Birthday Case contains the prizes of one of the case tiers, at that tier's
drop rates. A sealed Birthday Case under My Rewards lists the
rewards it can contain, and the opening dialog shows the same list before you
open it. Prizes are delivered the same way as prizes from that tier, and opened
Birthday Cases appear in pull history.
Merch Cases
A Merch Case cannot be bought with FP Points. Every Merch Case pays one piece of
MyFundedPerps merch: a T-Shirt, Pillow, Long Sleeve Tee, Polo, Baseball Cap, or
Full-Zip Hoodie.
Merch you win appears in the Merch section of My Rewards. For each item,
choose one of these:
- Keep and Ship: enter your shipping details. Clothing sizes are US men's
sizes. Merch ships to the US, Canada, Mexico, and Europe. It can take up to
2-3 weeks to receive your tracking code.
- Take \$25 Credit: exchange the item for \$25 in store credit instead.
This is also the option for addresses outside the shipping regions.
You do not have to decide right away. The item waits in Rewards until you
choose.
Discount code prizes
− Bronze, Silver, Gold, and Diamond cases can pay a discount code, from 30% to
− 75% off depending on the case. The code is created for you when you open the
case and is saved under Discount Codes on the Rewards page, with Copy
and Use Code buttons. Use Code opens checkout with the code applied.
Each discount code:
- Works only on your account. Anyone else who enters it sees it as an invalid
code.
- Can be used once. One use covers a whole checkout, including an order for
several accounts.
- Expires 30 days after you open the case. The expiry date is shown beside
the code.
If a payment with the code fails or is canceled, the code becomes available
again until it expires. A refunded order does not return the code. Discount
codes cannot be exchanged for store credit and do not have a share card.
Competition account prizes
Competition account prizes are reviewed before issuance and provided as
Select evaluation accounts at the awarded size.
Competition standings
For account-scored competitions, final standings value each ranked account at
the competition's end, including an early end. Pausing does not finalize the
leaderboard; scoring resumes when the competition resumes. Final results can
remain pending while end-time valuations finish. If the required price history
is unavailable, final results and prize issuance may be delayed for review.
Team scores include every active member. A member who has not traded contributes
zero profit or loss, including in average and best-member scoring. Removed or
disqualified members no longer count toward team capacity or the minimum team
being graded; drawings already being graded may finish after the rewards run
out and receive no reward. A grading failure does not use up an attempt.
A won account drop adds a free evaluation account with the size and profit
split set when the drop was created; normal challenge rules apply. A won case
drop adds one sealed case to Rewards. Your puzzle page shows the status of
each attempt and the grader's notes. Drawings are kept for 30 days for
review and then deleted.
FP Points
When FP Points are enabled for your account, the Rewards page shows your
balance, the case carousel, and an FP Points tab with the earning rules
(Ways to Earn) and your Points History.
Points can come from qualifying activities shown in the app, such as challenge
− purchases, your first account pass, affiliate revenue, or support grants. The
current rates and bonus amounts are listed under Ways to Earn. Purchase and
affiliate points are spendable as soon as they are awarded: the FP Points
refund hold is currently disabled. A refund still reverses the related points
and can leave a negative points balance if those points have already been
spent. The reversal appears as an adjustment in Points History.
Support can also correct a balance by removing points. A removal appears as
a Support Adjustment in Points History and never takes your balance below
zero.
First Account Pass automatically awards 15,000 FP once per user when
you pass your first real evaluation that proceeds to funding review. If that
evaluation is a 1K or 2.5K account, the bonus is 5,000 FP. The points
are spendable immediately; you do not need to claim them or wait for identity
After
Prize-account issuance is confirmed in the app and does not send the standard
account-issued email.
For accounts currently sold in the challenge selector, the reward's displayed
value follows the plan, account size, and profit split's catalog list price
before checkout codes. PERPS and other purchase discounts do not change a
reward account's displayed value. Price changes can change displayed reward
values without changing the published drop rates or store-credit amounts.
Matt's Golden Ticket
Matt's Golden Ticket is awarded through giveaways and events. It cannot be
bought with FP Points, so its carousel slide shows Giveaways and Events Only
until you hold one. A ticket you hold is listed first under My Rewards, and the
carousel shows Open with the number of tickets you hold.
+ Every ticket pays one of 11 prizes:
Prize type | Possible prizes
+ Challenge account | 100K Select or 100K Signature account
Store credit | \$250, \$500, or \$1,000
Merch Cases | 3, 5, or 10 sealed Merch Cases
+ FP Points | 250,000, 500,000, or 1,000,000 FP Points
Select Drop Rates on a ticket, or the info icon on its carousel slide, to
see the exact rate of each prize. The rates add up to 100%, and they are the
same rates the server uses when it opens the ticket.
Opening a ticket has the same onboarding and eligibility requirements as
opening a case. Your prize is decided and recorded the moment the ticket
opens. The 3D show that follows lets you snap the ticket off its cord, pick a
side, and choose how to tear it. Those choices are for fun and do not change
the prize. After the tear, select Skip to go straight to the result. If you leave early,
the prize is already in pull history. When you hold another ticket, select
Open Another to open it.
With 3D Scenes turned off, or on a device that cannot run the show, the
ticket opens straight to a still result showing your prize.
Each prize is delivered the same way as the matching case prize:
- Accounts are issued as evaluation accounts, like any other
+ account prize. A combination prize from an earlier ticket issues each of
+ its accounts separately.
- Store credit is added to your balance like credit won from a case.
+ - FP Points are added to your balance right away, like
+ FP Points won from a case.
- Merch Cases are added to My Rewards as sealed cases. Open each one
separately.
Opened tickets appear in pull history with the prize they paid. Tickets do not
have a share card.
Birthday Cases
After completing identity verification, you receive one automatic Birthday Case
each year on your verified birthday. The birthday is based on your verified
identity document, not the date entered in your profile. Awards use UTC and
normally arrive within an hour. You'll receive an email when your annual case
is added, with a link to open Rewards. February 29 birthdays are celebrated on February 28 in
non-leap years. Verification must remain valid and your account must not be
banned. Birthdays before you become eligible are not awarded retroactively.
Birthday Cases can also be awarded through giveaways and events. They cannot be bought
with FP Points and does not appear in the case carousel. A Birthday Case you
hold is listed under My Rewards. Open it to lift the cake's top tier and
release a fountain of coins and reward cards, followed by the same prize spin
used by other cases. With reduced motion enabled, the fountain is skipped.
Use the sound control in the opening dialog to mute or unmute the birthday
music.
A Birthday Case contains the prizes of one of the case tiers, at that tier's
drop rates. A sealed Birthday Case under My Rewards lists the
rewards it can contain, and the opening dialog shows the same list before you
open it. Prizes are delivered the same way as prizes from that tier, and opened
Birthday Cases appear in pull history.
+ Elite Cases
+ Every Elite challenge account you buy comes with one Elite Case. Its tier
+ depends on the account size and the Daily Loss Limit option you choose:
+ Elite account | 3% DLL | No DLL
+ 5K | Elite Iron Case | Elite Iron Case
+ 10K | Elite Iron Case | Elite Bronze Case
+ 25K | Elite Silver Case | Elite Gold Case
+ 50K | Elite Diamond Case | Elite Diamond Case
+ The Elite plan cards and the checkout order summary show the case your
+ selection includes. No code is needed. An order of several Elite accounts
+ earns one case per account, and the case is added alongside any case a
+ promotion includes. The sealed case appears under My Rewards as soon as the
+ order is paid, and you receive an in-app notification.
+ An Elite Case is a black edition of its tier's case. It contains the same
+ prizes at the same drop rates as the standard case of that
+ tier, opens the same way, and appears in pull history under its Elite name.
+ Elite Cases cannot be bought with FP Points.
Merch Cases
A Merch Case cannot be bought with FP Points. Every Merch Case pays one piece of
MyFundedPerps merch: a T-Shirt, Pillow, Long Sleeve Tee, Polo, Baseball Cap, or
Full-Zip Hoodie.
Merch you win appears in the Merch section of My Rewards. For each item,
choose one of these:
- Keep and Ship: enter your shipping details. Clothing sizes are US men's
sizes. Merch ships to the US, Canada, Mexico, and Europe. It can take up to
2-3 weeks to receive your tracking code.
- Take \$25 Credit: exchange the item for \$25 in store credit instead.
This is also the option for addresses outside the shipping regions.
You do not have to decide right away. The item waits in Rewards until you
choose.
Discount code prizes
+ Bronze, Silver, Gold, and Diamond cases can pay a 35% or 40% discount code. The code is created for you when you open the
case and is saved under Discount Codes on the Rewards page, with Copy
and Use Code buttons. Use Code opens checkout with the code applied.
Each discount code:
- Works only on your account. Anyone else who enters it sees it as an invalid
code.
- Can be used once. One use covers a whole checkout, including an order for
several accounts.
- Expires 30 days after you open the case. The expiry date is shown beside
the code.
If a payment with the code fails or is canceled, the code becomes available
again until it expires. A refunded order does not return the code. Discount
codes cannot be exchanged for store credit and do not have a share card.
+ FP Points prizes
+ Every case tier can pay FP Points, from 1,000 FP in an Iron Case up to
+ 250,000 FP in an Obsidian or Eclipse Case. The case's **Possible Rewards &
+ Drop Rates** lists each amount it can pay. Matt's Golden Ticket can pay
+ 250,000, 500,000, or 1,000,000 FP Points.
+ FP Points you win are added to your balance the moment you open the case.
+ They appear in Points History as a prize from that case, are spendable right
+ away, and expire 90 days after you win them like any other points (see
+ FP Points expiry). FP Points prizes do not have a share
+ card.
Competition account prizes
Competition account prizes are reviewed before issuance and provided as
Select evaluation accounts at the awarded size.
Competition standings
For account-scored competitions, final standings value each ranked account at
the competition's end, including an early end. Pausing does not finalize the
leaderboard; scoring resumes when the competition resumes. Final results can
remain pending while end-time valuations finish. If the required price history
is unavailable, final results and prize issuance may be delayed for review.
Team scores include every active member. A member who has not traded contributes
zero profit or loss, including in average and best-member scoring. Removed or
disqualified members no longer count toward team capacity or the minimum team
being graded; drawings already being graded may finish after the rewards run
out and receive no reward. A grading failure does not use up an attempt.
A won account drop adds a free evaluation account with the size and profit
split set when the drop was created; normal challenge rules apply. A won case
drop adds one sealed case to Rewards. Your puzzle page shows the status of
each attempt and the grader's notes. Drawings are kept for 30 days for
review and then deleted.
FP Points
When FP Points are enabled for your account, the Rewards page shows your
balance, the case carousel, and an FP Points tab with the earning rules
(Ways to Earn) and your Points History.
Points can come from qualifying activities shown in the app, such as challenge
+ purchases, your first account pass, affiliate revenue, case prizes, or support
+ grants. The
current rates and bonus amounts are listed under Ways to Earn. Purchase and
affiliate points are spendable as soon as they are awarded: the FP Points
refund hold is currently disabled. A refund still reverses the related points
and can leave a negative points balance if those points have already been
spent. The reversal appears as an adjustment in Points History.
Support can also correct a balance by removing points. A removal appears as
a Support Adjustment in Points History and never takes your balance below
zero.
First Account Pass automatically awards 15,000 FP once per user when
you pass your first real evaluation that proceeds to funding review. If that
evaluation is a 1K or 2.5K account, the bonus is 5,000 FP. The points
are spendable immediately; you do not need to claim them or wait for identity
Prize-account issuance is confirmed in the app and does not send the standard
account-issued email.
For accounts currently sold in the challenge selector, the reward's displayed
value follows the plan, account size, and profit split's catalog list price
before checkout codes. PERPS and other purchase discounts do not change a
reward account's displayed value. Price changes can change displayed reward
values without changing the published drop rates or store-credit amounts.
Matt's Golden Ticket
Matt's Golden Ticket is awarded through giveaways and events. It cannot be
bought with FP Points, so its carousel slide shows Giveaways and Events Only
until you hold one. A ticket you hold is listed first under My Rewards, and the
carousel shows Open with the number of tickets you hold.
− Every ticket pays one of 12 prizes:
+ Every ticket pays one of 11 prizes:
Prize type | Possible prizes
− Challenge account | 100K Select, 100K Prime, or 100K Signature account; 100K Select + 100K Prime; 100K Prime + 100K Signature; or Max Allocation (100K Select, Prime, and Signature)
+ Challenge account | 100K Select or 100K Signature account
Store credit | \$250, \$500, or \$1,000
Merch Cases | 3, 5, or 10 sealed Merch Cases
+ FP Points | 250,000, 500,000, or 1,000,000 FP Points
Select Drop Rates on a ticket, or the info icon on its carousel slide, to
see the exact rate of each prize. The rates add up to 100%, and they are the
same rates the server uses when it opens the ticket.
Opening a ticket has the same onboarding and eligibility requirements as
opening a case. Your prize is decided and recorded the moment the ticket
opens. The 3D show that follows lets you snap the ticket off its cord, pick a
side, and choose how to tear it. Those choices are for fun and do not change
the prize. After the tear, select Skip to go straight to the result. If you leave early,
the prize is already in pull history. When you hold another ticket, select
Open Another to open it.
With 3D Scenes turned off, or on a device that cannot run the show, the
ticket opens straight to a still result showing your prize.
Each prize is delivered the same way as the matching case prize:
- Accounts are issued as evaluation accounts, like any other
− account prize. A combination prize issues each of its accounts separately.
+ account prize. A combination prize from an earlier ticket issues each of
+ its accounts separately.
- Store credit is added to your balance like credit won from a case.
+ - FP Points are added to your balance right away, like
+ FP Points won from a case.
- Merch Cases are added to My Rewards as sealed cases. Open each one
separately.
Opened tickets appear in pull history with the prize they paid. Tickets do not
have a share card.
Birthday Cases
After completing identity verification, you receive one automatic Birthday Case
each year on your verified birthday. The birthday is based on your verified
identity document, not the date entered in your profile. Awards use UTC and
normally arrive within an hour. You'll receive an email when your annual case
is added, with a link to open Rewards. February 29 birthdays are celebrated on February 28 in
non-leap years. Verification must remain valid and your account must not be
banned. Birthdays before you become eligible are not awarded retroactively.
Birthday Cases can also be awarded through giveaways and events. They cannot be bought
with FP Points and does not appear in the case carousel. A Birthday Case you
hold is listed under My Rewards. Open it to lift the cake's top tier and
release a fountain of coins and reward cards, followed by the same prize spin
used by other cases. With reduced motion enabled, the fountain is skipped.
Use the sound control in the opening dialog to mute or unmute the birthday
music.
A Birthday Case contains the prizes of one of the case tiers, at that tier's
drop rates. A sealed Birthday Case under My Rewards lists the
rewards it can contain, and the opening dialog shows the same list before you
open it. Prizes are delivered the same way as prizes from that tier, and opened
Birthday Cases appear in pull history.
+ Elite Cases
+ Every Elite challenge account you buy comes with one Elite Case. Its tier
+ depends on the account size and the Daily Loss Limit option you choose:
+ Elite account | 3% DLL | No DLL
+ 5K | Elite Iron Case | Elite Iron Case
+ 10K | Elite Iron Case | Elite Bronze Case
+ 25K | Elite Silver Case | Elite Gold Case
+ 50K | Elite Diamond Case | Elite Diamond Case
+ The Elite plan cards and the checkout order summary show the case your
+ selection includes. No code is needed. An order of several Elite accounts
+ earns one case per account, and the case is added alongside any case a
+ promotion includes. The sealed case appears under My Rewards as soon as the
+ order is paid, and you receive an in-app notification.
+ An Elite Case is a black edition of its tier's case. It contains the same
+ prizes at the same drop rates as the standard case of that
+ tier, opens the same way, and appears in pull history under its Elite name.
+ Elite Cases cannot be bought with FP Points.
Merch Cases
A Merch Case cannot be bought with FP Points. Every Merch Case pays one piece of
MyFundedPerps merch: a T-Shirt, Pillow, Long Sleeve Tee, Polo, Baseball Cap, or
Full-Zip Hoodie.
Merch you win appears in the Merch section of My Rewards. For each item,
choose one of these:
- Keep and Ship: enter your shipping details. Clothing sizes are US men's
sizes. Merch ships to the US, Canada, Mexico, and Europe. It can take up to
2-3 weeks to receive your tracking code.
- Take \$25 Credit: exchange the item for \$25 in store credit instead.
This is also the option for addresses outside the shipping regions.
You do not have to decide right away. The item waits in Rewards until you
choose.
Discount code prizes
− Bronze, Silver, Gold, and Diamond cases can pay a discount code, from 30% to
− 75% off depending on the case. The code is created for you when you open the
+ Bronze, Silver, Gold, and Diamond cases can pay a 35% or 40% discount code. The code is created for you when you open the
case and is saved under Discount Codes on the Rewards page, with Copy
and Use Code buttons. Use Code opens checkout with the code applied.
Each discount code:
- Works only on your account. Anyone else who enters it sees it as an invalid
code.
- Can be used once. One use covers a whole checkout, including an order for
several accounts.
- Expires 30 days after you open the case. The expiry date is shown beside
the code.
If a payment with the code fails or is canceled, the code becomes available
again until it expires. A refunded order does not return the code. Discount
codes cannot be exchanged for store credit and do not have a share card.
+ FP Points prizes
+ Every case tier can pay FP Points, from 1,000 FP in an Iron Case up to
+ 250,000 FP in an Obsidian or Eclipse Case. The case's **Possible Rewards &
+ Drop Rates** lists each amount it can pay. Matt's Golden Ticket can pay
+ 250,000, 500,000, or 1,000,000 FP Points.
+ FP Points you win are added to your balance the moment you open the case.
+ They appear in Points History as a prize from that case, are spendable right
+ away, and expire 90 days after you win them like any other points (see
+ FP Points expiry). FP Points prizes do not have a share
+ card.
Competition account prizes
Competition account prizes are reviewed before issuance and provided as
Select evaluation accounts at the awarded size.
Competition standings
For account-scored competitions, final standings value each ranked account at
the competition's end, including an early end. Pausing does not finalize the
leaderboard; scoring resumes when the competition resumes. Final results can
remain pending while end-time valuations finish. If the required price history
is unavailable, final results and prize issuance may be delayed for review.
Team scores include every active member. A member who has not traded contributes
zero profit or loss, including in average and best-member scoring. Removed or
disqualified members no longer count toward team capacity or the minimum team
being graded; drawings already being graded may finish after the rewards run
out and receive no reward. A grading failure does not use up an attempt.
A won account drop adds a free evaluation account with the size and profit
split set when the drop was created; normal challenge rules apply. A won case
drop adds one sealed case to Rewards. Your puzzle page shows the status of
each attempt and the grader's notes. Drawings are kept for 30 days for
review and then deleted.
FP Points
When FP Points are enabled for your account, the Rewards page shows your
balance, the case carousel, and an FP Points tab with the earning rules
(Ways to Earn) and your Points History.
Points can come from qualifying activities shown in the app, such as challenge
− purchases, your first account pass, affiliate revenue, or support grants. The
+ purchases, your first account pass, affiliate revenue, case prizes, or support
+ grants. The
current rates and bonus amounts are listed under Ways to Earn. Purchase and
affiliate points are spendable as soon as they are awarded: the FP Points
refund hold is currently disabled. A refund still reverses the related points
and can leave a negative points balance if those points have already been
spent. The reversal appears as an adjustment in Points History.
Support can also correct a balance by removing points. A removal appears as
a Support Adjustment in Points History and never takes your balance below
zero.
First Account Pass automatically awards 15,000 FP once per user when
you pass your first real evaluation that proceeds to funding review. If that
evaluation is a 1K or 2.5K account, the bonus is 5,000 FP. The points
are spendable immediately; you do not need to claim them or wait for identity
PremierMyFundedPerps · Becoming FundedElite account size limit removed, changing from $200,000 maximum to no limit.Oct 12
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
5. submit the signed agreement.
The Review and Sign button near the top takes you to the consent and
signature section. You can still scroll through the full document. Using the
shortcut does not give consent or sign the agreement; complete those actions
yourself after reviewing it.
Signing records the signature and its audit details with the exact document
fingerprint. Download the signed agreement when the action is available.
Funded allocation limits
You can receive up to \$300K in total funded allocation, with a maximum of
\$100K per model type. Prime, Select, Signature, and Elite are separate
model types. For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in
Signature totals \$300K, so a passed Elite account would need Funding Review.
− Elite can be bought up to \$200,000 of account size, so passed Elite
evaluations beyond its \$100K funded limit also wait for Funding Review; see
Elite Accounts.
The limit adds the original sizes of your active funded accounts. Two \$50K
accounts in the same model use its entire \$100K allowance. Trading profits,
losses, and withdrawals do not change the allocation used. Failed, closed, and
archived accounts no longer use active allocation.
If funding another passed account would exceed either limit, the application
enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement completion.
It does not receive a funded account automatically. For example, passing a
second \$100K Prime account while you already hold \$100K funded in Prime requires
Funding Review, even if your total across all models is below \$300K.
A review does not guarantee additional allocation. Funding approval must remain
After
5. submit the signed agreement.
The Review and Sign button near the top takes you to the consent and
signature section. You can still scroll through the full document. Using the
shortcut does not give consent or sign the agreement; complete those actions
yourself after reviewing it.
Signing records the signature and its audit details with the exact document
fingerprint. Download the signed agreement when the action is available.
Funded allocation limits
You can receive up to \$300K in total funded allocation, with a maximum of
\$100K per model type. Prime, Select, Signature, and Elite are separate
model types. For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in
Signature totals \$300K, so a passed Elite account would need Funding Review.
+ Elite has no limit on the total account size you can buy, so passed Elite
evaluations beyond its \$100K funded limit also wait for Funding Review; see
Elite Accounts.
The limit adds the original sizes of your active funded accounts. Two \$50K
accounts in the same model use its entire \$100K allowance. Trading profits,
losses, and withdrawals do not change the allocation used. Failed, closed, and
archived accounts no longer use active allocation.
If funding another passed account would exceed either limit, the application
enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement completion.
It does not receive a funded account automatically. For example, passing a
second \$100K Prime account while you already hold \$100K funded in Prime requires
Funding Review, even if your total across all models is below \$300K.
A review does not guarantee additional allocation. Funding approval must remain
5. submit the signed agreement.
The Review and Sign button near the top takes you to the consent and
signature section. You can still scroll through the full document. Using the
shortcut does not give consent or sign the agreement; complete those actions
yourself after reviewing it.
Signing records the signature and its audit details with the exact document
fingerprint. Download the signed agreement when the action is available.
Funded allocation limits
You can receive up to \$300K in total funded allocation, with a maximum of
\$100K per model type. Prime, Select, Signature, and Elite are separate
model types. For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in
Signature totals \$300K, so a passed Elite account would need Funding Review.
− Elite can be bought up to \$200,000 of account size, so passed Elite
+ Elite has no limit on the total account size you can buy, so passed Elite
evaluations beyond its \$100K funded limit also wait for Funding Review; see
Elite Accounts.
The limit adds the original sizes of your active funded accounts. Two \$50K
accounts in the same model use its entire \$100K allowance. Trading profits,
losses, and withdrawals do not change the allocation used. Failed, closed, and
archived accounts no longer use active allocation.
If funding another passed account would exceed either limit, the application
enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement completion.
It does not receive a funded account automatically. For example, passing a
second \$100K Prime account while you already hold \$100K funded in Prime requires
Funding Review, even if your total across all models is below \$300K.
A review does not guarantee additional allocation. Funding approval must remain
PremierMyFundedPerps · Affiliate ProgramDiscount and pricing display removed from certain graphics; fixed 30% off offer now printed on all graphics; graphic categories reorganized and some titles changed; video download option removed.Oct 12
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Rewards and your dashboard.
Tier | Gross lifetime sales | One-time reward
Bronze | Starting tier | None
Silver | \$250 | Gold Case
Gold | \$1,000 | Diamond Case + 10K Prime account
Diamond | \$2,500 | Obsidian Case + 25K Prime account
Obsidian | \$5,000 | Obsidian Case + 50K Prime account
Goat | \$10,000 | Obsidian Case + 100K Prime account
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
− - Discount and prices. Most graphics print the discount buyers currently
− get with your code. The Start Your Evaluation graphic also prints each
− account's current price with that discount applied, including its story version. When a promotion applies
− to your code, they print the promotion's discount for a buyer's first use,
− and Your Code's Discount shows when it ends. If a promotion covers only
− some account sizes, the graphics print the lowest discount across all sizes,
− and each price uses its own size's discount. When the discount or a
− price changes, these graphics update the next time you open the tab.
− - Case Promo campaign. The square and story graphics include a fixed offer:
− 30% off every time the code is used, and a free case with each account
− purchased. This text does not update with your code's current discount.
− Share these graphics only while that campaign is active.
− - Elite graphics. The Elite Plan, Elite Case Promo, and **How Much
− Can You Open** graphics show Elite plan details and fixed campaign text: 30%
− off with your code and a free case. Their prices, rules, and leverage figures
− are printed as designed and do not update automatically. Share them only
− while that campaign is active.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
− - Formats. Story graphics use a vertical 1080 × 1920 layout. Choose a story
− version of Partnership Announcement, Start Your Evaluation, Trade Everything,
− Every Asset, 24/7 Markets, or How It Works. Larger post formats also include
− 24/7 Markets, How It Works, and Why MyFundedPerps.
− - Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG. The Stream Banner is
− animated, so you can also download it as a looping MP4 video. Creating the
− video works in Chrome and Edge.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
The team may issue you giveaway codes to share with your audience. A
Giveaways tab appears on the Affiliates page once your first code is
issued. Affiliates without giveaway codes do not see this tab.
- Each code shows the reward it grants: a free evaluation account with the
listed size and profit split, or a sealed reward case. A code limited to
After
Rewards and your dashboard.
Tier | Gross lifetime sales | One-time reward
Bronze | Starting tier | None
Silver | \$250 | Gold Case
Gold | \$1,000 | Diamond Case + 10K Prime account
Diamond | \$2,500 | Obsidian Case + 25K Prime account
Obsidian | \$5,000 | Obsidian Case + 50K Prime account
Goat | \$10,000 | Obsidian Case + 100K Prime account
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
+ - Fixed 30% offer. Every graphic prints a fixed offer of 30% off with
+ your code as part of its artwork. It does not update with your code's
+ current discount, which Your Code's Discount shows. Share the graphics
+ only while your code gives buyers 30% off.
+ - Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
+ Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
+ rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
+ - Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
+ post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
+ Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
+ and a 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
+ Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes, and
+ Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
+ - Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
The team may issue you giveaway codes to share with your audience. A
Giveaways tab appears on the Affiliates page once your first code is
issued. Affiliates without giveaway codes do not see this tab.
- Each code shows the reward it grants: a free evaluation account with the
listed size and profit split, or a sealed reward case. A code limited to
Rewards and your dashboard.
Tier | Gross lifetime sales | One-time reward
Bronze | Starting tier | None
Silver | \$250 | Gold Case
Gold | \$1,000 | Diamond Case + 10K Prime account
Diamond | \$2,500 | Obsidian Case + 25K Prime account
Obsidian | \$5,000 | Obsidian Case + 50K Prime account
Goat | \$10,000 | Obsidian Case + 100K Prime account
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
− - Discount and prices. Most graphics print the discount buyers currently
− get with your code. The Start Your Evaluation graphic also prints each
− account's current price with that discount applied, including its story version. When a promotion applies
− to your code, they print the promotion's discount for a buyer's first use,
− and Your Code's Discount shows when it ends. If a promotion covers only
− some account sizes, the graphics print the lowest discount across all sizes,
− and each price uses its own size's discount. When the discount or a
− price changes, these graphics update the next time you open the tab.
− - Case Promo campaign. The square and story graphics include a fixed offer:
− 30% off every time the code is used, and a free case with each account
− purchased. This text does not update with your code's current discount.
− Share these graphics only while that campaign is active.
− - Elite graphics. The Elite Plan, Elite Case Promo, and **How Much
− Can You Open** graphics show Elite plan details and fixed campaign text: 30%
− off with your code and a free case. Their prices, rules, and leverage figures
− are printed as designed and do not update automatically. Share them only
− while that campaign is active.
+ - Fixed 30% offer. Every graphic prints a fixed offer of 30% off with
+ your code as part of its artwork. It does not update with your code's
+ current discount, which Your Code's Discount shows. Share the graphics
+ only while your code gives buyers 30% off.
+ - Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
+ Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
+ rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
− - Formats. Story graphics use a vertical 1080 × 1920 layout. Choose a story
− version of Partnership Announcement, Start Your Evaluation, Trade Everything,
− Every Asset, 24/7 Markets, or How It Works. Larger post formats also include
− 24/7 Markets, How It Works, and Why MyFundedPerps.
− - Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG. The Stream Banner is
− animated, so you can also download it as a looping MP4 video. Creating the
− video works in Chrome and Edge.
+ - Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
+ post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
+ Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
+ and a 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
+ Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes, and
+ Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
+ - Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
The team may issue you giveaway codes to share with your audience. A
Giveaways tab appears on the Affiliates page once your first code is
issued. Affiliates without giveaway codes do not see this tab.
- Each code shows the reward it grants: a free evaluation account with the
listed size and profit split, or a sealed reward case. A code limited to
